oem and specialty products

Add to my manuals
238 Pages

advertisement

oem and specialty products | Manualzz

OEM AND SPECIALTY PRODUCTS

Founded in 1984, AFL is a global leader providing fiber optic products, equipment, and engineering services to the telecommunications, electric utility, wireless, energy, private network and OEM markets. AFL also serves a diverse mix of industry segments that include service providers, military and defense, mining, oil and gas, and biomedical.

AFL brings years of experience in developing solutions for customers, fostering a creative culture to drive and deploy innovative technologies that will improve communications for years to come. Our product line consists of fiber optic cable, transmission and substation accessories, outside plant equipment, connectors, fusion splicers, test equipment and training.

AFL’s service portfolio includes market-leading positions with the foremost communications companies supporting inside plant central office,

EF&I, outside plant, enterprise and wireless areas.

AFL is dedicated to bringing our customers a quality product as well as delivering superior value.

OEM and Specialty Products

Table of Contents

Fusion Splicers and Accessories

LZM-100 LAZERMaster

Laser Splicing Sytem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3

FSM-100M and FSM-100P Fusion Splicers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5

Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9

Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11

Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13

Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15

Fujikura 19R Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17

Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

CT-30 Fiber Cleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

CT-32 Precision Fiber Cleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

CT-38 Precision Fiber Cleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

CT-100 Fiber Cleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26

PowerCleave

®

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

AutoCleaver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

AutoCleaver LDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

AutoCleaver LDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31

AutoCleaver S1 -80 µm / S1-125 µm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33

AutoCleaver S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

CleaveMeter 3D

LDF

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

Hot Jacket Strippers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

AFL PowerStrip

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

High Tensile Stripper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

USC-03 Ultrasonic Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39

FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters . . . . . . . . . . .40

FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters . . . . . . . . . . .41

AutoCoater 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

MiniCoater 2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45

ReCoater 2 XL

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

ProofTester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Fiber Arrangement Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Ribbon Forming Adhesive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Splice Protection Sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Cotton Swabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Temporary Joining Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53

Test & Inspection Equipment and Accessories

M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

M710 Multifunction OTDR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

DFS1 Digital FiberScope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70

NS and NSR Series Fiber Optic Network Simulators . . . . . . . . . . .74

OTDR Fiber Rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

OPM1 Optical Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77

OPM4-FTTx PON Power Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79

OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM . . . . . . . .86

C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90

C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94

Fiber Optic Cable Assemblies

Connector Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97

Simplex Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Bend Insensitive Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99

Two-Fiber Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100

LC Uniboot Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101

Quad Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102

Circular Premise Cable (CPC) Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Sub-Unitized MicroCore

®

Trunk Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . .104

SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .106

Node Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107

LightLink Fiber Receiver Service Cable Assemblies (FRSC) . . . . . .108

Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube

Cable Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110

Fiber Management

Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for MDU Applications . .112

4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for the MDU

Splice and Distribution Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113

FASTConnect ® Field-Installable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115

FASTConnect ® Universal Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

FUSEConnect ® Field-Installable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

FUSEConnect ® MPO Field-Installable Connectors . . . . . . . . . . .119

FUSEConnect ® Tool Kit and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

SpliceConnect with Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Buildout Attenuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Couplers and Modules

Wideband Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124

Ruggedized Wideband Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125

Wavelength Division Multiplexer Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .126

Planar Couplers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .127

Optical Coupler Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

2Q15

1

OEM and Specialty Products

Optical Splitter Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130

Optical FTTx Coupler Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .131

Optical FTTx WDM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

RFoG WDM Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133

LGX

®

FTTx Splitter Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134

LGX

®

FTTx WDM Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135

Dense WDM (DWDM) Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136

Coarse WDM Modules (CWDM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138

Rack Mount Panels

LightLink LANSytem

1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .139

2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141

3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145

5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147

6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151

8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153

Optical Interconnect Modules

Poli-MOD

®

Patch and Splice Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155

Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

XFM

®

MPO Optical Cassettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158

Splice Closures and Accessories

Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160

Interchangeable Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Splice Closures

and Fiber Enclosures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .161

LightGuard

®

(LG) Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures 162

LG-410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . .163

LG-420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . .164

LG-420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165

LG-500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . .166

LG-500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures . . . .167

LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . .168

LG-600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

LightGuard

®

Aerial Splice Closure Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170

LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

LightLink Splitter Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180

LightGuard

®

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . .181

Peel & Seal Grommet Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures . . .182

LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

LG-55-SC Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

MuxGuard

®

250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . .187

LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

LG-350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . .190

LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

LG-700 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

LightGuard ® Sealed Splice Closure Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

LightLink Terminal Adapters for Sealed Closures . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

OptiNID

Fiber Demarcation

OptiNID ® 500 Optical Demarcation Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

OptiNID ® 760XL Optical Demarcation Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . .198

OptiNID ® 1224 Optical Demarcation Closure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .199

Downhole, Umbilicial, Sensing, and Security Cables

Hermetic Fiber Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200

Stainless Steel Fiber Optic Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

Traditional Downhole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203

Low Profile Downhole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204

High Temperature Downhole Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

Fiber Optic Component for Umbilical Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

Tactical Tight Buffered Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208

Non-Armored Security Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

Uniflex ® Security Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211

Premise Fiber Optic Cables

Simplex Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212

Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

RIBBON-Link

®

Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216

Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218

Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220

Cleaning Accessories

Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222

One-Click ® Cleaner Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224

Cletop Adapter Cleaning Sticks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226

CCT - Connector Cleaning Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid .228

Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .229

FiberWipes ™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

Fiber Optic Tool Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Cable Preparation Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Emergency Restoration Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

Master Splicer Tool Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

2Q15

2

LZM-100 LAZERMaster

Laser Splicing Sytem

LZM -100

2 mm to 125 μm Splice

Advanced Adiabatic Tapering

LZM-100

The LZM-100 LAZERMaster is a glass processing and splicing system that uses a CO

2

laser heat source to perform splicing, adiabatic tapering (to create MFAs or pump combiners), lensing, or other glass shaping operations with glass diameters of 2 .3 mm or more .

The high resolution optical analysis system works in conjunction with on-board firmware for fully automatic splicing, tapering and other glass shaping processes .

High precision glass processing is enabled by the intuitive and user-friendly on-board firmware (virtually identical to that of the Fujikura FSM-100 ARCMaster splicers) .

Operations may also be performed manually and by PC control . A SpliceLab PC control GUI is supplied with the LZM-100 to provide additional features, greater flexibility and finer control . The SpliceLab GUI is pre-installed on the All-in-one computer . Customers can also create proprietary PC control algorithms using a complete set of PC control commands .

Features

• CO

2

laser heat source eliminates electrode or filament maintenance, provides extremely stable operation and greatly reduces the need for periodic calibration

• Automated laser beam diameter control to fine tune the size of the heating area

• An advanced configurable system capable of producing tapers, ball lenses, combiners,

MFAs, glass shaping and splicing

• Excellent performance for dissimilar diameter fiber splicing

• Ultra high strength splicing

• Redundant automated laser safety features

• 2 .3 mm maximum fiber diameter (larger fibers may be spliced manually)

• Long travel / high resolution Z motion for long adiabatic tapers

• Automatic operation by on-board LZM-100 splicer firmware, manual operation or operation by PC (PC and SpliceLab GUI included with the LZM-100 system)

• Intuitive SpliceLab PC GUI: Easy to understand, navigate and operate

• Complete set of PC command codes enables users to develop proprietary processes

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

LAZERMaster LZM-100 Glass Processing & Splicing System

(Standard baseline LZM-100 system . Includes AC adapters & cords and SpliceLab PC software)

LAZERMaster LZM-100 (with dual theta motors)

All-in-one Computer (includes keyboard and mouse, monitor stand for mounting all-in-one computer . SpliceLab software pre-installed .) (required)

End-View Observation & Alignment Option

Side Table Work Surface Option (Work surface to provide additional area for accessories such as fiber preparation equipment . May be attached to the left or right side of the LZM-100 or both . Folds down against the side of the LZM-100 chassis when not needed or to allow easy movement through narrow doorways .)

Cylindrical Lens & Lens Holder (optional)

LZM-100 Training (USA)

LZM-100 Training (International)

ITEM NO.

S015871

S015872

S015242

S015244

S015247

S015251

S015867

S015868

Ball Lens 320 μm with

125 Splice to 80 μm Fiber

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00061, Revision 3, 7.24.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

33

Specifications

Fiber Heating and Splicing Method

Laser Safety Features

Laser Beam Control

Typical Splice Loss

Typical Splice Strength

Camera Field of View

Fiber Observation Methods

CO

2

Laser

Metal cover with interlock, class 1 enclosure

Automatic actuation of safety shutter

Automatic laser power cutoff

Triple redundancy

Proprietary feedback system assures laser beam power stability

Laser beam size and shape may be customized to meet specific user requirements

0 .02 dB for SMF (ITU-T G .652)

>400 kpsi for SMF (ITU-T G .652) using appropriate fiber preparation equipment

2 .7 mm

• PAS (Profile Alignment System) via transverse fiber observation .

• WSI (Warm Splice Image) and WTI (Warm Taper Image)

• End-view observation (Optional)

Applicable Fiber Diameter

V-Groove Clamping System

Fiber Handling

Alignment Methods

80 μm to 2300 μm for automatic alignment by PAS

Larger diameter fibers may be aligned manually or by power meter feedback

Infinitely variable from 80 μm up to 2300 μm

Clamping bare fiber or fiber coating

Patented “split V-groove” system

Fujikura FSM-100, FSM-45 and FSM-40 splicer fiber holders

Custom fixtures to meet specific customer requirements

PAS (Profile Alignment System, automatic alignment by camera observation)

Manual

Other methods by PC control

Power meter feedback via GPIB (Optional)

End-view (Optional)

X/Y Alignment Resolution

Maximum Z Travel Length

Z Travel Resolution

Maximum Taper Length

Maximum Taper Ratio

Maximum Taper Speed

Splicing Control

PC Option

Interface Ports

0 .1 μm

150 mm (both left and right Z units)

0 .125 μm theoretical

130 mm

10:1 standard (For uniform direction, one-pass tapering)

Dual direction tapering offers greatly increased taper ratios, as does tapering with more than one tapering pass .

1 mm/sec standard (Optional 5 mm/sec)

Internal firmware or operation by PC

Fiber Tapering & Glass Shaping Control Internal firmware or operation by PC

PC Control SpliceLab software will be provided

Complete command set for PC control

An all-in-one computer is required . Use of the SpliceLab software on a PC provides finer control and additional features compared to the LZM-100 internal firmware . Using another software application, the PC interface also allows for advanced maintenance functions such as the ability to confirm laser beam alignment, and align if required .

USB 2 .0 (For PC communications, data and image download, etc .)

GPIB (Optional, for power meter feedback)

Electrical Power

Operating Conditions

Rotation Motors

PM Fiber Alignment Methods

100-240 VAC

15-40oC

Optional: Provides theta rotational motion for PM alignment for both left and right sides

• PAS (For PANDA and other PM fibers)

• IPA (Interrelation Profile Alignment, applicable to almost all PM fibers . Three distinct IPA methods available .)

• End-view (Optional)

• Power meter feedback (Requires polarizer and analyzer, as well as optional GPIB interface)

• Manual

• Other methods by PC control

End-View Observation & Alignment Optional internal end-view system

Preliminary Specifications, subject to revision and refinement

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00061, Revision 3, 7.24.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

44

FSM-100M

FSM-100P

Features

• Split V-groove clamping system

• “Plasma Zone” fiber positioning

• PAS and WSI

• New IPA alignment method for PM fibers

• Enhanced sweep arc technology

• Zero degree fiber handling for LDF

• Special functions for glass processing capability

• Fiber profile memory function

• New arc calibration technology

• Short cleave length capability

• Fast and accurate PANDA splice mode

• Ergonomic, production friendly design

• User selectable display on dual

LCD monitors

• Internet firmware updates

FSM-100M and FSM-100P Fusion Splicers

Whether splicing similar fiber types or double clad LDF fibers for high power lasers, the ARCMaster series splicers provide multiple solutions for diverse production needs .

With State of the ARC ™ technology, the ARCMaster sets the standard for fusion splicing with a multitude of new features designed to make splicing easier .

The patent-pending “split V-groove” fiber clamping system accommodates optical fiber ranges from 60 to 2000 μm for cladding or coating without changing V-grooves or fiber clamps . The “Plasma Zone” fiber positioning system incorporates multiple fiber and electrode positioning techniques to provide unprecedented versatility for splicing LDF, heat sensitive or small diameter fibers .

With a new fiber imaging technology, Interrelation Profile Alignment (IPA), alignment and splicing capabilities are possible with virtually any PM fiber type . Longer fiber tapering application is possible with Fujikura’s Sweep Arc technology . Incorporating

PAS (cold fiber image) and WSI (warm image) technologies, the optical analysis system provides a number of advanced features including improved loss estimation capabilities, fiber image performance with both LDF, small or heat sensitive fibers .

Users can program multi-step glass processing operations to include non-splicing operations such as generating tapers or lenses . Dual LCD monitors provide enhanced data and graphical information that is user-selectable during each stage of the splicing process . Both units are designed with the needs for production in mind and are suitable for the most popular production workstations .

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

ARCMaster FSM-100M Fusion Splicer (machine only)

Includes: FH-100-250 fiber holders (pair), FH-100-900 fiber holders (pair), spare electrodes (pair), ADC-15 AC adapter, ACC-02 AC power cord, USB cable, dust cleaning swab set, operation manual and software on CD, and transit case

ARCMaster FSM-100M Fusion Splicer Kit *

ARCMaster FSM-100P Fusion Splicer (machine only)

Includes: FH-100-250 fiber holders (pair), FH-100-400 fiber holders (pair), FH-100-900 fiber holders (pair), spare electrodes (pair), ADC-15 AC adapter, ACC-02 AC power cord,

USB cable, dust cleaning swab set, operation manual and software on CD, and transit case

ARCMaster FSM-100P Fusion Splicer Kit *

One year extended warranty (extends factory warranty by one year)

Two year extended warranty (extends factory warranty by two years)

AFL NO.

S014821

S014822

S014823

S014824

S012996

S013000

* Each splicer kit includes an HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper, a CT-32 Cleaver and a SPA-HJS-030 Spacer for

HJS-02 in addition to the items listed above .

5

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00017, Revision 3, 2.3.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FSM-100M and FSM-100P Fusion Splicers

Specifications

PARAMETER

Applicable Fiber

Fiber Dimension

Cleave Length

Typical Splice Loss

Splicing Time

VALUE

Silica based Single-mode and Multimode glass fiber:

SMF (G .652), MMF (G .651), NZDSF (G .655), EDF,

DCF, LDF and PMF, etc .

Cladding diameter: 60 to 500 µm

Coating diameter: 100 to 2,000 µm

Glass clamping: 8 to 10 mm (standard 9mm)

Coating clamping: 3 to 5 mm (standard 4mm)

SMF: 0 .03 dB

MMF: 0 .02 dB

NZDSF/LDF: 0 .05 dB

PMF: 0 .06 dB (FSM-100P)

SMF/MMF: 15 sec .

NZDSF/LDF: 25 sec .

PMF (PANDA): 35 to 50 sec . (FSM-100P)

PMF (IPA): 90 to 300 sec . (FSM-100P)

Polarization Cross-Talk PMF (PANDA): -40 dB / 0 .6 degree (FSM-100P)

PMF (IPA): -32 dB / 1 .4 degree (FSM-100P)

Return Loss

Heating Time

60 dB or more

FP-03 (40 mm): 30 sec .

FP-03 (60 mm): 35 sec .

Micro sleeves: 55 sec .

Sweep Length

Electrode Life

Electrode Gap

Electrode Offset

±5 mm

2,500 Arc Discharges (SMF G .652 splicing at 1mm gap)

1 to 3 mm

-0 .3 to +0 .1 mm

Proof Test

Dimensions (mm)

1 .96 N to 2 .45 N

311W x 232D x 160H

Weight

(excluding AC adapter)

FSM-100M: 7 .7 kg

FSM-100P: 7 .9 kg

Operation Temperature 0°C to 40°C at 0 to 95% RH (Non-Dew)

Storage Temperature -40°C to 80°C

Monitor Type

Magnification

Dual 4 .1 inch TFT color LCD monitors

125 µm: 187 to 300 X

250 µm: 58 to 300 X

400 µm: 58 to 93 X

Accessories for the FSM-100M and FSM-100P

DESCRIPTION

High Strength Accessories

High Strength Preparation Kit

Includes: USC-02, AFL PowerStrip and AFL PowerCleave

Ultrasonic Cleaner (USC-02)

HTS-12 High Tensile Stripper - includes 250 µm blades

(400 µm available)

AFL PowerStrip High Tensile Stripper

AFL PowerCleave High Strength Cleaver

Strippers

HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper

SPA-HJS-030 Spacer

HJS-02-80 Hot Jacket Stripper (80 µm cladding)

JS-02-900 (900 µm)

Electrodes

ELCT2-25 Spare Electrodes (pair)

Cleavers

CT-32 Cleaver

CT-38 Cleaver ( for 80 µm cladding)

Fiber Holders (Pairs)

FH-100-060 Fiber Holder (55 µm - 71 µm)

FH-100-100 Fiber Holder (94 µm - 117 µm)

FH-100-125 Fiber Holder (118 µm - 139 µm)

FH-100-150 Fiber Holder (140 µm - 169 µm)

FH-100-180 Fiber Holder (170 µm -199 µm)

FH-100-210 Fiber Holder (200 µm -239 µm)

FH-100-250 Fiber Holder (240 µm -289 µm)

FH-100-300 Fiber Holder (290 µm -339 µm)

FH-100-350 Fiber Holder (340 µm -389 µm)

FH-100-400 Fiber Holder (390 µm -489 µm)

FH-100-500 Fiber Holder (490 µm -589 µm)

FH-100-600 Fiber Holder (590 µm -689 µm)

FH-100-700 Fiber Holder (690 µm -789 µm)

FH-100-800 Fiber Holder (790 µm -889 µm)

FH-100-900 Fiber Holder (890 µm -989 µm)

FH-40-LT900 Fiber Holder

Power and Cords

ADC-15 AC Adapter (FSM-100M/P)

ACC-02 AC Power Cord

ADC-09 AC Adapter for HJS-02

ACC-09 AC Power Cord (for ADC-09)

Miscellaneous

CC-27 Transit Case (100 M/P)

DCS-01 Dust Cleaning Swab

HP Power Meter Coupling Adapter

ILX Power Meter Coupling Adapter

Fiber Holder Adapter for HP/ILX PM

AFL NO.

S013632

S014783

S012094

S012808

S009972

S010340

S012086

S013264

S010908

S002068

S014348

S014349

S014826

S001171

S014389

S014390

S014825

S014827

S012180

S012184

S012188

S014977

S014828

S014829

S014861

S014830

S014831

S014832

S014833

S014834

S014835

S014836

S014837

S014838

S014839

S014840

S013584

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00017, Revision 3, 2.3.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

6

Fusion Splicing Systems

70S

In case with lid detached

Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer

The Fujikura 70S is the world’s fastest and most robust core alignment fusion splicer .

Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 70S has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency .

A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion .

Fully programmable “auto open sheath clamps” open one or both sheath clamps, after the tensile test, to prepare the fiber for removal . A new automated “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a

14-second shrink time . The result is a total splice process time of approximately 21 seconds! Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhance by a mirror-less optical system and "severe-impact resistant" monitor . Battery capacity is now 200 splices/shrinks .

An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .

Features

• Automated and programmable wind protector

• 14-second automated tube heater

• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture

• Li-ion battery with 200 splices/shrinks per charge

• 5 mm cleave length for splice on connector or small package needs

• Sheath clamp or fiber holder operation

• On-board training and support videos

• Internet software upgrades

• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

70S Fusion Splicer (machine only)

Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),

S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap,

Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

70S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver)

Includes: CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord,

ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser,

Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual, and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

70S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord)

Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30A Cleaver,

ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),

S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap,

Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

One Year Extended Warranty

Two Year Extended Warranty

AFL NO.

S015580

S015590

S015591

S012996

S013000

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00059, Revision 3, 5 .26 .2015

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

7

Fujikura 70S Fusion Splicer

Recommended Accessories for the 70S

DESCRIPTION

Cleavers

CT-06A Cleaver

CT-30A Cleaver

Fiber Holders

FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-900 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-160 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder

FUSEConnect ® Accessories

FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)

FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)

FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)

CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)

CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)

Sheath Clamps

CLAMP-S70C Sheath Clamp

(Coating diameter from 100 µm - 1000 µm (5-16 mm cleave))

CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp

(900 µm diameter loose tube fiber (5-16 mm cleave))

AFL NO.

S015276

S014080

S014548

S014549

S014690

S015181

S015275

S014696

S014695

S014697

S014705

S014704

S015586

S015862

DESCRIPTION

Batteries and Power Cords

ADC-18 AC Adapter

ACC-14 AC Power Cord

BTR-09 Battery

DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord

DCC-12 Power Cord

(connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket)

DCC-13 Power Cord

(connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips)

Miscellaneous

AFL NO.

S015585

S014536

S015581

S015582

S013552

S013556

ELCT2-20A Electrodes

Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail)

S013532

S014773

ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532

JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100

SL-01 Sleeve Loader

Worktable Upper

S015674

S015779

Worktable Lower

Inner Box Set

USB Cable

CC-30 Transit Case

S015780

S015979

S014777

S015587

Specifications

PARAMETER

Model

Applicable Fibers

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diameter

Fiber Cleave Length

Typical Average Splice Loss

Splicing Time

Arc Calibration Method

Splicing Modes

Splice Loss Estimate

Storage of Splice Result

Fiber Display

Magnification

Viewing Method

Operating Condition

Mechanical Proof Test

Tube Heater

Tube Heating Time

Protection Sleeve Length

VALUE

70S Fusion Splicer

Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)

80 - 150 μm

100 μm to 1,000 μm

5 to 16 mm

0 .02 dB with SM, 0 .01 dB with MM, 0 .04 dB with DS, 0 .04 dB with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards

SM FAST mode — 7 seconds; SM AUTO mode — 10 seconds; AUTO mode — 15 seconds with SM fiber

Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available

100 preset and user programmable modes

Based upon dual camera core axis alignment data

Last 2,000 results stored in the internal memory

X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously . Front or rear monitor display options with automated image orientation

320X for single X or Y view, or 200X for X and Y view

Dual cameras with 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD monitor

0 to 5,000 m above sea level, 0 to 95%RH and -10 to 50°C respectively

1 .96 to 2 .25N

Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function

Typical 14 seconds with FP-03 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves

60 mm, 40 mm, micro

Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 200 cycles with power save functions activated

Electrode Life

Power Supply

Terminals

Wind Protection

Dimensions

Weight

3,000 Arc Discharges

Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240 V AC or 10 to 15 V DC with ADC-18, 14 .8 V DC with BTR-09 battery

USB 1 .1 (USB-B type) for PC communication . Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03

Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)

146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .75 W x 6 .25 D x 5 .9 H (inches)

2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with AC adapter ADC-18; 2 .7 kg (5 .95 lbs) with BTR-09 battery

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00059, Revision 3, 5 .26 .2015

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

8

21S (with Cleaver for scale)

Workstation in Transit Case

Workstation on Transit Case

Fujikura 21S Kit 1

Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer

The Fujikura 21S active cladding alignment fusion splicer bridges the long standing gap between core alignment and fixed v-groove fusion splicer technology . Moveable v-grooves eliminate splicer errors due to dust and other contaminants . Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments . The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 200 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve .

The Fujikura 21S incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models .

Removable sheath clamps allow the use of fiber holders if desired . The large 4 .7" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality . The electrode life has been extended to 3,000 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization . Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available . The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations . The Fujikura 21S is also fully compatible with the FUSEConnect

®

line of fusion installable connectors .

Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 21S is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application .

Features

• Dual camera, active cladding alignment technology

• World’s smallest active clad alignment splicer at 4 .72"W x 7 .44"D x 2 .8"H

• Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance

• Transit case converts to easy to use workstation

• Extended life electrodes

• Long life battery (200 splices/shrinks per charge)

• Auto start tube heater

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer

Includes: Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-11 Battery

Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD,

Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container,SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case

Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer Kit 1

Includes: Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer, CT-30A Cleaver, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter,

BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair),

Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case

Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer Kit 2

Includes: Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer, CT-06A Cleaver, S21A Sheath Clamp, ADC-19 AC Adapter,

BTR-11 Battery Pack (installed), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair),

Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-32 Transit Case

One Year Extended Warranty

Two Year Extended Warranty

AFL NO.

S016111

S016155

S016154

S012996

S013000

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00082, Revision 0, 1 .22 .15

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

99

Fujikura 21S Fusion Splicer

Recommended Accessories for the 21S

DESCRIPTION

Cleavers

CT-06A Cleaver

CT-30A Cleaver

Fiber Holders

FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (250 µm single fiber)

FH-60-900 Fiber Holders (900 µm single fiber)

FH-60-LT900 (900 µm loose buffer tube)

FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder

Sheath Clamps

CLAMP-S21A Sheath Clamp

CLAMP-S21B Sheath Clamp

Batteries

BTR-11 Battery Pack

AFL NO.

S015276

S014080

S014548

S014549

S015181

S015275

S016160

S016161

S016156

DESCRIPTION

FUSEConnect

®

Accessories

FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)

FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)

FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)

CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)

CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)

Miscellaneous

Worktable Set

TS-01 Tripod Screw

ELCT2-12 Electrodes

ADC-19 AC Adapter

ACC-09 Power Cord

AP-01 Alcohol Container

SD-01 Screwdriver

CC-32 Transit Case

Specifications

PARAMETER

Applicable Fibers

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diameter

Fiber Cleave Length

Typical Average Splice Loss

Splicing Time

Arc Calibration Method

Splicing Modes

Splice Loss Estimate

Storage of Splice Result

Fiber Display

Magnification

Viewing Method

VALUE

Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DSF (G .653), NZDS (G .655)

125 μm

100 μm to 3000 μm

5 mm to 16 mm

0 .03 dB (SM), 0 .01 dB (MM), 0 .05 dB (DS) and 0 .05 dB (NZDS)

Typical 9 sec with SM

Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available

Total 100 splice modes

Based on dual camera cladding alignment data

Last 2,000 splices

4 .7 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously

200X magnification for X/Y view

2 axis CMOS camera

Operating Condition

Mechanical Proof Test

Tube Heater

Altitude: 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, -10° to 50° C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, non-dew

1 .96 N

30 heating modes

Tube Heating Time

Protection Sleeve Length

Typical 30 sec with FP-60 (60 mm) sleeve

60 mm, 40 mm, micro

Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 200 cycles with BTR-11

Electrode Life

Power Supply

Terminals

Wind Protection

Dimensions

Weight

3,000 splices

Auto select from 100 V to 240 V with AC adapter, 14 .8 V DC with installed battery

USB 2 .0

Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)

120 x 189 x 71 (mm) / 4 .72" x 7 .44" x 2 .8" (inches)

1 .14 kg (2 .51 lbs) with battery

AFL NO.

S014696

S014695

S014697

S014705

S014704

S016157

S015895

S014028

S015523

S014390

S015525

S015526

S016158

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00082, Revision 0, 1 .22 .15

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

FU

SION

SPLICER

S

Fiber Optic Cable

19S

In case with lid detached

Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer

The Fujikura 19S is a low cost, fixed v-groove single fiber splicer with similar features found on the Fujikura 70S . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by

Fujikura, the 19S has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . Fully programmable “auto open sheath clamps” open one or both sheath clamps, after the tensile test, to prepare the fiber for removal . A new automated “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a faster shrink time . Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhance by a mirror-less optical system and "severe-impact resistant" monitor . An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .

Features

• Automated and programmable wind protector

• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture

• Li-ion battery with 180 splice/heat cycles per charge

• 5 mm cleave length for splice on connector or small package needs

• Sheath clamp or fiber holder operation

• On-board training and support videos

• Internet software upgrades

• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

19S Fusion Splicer (machine only)

Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),

S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Pot, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap,

Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

19S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver)

Includes: CT30A Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord,

ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser,

Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual, and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

19S Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord)

Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30A Cleaver,

ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),

S70C Sheath Clamp, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Splicer Carrying Strap,

Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

One Year Extended Warranty

Two Year Extended Warranty

AFL NO.

S015679

S015680

S015681

S012996

S013000

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

11

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00072, Revision 3, 10 .15 .2014

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

FU

SION

SPLICER

S

Fiber Optic Cable

Fujikura 19S Fusion Splicer

Recommended Accessories for the 19S

DESCRIPTION

Cleavers

CT-06A Cleaver

CT-30A Cleaver

Fiber Holders

FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-900 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder

FUSEConnect

Accessories

FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)

FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)

FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)

CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)

CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)

Sheath Clamps

CLAMP-S70C Sheath Clamp

(Coating diameter from 100 µm - 1000 µm (5-16 mm cleave))

CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp

(900 µm diameter loose tube fiber (5-16 mm cleave))

AFL NO.

S015276

S014080

S014548

S014549

S015181

S015275

S014696

S014695

S014697

S014705

S014704

S015586

S015862

DESCRIPTION

Batteries and Power Cords

ADC-18 AC Adapter

ACC-14 AC Power Cord

BTR-09 Battery

DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord

DCC-12 Power Cord

(connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket)

DCC-13 Power Cord

(connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips)

Miscellaneous

AFL NO.

S015585

S014536

S015581

S015582

S013552

S013556

ELCT2-20A Electrodes

Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail)

S013532

S014773

ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532

JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100

SL-01 Sleeve Loader

Worktable Upper

S015674

S015779

Worktable Lower

Inner Box Set

CC-30

USB Cable

S015780

S015979

S015587

S014777

Specifications

PARAMETER

Model

Applicable Fibers

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diameter

Fiber Cleave Length

Typical Average Splice Loss

Splicing Time

Arc Calibration Method

Splicing Modes

Splice Loss Estimate

Storage of Splice Result

Fiber Display

Magnification

Viewing Method

Operating Condition

Mechanical Proof Test

Tube Heater

Tube Heating Time

Protection Sleeve Length

VALUE

19S Fusion Splicer

Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)

125 μm

100 μm to 1,000 μm

5 to 16 mm

0 .05 dB with SM, 0 .02 dB with MM, 0 .08 dB with DS, 0 .08 dB with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T and IEC standards

SM FAST mode — 9 seconds; SM AUTO mode — 11 seconds; AUTO mode — 11 seconds

Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available

100 preset and user programmable modes

Based upon dual camera cladding axis offset alignment data

Last 2,000 results to be stored in the internal memory

X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously . Front or rear monitor display options with automated image orientation

320X for single X or Y view, or 200X for X and Y view

Dual cameras with 4 .73 inch TFT color LCD monitor

0 to 3,660 m above sea level, 0 to 95%RH and -10 to 50°C respectively

1 .96 to 2 .25N

Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function

17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves

60 mm, 40 mm, micro

Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 180 cycles with power save functions activated

Electrode Life

Power Supply

3,000 Arc Discharges

Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240 V AC or 10 to 15 V DC with ADC-18, 14 .8 V DC with BTR-09 battery

Terminals

Wind Protection

Dimensions

Weight

USB 1 .1 (USB-B type) for PC communication . Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03 and SH-8 tube heater

Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)

146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .75 W x 6 .25 D x 5 .9 H (inches)

2 .3 kg (5 .1 lbs) with AC adapter; 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with battery

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00072, Revision 3, 10 .15 .2014

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

12

FU

SION

SPLICER

S

Fiber Optic Cable

12S (with Cleaver for scale)

Workstation in Transit Case

Workstation on Transit Case

Fujikura 12S Kit 1

Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer

The Fujikura 12S is the world’s smallest, lightest and most portable fusion splicer available today . Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments . The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 100 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve .

The Fujikura 12S incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models .

The large 4 .5" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality . The electrode life has been extended to 3,000 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization . Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available . The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations . The Fujikura 12S is also fully compatible with the FUSEConnect

®

line of fusion installable connectors .

Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 12S is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application .

Features

• World’s smallest splicer at 4 .76"W x 6 .38"D x 2 .24"H

• Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance

• Transit case converts to easy to use workstation

• Dual camera, fixed v-groove alignment technology

• Extended life electrodes

• Long life battery (100 splices/shrinks per charge)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer

Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed),

FH-60-250 Fiber Holders (pair), FH-60-900 Fiber Holder, ACC-09 Power Cord,

ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide,

AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case

Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Kit 1

Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, CT-30 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery

Pack (installed), FH-60-250 Fiber Holders (pair), FH-60-900 Fiber Holders (pair),

ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD,

Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case

Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer Kit 2

Includes: Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer, CT-06 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery

Pack (installed), FH-60-250 Fiber Holders (pair), FH-60-900 Fiber Holders (pair),

ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (pair), Operation Manual on CD,

Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case

One Year Extended Warranty

Two Year Extended Warranty

AFL NO.

S015521

S015522

S015530

S012996

S013000

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00028, Revision 4, 1 .22 .2015

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

FU

SION

SPLICER

S

Fiber Optic Cable

Fujikura 12S Fusion Splicer

Recommended Accessories for the 12S

DESCRIPTION

Cleavers

CT-06 Cleaver (for single fibers)

CT-30 Cleaver (for single to 12 ribbon fibers)

Fiber Holders

FH-60-250 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-900 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-LT900 Fiber Holder (pair)

FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder

FUSEConnect

®

Accessories

FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)

FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)

FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)

CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)

CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)

AFL NO.

S015588

S014076

S014548

S014549

S015181

S015275

S014696

S014695

S014697

S014705

S014704

DESCRIPTION

Batteries

BTR-10 Battery Pack

Miscellaneous

Worktable Set

TS-01 Tripod Screw

ELCT2-12 Electrodes

ADC-19 AC Adapter

ACC-09 Power Cord

AP-01 Alcohol Container

SD-01 Screwdriver

CC-29 Transit Case

USB Cable

AFL NO.

S015527

S015817

S015895

S014028

S015523

S014390

S015525

S015526

S015524

S014777

Specifications

PARAMETER

Model

Applicable Fibers

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diameter

Fiber Cleave Length

Typical Average Splice Loss

Splicing Time

Arc Calibration Method

Splicing Modes

Splice Loss Estimate

Storage of Splice Result

Fiber Display

Magnification

Viewing Method

Operating Condition

Mechanical Proof Test

Tube Heater

Tube Heating Time

Protection Sleeve Length

VALUE

12S Fusion Splicer

Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DSF (G .653), NZDS (G .655)

125 μm

250 μm or 900 μm

5 mm to 13 mm

0 .05 dB (SM), 0 .02 dB (MM), 0 .08 dB (DS) and 0 .08 dB (NZDS)

Typical 15 sec with SM

Automatic, real-time and by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available

Total 100 splice modes

Based on dual camera cladding alignment data

Last 2,000 splices

4 .5 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously

100X magnification for X/Y view

2 axis CMOS camera

Altitude: 0 to 3,660 m above sea level, -10° to 50° C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH, non-dew

1 .96 N

30 heating modes

Typical 30 sec with FP-03 (60 mm) sleeve

60 mm, 40 mm, micro

Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 100 cycles with BTR-10

Electrode Life

Power Supply

3,000 splices

Auto select from 100 V to 240 V with AC adapter, 14 .8 V DC with installed battery

Terminals

Wind Protection

Dimensions

Weight

USB 2 .0

Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)

121 x 162 x 57 (mm) / 4 .76 x 6 .38 x 2 .24 (inches)

.776 kg (1 .71 lbs) with battery

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00028, Revision 4, 1 .22 .2015

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

FU

SION

SPLICER

S

Fiber Optic Cable

70R

In case with lid detached

Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer

The Fujikura 70R is equipped with a precision, fixed v-groove for splicing single fibers or ribbon fiber up to 12 fibers . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 70R has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . A new auto-start “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a 40-second shrink time for

12-fiber ribbon . The result is a total splice process time of approximately 55 seconds!

Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhanced by a mirror-less optical system and

"severe-impact resistant" monitor . Battery capacity is now 110 splices/shrinks .

An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .

Features

• Automated and programmable wind protector

• 40-second automated tube heater

• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture

• Li-ion battery with 110 splices/shrinks per charge

• On-board training and support videos

• Internet software upgrades

• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

70R Fusion Splicer (machine only)

Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),

FH-50-12 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader,

Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and

CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

70R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver)

Includes: CT30 Cleaver, HJS-02 Stripper, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord,

ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-12 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser,

Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

70R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord)

Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30 Cleaver, HJS-02 Stripper,

ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-12 Fiber Holder,

USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap,

Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

One Year Extended Warranty

Two Year Extended Warranty

AFL NO.

S015669

S015670

S015671

S012996

S013000

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

15

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 3, 5.26.2015

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FU

SION

SPLICER

S

Fiber Optic Cable

Fujikura 70R Fusion Splicer

Accessories Recommended for the 70R

DESCRIPTION

Cleavers and Strippers

CT-30 Cleaver

HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper

Fiber Holders (pairs)

FH-50-12

FH-50-10

FH-50-8

FH-50-6

FH-50-4

FH-50-2

FH-50-250 (250 μm coated single fiber)

FH-50-900 (900 μm jacketed single fiber)

FH-60-LT900 (pair)

FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder

FUSEConnect

®

Accessories

FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)

FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)

FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)

CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)

CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)

AFL NO.

S014076

S014080

S013828

S013824

S013820

S013816

S013812

S013808

S013800

S013804

S015181

S015275

S014696

S014695

S014697

S014705

S014704

DESCRIPTION

Batteries and Power Cords

ADC-18 AC Adapter

BTR-09 Battery

DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord

DCC-12 Power Cord (connects ADC-13 to cigarette lighter socket)

DCC-13 Power Cord

(connects ADC-13 to power source via alligator clips)

ACC-14 AC Power Cord

Miscellaneous

ELCT2-20A Electrodes

Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail)

ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail)

JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series)

FST-12 Fiber Separation Tool

FAT-04 Fiber Arrangement Tool

FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (4 oz . bottle)

FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (0 .5 liter bottle)

CC-30 Transit Case

AFL NO.

S015585

S015581

S015582

S013552

S013556

S014536

S013532

S014773

S010532

S016100

S014012

S010212

S008720

S008622

S015587

Specifications

PARAMETER

Model

Applicable Fibers

Fiber Count

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diameter

Fiber Cleave Length

Typical Average Splice Loss

Splicing Time

Arc Calibration Method

Splicing Modes

Splice Loss Estimate

Storage of Splice Result

Fiber Display

Magnification

Viewing Method

VALUE

FSM-70R Fusion Splicer

Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)

Single, 2, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12

125 µm

Ribbon: 0 .25 mm to 0 .4 mm, Single: 250 µm and 900 µm

10 mm

0 .05 dB with SM, 0 .02 dB with MM, 0 .08 dB with DS, 0 .08 dB with NZDS; measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards

Typical 15 seconds with standard single-mode fiber

Automatic, real-time by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode; manual arc calibration function available

100 preset and user programmable modes

Based upon dual camera cladding alignment data

Last 2000 splice results stored in the internal memory

X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously; front or rear monitor display options with automatic image orientation

35X to 90X

Dual cameras with 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD monitor with anti-reflective coating

Operating Condition

Mechanical Proof Test

Tube Heater

Tube Heating Time

0 to 3,660 m above sea level, 0 to 95% RH, and -10 to 50°C respectively

1 .96 to 2 .25 N

Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function

Typical 40 seconds with FP-5 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-15 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves

Protection Sleeve Length 60 mm, 40 mm, Micro

Splice/Heat Cycles with Battery Typical 110 cycles with power save functions activated

Electrode Life 1,500 Arc Discharges

Power Supply

Terminals

Wind Protection

Dimensions

Weight

Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240V AC or 10 to 15V DC with ADC-18, 14 .8V DC with BTR-09 battery

USB 2 .0 (USB-B type) for PC communication and Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03

Maximum wind velocity of 15m/s (34 mph)

146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .7 W x 6 .3 D x 5 .9 H (inches)

2 .3 kg (5 .1 lbs) with AC adapter; 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with battery

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 3, 5.26.2015

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

16

19R

In case with lid detached

Fujikura 19R Fusion Splicer

The Fujikura 19R is equipped with a precision, fixed v-groove for splicing single fibers or ribbon fiber up to 4 fibers . Incorporating the proven ruggedized features pioneered by Fujikura, the 19R has added automated and enhanced user control features to increase splicing efficiency . A user programmable, automated wind protector expedites the splicing process by automatically closing to initiate the splice process, and opening upon splice completion . A new auto-start “clamshell design” tube heater applies heat to both sides of the splice protection sleeve resulting in a 18-second shrink time for

4-fiber ribbon . The result is a total splice process time of approximately 29 seconds!

Ruggedness and durability are greatly enhance by a mirror-less optical system and

"severe-impact resistant" monitor . Battery capacity is now 140 splices/shrinks .

An innovative transit case doubles as a built-in or mobile workstation and makes splicing easier than ever before .

Features

• Automated and programmable wind protector

• 18-second automated tube heater

• Fully ruggedized for shock, dust and moisture

• Li-ion battery with 140 splices/shrinks per charge

• On-board training and support videos

• Internet software upgrades

• Multi-function transit case with integrated workstation

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

19R Fusion Splicer (machine only)

Includes: ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),

FH-50-4 Fiber Holder, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader,

Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and

CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

19R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver)

Includes: CT30 Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter, ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair),

FH-50-4 Fiber Holder, FH-50-250 Fiber Holder, FH-50-900 Fiber Holder, HJS-02 Stripper,

USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader, Splicer Carrying Strap,

Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

19R Fusion Splicer Kit (with cleaver, battery and cord)

Includes: BTR-09 Battery, DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord, CT30 Cleaver, ADC-18 AC Adapter,

ACC-14 AC Cord, ELCT2-20A Spare Electrodes (pair), FH-50-4 Fiber Holder, FH-50-250 Fiber Holder,

FH-50-900 Fiber Holder, HJS-02 Stripper, USB Cable, Alcohol Dispenser, Screw Driver, Sleeve Loader,

Splicer Carrying Strap, Quick Reference Guide, Video Instruction Manual and

CC30 Transit Case with Carrying Strap

One Year Extended Warranty

Two Year Extended Warranty

AFL NO.

S015659

S015660

S015661

S012996

S013000

17

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00073, Revision 3, 5.26.2015

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Fujikura 19R Fusion Splicer

Recommended Accessories for the 19R

DESCRIPTION

Cleavers and Strippers

CT-06 Cleaver

CT-30 Cleaver

HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper

Fiber Holders

FH-50-250

FH-50-900

FH-50-4

FH-50-2

FH-60-LT900 (pair)

FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder

FUSEConnect

®

Accessories

FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)

FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)

FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)

CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)

CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)

AFL NO.

S015588

S014076

S010340

S013800

S013804

S013812

S013808

S015181

S015275

S014696

S014695

S014697

S014705

S014704

DESCRIPTION

Batteries and Power Cords

ADC-18 AC Adapter

ACC-14 AC Power Cord

BTR-09 Battery

DCC-18 Battery Charge Cord

DCC-12 Power Cord

(connects AC Adapter to cigarette lighter socket)

DCC-13 Power Cord

(connects AC Adapter to power source via alligator clips)

Miscellaneous

AFL NO.

S015585

S014536

S015581

S015582

S013552

S013556

ELCT2-20A Electrodes S013532

Portable Tripod Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S014773

ASW-02 Splicing Workstation (see product profile for more detail) S010532

JP-06 J-PLATE (70/19 Series) S016100

FST-12

FAT-04 Fiber Arrangement Tool

S014012

S010212

FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (4 oz . bottle)

FAA-03A Ribbon Forming Adhesive (0 .5 liter bottle)

USB Cable

CC-30 Transit Case

S008720

S008622

S014777

S015587

Specifications

PARAMETER

Model

Applicable Fibers

Fiber Count

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diameter

Fiber Cleave Length

Typical Average Splice Loss

Splicing Time

Arc Calibration Method

Splicing Modes

Splice Loss Estimate

Storage of Splice Result

Fiber Display

Magnification

Viewing Method

Operating Condition

Mechanical Proof Test

Tube Heater

Tube Heating Time

Protection Sleeve Length

Splice/Heat with Battery

Electrode Life

Power Supply

Terminals

Wind Protection

Dimensions

Weight

VALUE

FSM-19R Fusion Splicer

Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)

Single, 2, 4

125 µm

Ribbon: 0 .25 mm to 0 .4 mm; Single: 250 µm and 900 µm

10 mm

0 .05 dB with SM, 0 .02 dB with MM, 0 .08 dB with DS, 0 .08 dB with NZDS, measured by cut-back method relevant to ITU-T standards

SM FAST mode - 11 seconds; SM AUTO mode - 15 seconds; Auto mode - 15 seconds

Automatic, real-time by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available

100 preset and user programmable modes

Based upon dual camera cladding alignment data

Last 2000 splice results stored in the internal memory

X or Y, or both X and Y simultaneously; front or rear monitor display options with automatic image orientation

90X

Dual cameras with 4 .7 inch TFT color LCD monitor with anti-reflective coating

0 to 5,000 m above sea level, 0 to 95% RH, -10 to 50°C respectively

1 .96 to 2 .25 N

Built-in tube heater with 30 heating modes; auto-start function

Typical 40 seconds with FP-5 sleeve, 17 seconds with FP3 (40), 5-16 seconds with Fujikura micro sleeves

60 mm, 40 mm, micro

Typical 140 cycles with power save functions activated

2,000 Arc Discharges

Auto voltage selection from 100 to 240V AC or 10 to 15V DC with AC Adapter, 13 .2V DC with battery

USB 2 .0 (USB-B type) for PC communication, Mini-DIN (6-pin) for HJS-02/03

Maximum wind velocity of 15m/s (34 mph)

146 W x 159 D x 150 H (mm) / 5 .7 W x 6 .3 D x 5 .9 H (inches)

2 .3 kg (5 .1 lbs) with AC adapter; 2 .5 kg (5 .5 lbs) with battery

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00073, Revision 3, 5.26.2015

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

18

12R (with Cleaver for scale)

Workstation in Transit Case

Workstation on Transit Case

Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer

The Fujikura 12R is the world’s smallest, lightest and most portable fusion splicer available today . Despite its incredibly small size, this ruggedized, full-featured unit offers unmatched versatility for splicing in the most challenging environments . The innovative transit case and work tray provide multiple options for the best utilization of available work space while the long life battery provides power for up to 100 splice cycles which include application of the splice protection sleeve .

The Fujikura 12R incorporates features typically found only in more expensive models .

The large 4 .5" monitor provides a crystal clear image, even in the brightest sunlight, for evaluating splice quality . The electrode life has been extended to 1,500 splices, minimizing downtime for replacement and stabilization . Software updates are accomplished via the internet allowing users to quickly update their software as new splice programs become available . The fully ruggedized chassis provides for shock, dust and moisture protection while the two camera observation system provides for accurate fiber alignment and loss estimation calculations . The Fujikura 12R is also fully compatible with the FuseConnect line of fusion installable connectors .

Backed by the best service team in the industry, the Fujikura 12R is the ideal splicer to use when portability, ruggedness, versatility and reliability are needed for your splicing application .

Features

• World’s smallest splicer at 4 .76"W x 6 .38"D x 2 .24"H

• Fully ruggedized for shock, moisture and dust resistance

• Transit case converts to easy to use workstation

• Dual camera, fixed v-groove alignment technology

• Extended life electrodes

• Long life battery (100 splices/shrinks per charge)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer

Includes: ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed), FH-50-4 Fiber Holders

(Pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (Pair), Operation Manual on CD,

Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container, SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case

Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer Kit

Includes: CT-30 Cleaver, ADC-19 AC Adapter, BTR-10 Battery Pack (installed),

FH-50-4 Fiber Holders (Pair) FH-50-250 Fiber Holders (Pair), FH-50-900 Fiber Holders

(Pair), ACC-09 Power Cord, HJS-03 Hot Jacket Stripper, ELCT2-12 Spare Electrodes (Pair),

Operation Manual on CD, Quick Reference Guide, AP-01 Alcohol Container,

SD01 Screwdriver and CC-29 Transit Case

AFL NO.

S015571

S015667

Fujikura 12R Kit

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00060, Revision 1, 2.3.2014

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer

Recommended Accessories for the 12R

DESCRIPTION

Cleavers & Strippers

CT-30 Cleaver (for single to 12 ribbon fibers)

HJS-03 Battery Powered Hot Jacket Stripper

Fiber Holders

FH-50-2 (2 ribbon fiber)

FH-50-4 (4 ribbon fiber)

FH-50-250 (250 µm single fiber)

FH-50-900 Fiber Holders (900 µm single fiber)

FH-60-LT900 (900 µm loose buffer tube)

FH-60-LT900 Single Side Fiber Holder

FUSEConnect ™ Accessories

FH-FC-20 (900 µm within 2 .0 mm sheathing) (each)

FH-FC-30 (900 µm within 3 .0 mm sheathing) (pair)

FH-FC-900 (900 µm cable) (each)

CLAMP-FC-2000 (pair)

CLAMP-FC-3000 (pair)

AFL NO.

S014076

S013996

S013808

S013812

S013800

S013804

S015181

S015275

S014696

S014695

S014697

S014705

S014704

Specifications

PARAMETER

Model

Applicable Fibers

Fiber Count

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diameter

Fiber Cleave Length

Typical Average Splice Loss

Splice Time

Arc Calibration Method

Splicing Modes

Splice Loss Estimate

Storage of Splice Result

Fiber Display

Magnification

Viewing Method

Operating Condition

Mechanical Proof Test

Tube Heater

Tube Heater Time

Protection Sleeve Length

Splice/Heat with Battery

Electrode Life

Power Supply

Terminals

Wind Protection

Dimensions

Weight with Battery

DESCRIPTION

Batteries

BTR-10 Battery Pack

Miscellaneous

Worktable Set

TS-01 Tripod Screw

ELCT2-12 Electrodes

ADC-19 AC Adapter

ACC-09 Power Cord

AP-01 Alcohol Container

SD-01 Screwdriver

CC-29 Transit Case

VALUE

Fujikura 12R Fusion Splicer

Single-mode (G .652 & G .657), Multimode (G .651), DS (G .653), NZDS (G .655)

Single to 4-fiber ribbon

125 μm

250 μm and 900 μm

10 mm

0 .05 dB (SM), 0 .02 dB (MM), 0 .08 dB (DS) and 0 .08 dB (NZDS)

Typical 20 sec with SM

Automatic, real-time by using results of previous splice when in AUTO mode, manual arc calibration function available

Total 100 splice modes

Based upon dual camera cladding alignment data

Last 2,000 splices

4 .5 inch TFT color LCD with X or Y view or both X and Y view simultaneously

66X magnification in X or Y view; 33X magnification in X and Y view

2 axis CMOS camera

0 to 3,660 m above sea level (single fiber),0 to 95% RH non-dew, -10 to 50°C respectively

1 .96 to 2 .25 N

30 heating modes

Typical 30 sec with FP-03 (60 mm) and FP-04 sleeves

60 mm, 40 mm, micro

Typical 100 cycles with BTR-10

1,500 splices

Auto select from 100V to 240V with AC adapter, 14 .8 V DC with installed battery

USB 2 .0

Maximum wind velocity of 15 m/s . (34 mph)

121W x 162D x 57H (mm) / 4 .76 W x 6 .38 D x 2 .24 H (inches)

776 g / 1 .71 lbs .

AFL NO.

S015527

S015817

S015895

S014028

S015523

S014390

S015525

S015526

S015524

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00060, Revision 1, 2.3.2014

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FU

SION

SPLICER

S

Fiber Optic Cable

*Delivered as shown

Shown in CC-21 Carrying Case

CT-30 Fiber Cleaver

The CT-30 Cleaver sets the standard for portability, reliability and ease of use . Available for either single fiber or ribbon splicing (up to 12 fiber ribbons) applications, the CT-30

Cleavers are compatible with all AFL fusion splicers . The improved version offers a larger base for a more stable platform, improved visibility when placing the fiber, and three scrap collection options . Designed for excellent portability, the CT-30 is equally at home in a splicing van or in a bucket truck and is ideal for FTTx applications . The 16-position blade yields 48,000 single-fiber cleaves, or 4,000 12-fiber ribbon cleaves before requiring replacement, and the built-in scrap collector conveniently stores fiber shards until they can be safely discarded .

The CT-30 Cleaver is packaged with three scrap collection options that allow the user to tailor it to their cleaving preferences . The CT30 is delivered with the SC-01 Side Cover installed for users that prefer not to use an automated scrap collection system . For those that prefer an automated scrap collection system, the FC-02 Fiber Collector and two scrap box options are included . The FDB-02 Scrap Box is a smaller bin for users seeking a compact profile . The FDB-03 Scrap Box is a larger bin with sweeping brush and static resistant surfaces for those users seeking to maximize scrap capacity . All scrap options are easily configured by the user .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Applicable Fiber

Fiber Count

Coating Diameter

Cladding Diameter

Cleave Angle Capability

Blade lifetime

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

VALUE

Conventional silica optical fiber

Single and up to 12 fiber ribbon

250 μm to 900 μm

125 μm typically <0 .5˚

48,000 fiber cleaves (4,000 12-fiber cleaves)

69 mm x 82 mm x 41 mm (2 .7" x 3 .2" x 1 .6")

180 g (0 .4 lbs)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION APPLICATION

CT-30

CT-30A

Fiber Ribbons

(up to 12 fibers)

Single Fibers:

250-900 µm coating,

125 µm cladding

FIBER HANDLING SYSTEM

Fiber Holders for the following:

FH-XXX, FH-50-XXX or FH-60-XXX versions

AD-30A Adapter Plate

CLEAVE LENGTH AFL NO.

10 mm S014076

900 µm: 10-20 mm

250 µm: 6-20 mm

S014080

Included with Cleaver:

• AD-30A Adapter Plate (CT30A only)

• FC-02 Fiber Collector

• FDB-02 Scrap Box (small)

• FDB-03 Scrap Box (large)

• SC-01 Side Cover (installed)

• CC-21 Carrying Case

• Hex Wrench (1 .5 mm)

• Instruction Manual

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Replacement Blade for CT-30 Series Cleavers

FC-02 Fiber Collector

AD-30A Adapter Plate

AD-30B Adapter Plate (Fixed 16 mm cleave length)

AD-30C Adapter Plate for 2 & 3mm Cord

FDB-02 Fiber Collector Scrap Box

FDB-03 Large Fiber Collector Scrap Box

SC-01 Side Cover

HBA-01 Fiber Holder Base Attachment

CC-21 Carrying Case for CT-30 Series Cleaver

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

21

AFL NO.

S012828

S014092

S014096

S014100

S015896

S014104

S014483

S014353

S014388

S014484

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00011, Revision 3, 2 .3 .14

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

*Delivered as shown

Shown in CC-21 Carrying Case

CT-32 Precision Fiber Cleaver

The CT-32 is a modified version of our standard cleaver model CT-30 . The modifications allow use of a spacer system that provides for the full range of acceptable cleave lengths for use with our factory fusion splicer models FSM-45F and 45PM . The CT-32 also allows for a reduced cleave length of 8 mm on 900 µm jacketed fibers and as short as 3 mm on

250 µm and 400 µm coated fibers . Included with the CT-32 is a 1 mm spacer that allows for the recommended cleave lengths for use with our factory fusion splicer models .

An optional 2 mm spacer can be purchased to expand cleave length options .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Blade lifetime

Cleave angle capability

Fiber count

Fiber type

Cladding diameter

Coating diameter

VALUE

69 mm x 82 mm x 41 mm (2 .7" x 3 .2" x 1 .6")

180 g (0 .4 lbs)

48,000 cleaves (1,000 x 3 heights x 16 positions ) typically <0 .5˚

Single

Silica Optical Fiber

125 µm

0 .25 mm to 0 .9 mm depending on fiber holder (FH-40 series)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

CT-32

Includes: CT-32 cleaver, SPA-40-CT-040 cleaver spacer,

FC-02 fiber collector, FDB-02 scrap box (small),

FDB-03 scrap box (large), SC-01 side cover, hex wrench, carrying case and instruction manual

APPLICATION

Single Fibers:

250 µm to 900 µm coating,

125 µm cladding

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

SPA-40-CT-050 Spacer (2 mm)

Replacement Blade for CT-30 Series Cleavers

FC-02 Fiber Collector

FDB-02 Fiber Collector Scrap Box

CC-21 Carrying Case for CT-30 Series Cleaver

AFL NO.

S014351

S012828

S014092

S014104

S014484

Application

CLEAVE LENGTH

(mm)

4

3

10

9

8

5

REQUIRED CLEAVER SPACER

PROVIDED OPTIONAL

SPA-40-CT-040

SPA-40-CT-040

SPA-40-CT-050

SPA-40-CT-050

AFL NO.

S014348

NOTE

Short cleave length of 3 mm to

5 mm available by stripping with

HJS-02 and SPA-040-HJS-030 .

(sold separately)

© 2006, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00012, Revision 2, 8 .30 .12

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

22

CT-38 Precision Fiber Cleaver

The CT-38 cleaver is designed for cleaving silica fibers with 80µm cladding . Utilizing the same one step design of our popular CT-30 cleaver, the CT-38 is quick, easy, and dependable . The 16 position blade yields 48,000 cleaves by providing for blade height and position adjustments . The cleaver can be used with either the FSM-45F and 45PM fiber holder system or with the optional AD-30A adapter plate for other applications .

Application

DESCRIPTION

CT-38

CT-38A

FIBER

PLACING

Fiber

Holder

CLEAVE

LENGTH

(MM)

10

9

REQUIRED CLEAVER SPACER

PROVIDED OPTIONAL

NOTE

— SPA-40-CT-050 —

SPA-40-CT-040 — —

8

5

4

3

— — —

— SPA-40-CT-050 Short cleave length of 3 mm to

SPA-40-CT-040 —

5 mm available by stripping with

— —

HJS-02 and SPA-040-HJS-030 .

(sold separately)

Fiber Plate 6 to 20 SPA-40-CT-050 — Requires purchase of CT-38 and optional AD-30A .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Blade lifetime

Cleave angle capability

Fiber count

Fiber type

Cladding diameter

VALUE

69 mm x 82 mm x 41 mm (2 .7" x 3 .2" x 1 .6")

180 g (0 .4 lbs)

48,000 cleaves (1,000 x 3 heights x 16 positions ) typically <0 .5˚

Single

Silica Optical Fiber

80 µm

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

CT-38 (fiber holder)

Includes: CT-38 cleaver, SPA-40-CT-040 cleaver spacer, hex wrench, carrying case and instruction manual

APPLICATION

Single Fibers:

165 µm coating,

80 µm cladding

AFL NO.

S014349

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Replacement Blade for CT-30 Series Cleavers

CC-21 Carrying Case for CT-30 Series Cleaver

AD-30A Adapter Plate

SPA-40-CT-050 Spacer

AFL NO.

S012828

S014484

S014096

S014351

23

© 2006, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00013, Revision 3, 8 .30 .12

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

Model

AFL Part #

Style

Size (inches)

Approx . weight (lbs)

Total Splice Capacity

Single Fusion

Mass Fusion

Recommended Splice Tray

Model

AFL Part #

Max Trays Per Closure

Fiber Splice Capacity Per Tray

Single Fusion

Ribbon Fusion

SEALED CLOSURES

LG-350-AC

FC001058

Dome / Butt

10 dia . 19 .8 L

12

144

N/A

LL-4808L

FA000018

4

36

N/A

Cable Entry Capacity

Total Number of Entry Ports

Number of Express Ports

Number of Drop Ports

5

2

3

Single-cable Grommet Scenario - Max 1 Cable per Entry Port

(Absolute Maximum Cable Diameter Capactiy)

Max Number of Cables

Single Cable Express Port Grommet AFL Part #

Single Cable Express Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters

Single Cable Drops Port Grommet AFL Part #

Single Cable Drop Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters

5 Total (2 Express Cables / 3 Drop Cables)

FC000726

1 .00” - 0 .40”

FC000727

0 .80” - 0 .30”

Dual-cable Grommet Scenario - Max 2 Cables per Entry Port

Max Number of Cables

Dual Cable Express Port Grommet AFL Part #

Dual Cable Express Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters

Dual Cable Drops Port Grommet AFL Part #

Dual Cable Drop Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters

Multi-port Grommet Scenario - More than 2 Cables per

Entry Port (Absolute Maximum Cable Count Capacity)

Total Number of Cables

Multi-port Express Port Grommet AFL Part #

Multi-port Express Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters

Multi-port Drops Port Grommet AFL Part #

Multi-port Drop Port Grommet Accepted Cable Diameters

Mounting Hardware

Hanger/Mount Support

AFL Part #

Ground kit

AFL Part #

Drop Cables

Single-fiber OSP Flat Drop Cable with Toning Wire, SC/APC on one end, other end unterminated, singlemode fiber

Tools Required

Items needed by Construction and I&R teams

WEATHERTIGHT TERMINALS

CT-100 Fiber Cleaver

Precise cleaving is required for photonic splicing applications as the types of optical fiber become more diversified to meet new applications . In addition, angled cleaving is often required for low back-reflection fiber end preparation . The CT-100 has been developed to offer adjustability and versatility for these various fiber types and applications while offering superior cleaving performance beyond conventional cleavers that utilize a circular blade . The CT-100 is equipped with a motorized diamond blade that touches the fiber after tension has been applied providing high-strength cleaving capability .

Features

• Diamond blade with long blade life

• Large diameter fiber cleaving capability (fiber diameter range 80 to 250 µm)

• Angle cleaving capability (0 to 15 degrees)

• Cleave counter

• Adjustable cleave length

• Dual power sources (4 “AA” batteries or AC adapter)

Specifications

PARAMETER

Applicable Fiber

Cleaving Performance

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diameter

Cleave Angle Capability

Cleave Length

Dimensions

Weight

Blade Lifetime

DC Power Supply

AC Power Supply

Operating Conditions

Storage Conditions

VALUE

Conventional silica optical fiber

Typical 0 .5 degrees

80 to 250 µm

160 to 2000 µm

0 to 15 degrees (adjustable)

0 to 40 with Fiber Holder, FH-100 series or FH-40 series

140 mm (W) x 110 mm (D) x 95 mm (H)

900 g or less (excluding batteries)

20,000 fibers (1,000 fibers x 20 positions)

4 “AA” size batteries (approx . 2000 cleaves)

100 to 240 VAC / 50 to 60 Hz using ADC-16

Temperature: 0 to 40°C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH (Non-condensing)

Temperature: -40 to 80°C, Humidity: 0 to 95% RH (Non-condensing)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

CT-100 Advance Optical Fiber Cleaver

Includes: ADC-16 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, 1 .5 mm hex wrench,

2 .5 mm hex wrench and instruction manual

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

ADC-16 AC Adapter

ACC-09 AC Power Cord

CB-03 Cleaver Blade

AFL NO.

S014972

AFL NO.

S015017

S014390

S015214

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00008, Revision 3, 5 .24 .13

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

24

Cleavers

CT-105

CT-106

Features

Applicable up to

1,250 μm diameter fibers

Automatic clamping system

Up to 100 program modes can be stored

Angled cleaving function on CT-106

20,000 cleave per blade for 125 μm fiber

Fiber backstop standard on all cleavers

CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers

When exceptional cleave quality is required for fibers up to 1,250 μm, the new large diameter CT-105/CT-106 cleaver family provides both flat and angled cleaves using an automatic clamping system with programmable force . The color LCD shows cleaving progress and recommended insert size depending on fiber coating and cladding diameter .

Saving and storing cleaving programs to a PC or tablet is accomplished using a USB port .

The LDF cleaver’s extensive programming features allow for optimal results .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Applicable optical fiber

Number of fibers

Cladding diameter

Coating diameter

Fiber clamping

Cleaving length

Angled cleaving

Blade life

Number of cleaving mode

Language

Monitor

Dimensions

Weight

Power supply

Operation condition

Storage condition

Terminal

CT-105 CT-106

Glass optical fibers, capillary

Single

80 - 1,250 μm

160 - 3,000 μm

Automatic clamping

-

5 - 40 mm

0 - 15° (up to 800 μm cladding fiber)

20,000 fibers (Cladding diameter 125 μm)

Maximum 100

English/Japanese

4 .7 inches color LCD

240(W)×134(D)×155(H) mm 240(W)×134(D)×162 .5(H) mm

3 .5 kg 3 .8 kg

AC adapter : ADC-19 Input : AC100 to 240 V (50 to 60 Hz) (max . 20 W)

0 to 95% RH and 0 to 40°C (non-dew)

0 to 95% RH and -40 to 80°C (non-dew)

USB2 .0 (Mini-B type) for PC communication

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

CT-105 Large Diameter Optical Fiber Cleaver

Includes: ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, HEX-01 hex wrench, USB-01 USB Cable and M-CT105 instruction manual

CT-106 Angled Large Diameter Optical Fiber Cleaver

Includes: ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, HEX-01 hex wrench, USB-01 USB Cable and M-CT105 instruction manual

AFL NO.

S016076

S016077 clamp

backstop

blade fiber backstop

Angled Cleaving

Angled cleaving from 0-15° is possible for fibers up to 800 µm (only for CT-106)

Automatic Clamp Function

Clamping optical fiber with programmable force automatically . No compressed air or torquewrenches required .

Backstop

A back stop is important for cleaving both very small and large diameter fibers and is standard on all CT-105/CT-106 cleavers .

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00080, Revision 0, 1.5.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

25

Cleavers

CT-105 & CT-106 Fiber Cleavers

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

CB-06 Replacement Blade

AC adapter ADC-19

AC power cord ACC-09

Fiber Holder Inserts

Master fiber holder insert kit

(includes all available inserts listed below)

INSERT-L-80

INSERT-L-125

INSERT-L-160

INSERT-L-250

INSERT-L-400

INSERT-L-500-750

AFL NO.

S016078

S015523

S014390

S016098

S016085

S016086

S016087

S016088

S016089

S016090

DESCRIPTION

Fiber Holder Inserts

(continued)

INSERT-L-1000-1250

INSERT-L-1500-1750

INSERT-L-2000-2250

INSERT-L-2500-3000

INSERT-U-80-400

INSERT-U-500-750

INSERT-U-1000-1250

INSERT-U-1500-1750

INSERT-U-2000-2250

INSERT-U-2500-3000

AFL NO.

S016091

S016092

S016093

S016094

S016079

S016080

S016081

S016082

S016083

S016084

DESCRIPTION AFL NO.

Height adjusting spacer (10 piece pack)

SPA-CT105-30 (30 μm)

SPA-CT105-50 (50 μm)

SPA-CT105-100 (100 μm)

S016095

S016096

S016097

Insert Selection Guide

INSERT-L-80

INSERT-L-125

INSERT-L-160

INSERT-L-250

INSERT-L-400

INSERT-L-500-750

INSERT-L-1000-1250

INSERT-L-1500-1750

INSERT-L-2000-2250

INSERT-L-2500-3000

F

R

F

R

F

R

F

R

F

R

INSERT-U-80-400

60-100

90-160

115-200

180-300

280-500

INSERT-U-500-750

F

475-700

R

675-950

INSERT-U-1000-1250 INSERT-U-1500-1750 INSERT-U-2000-2250 INSERT-U-2500-3000

F

925-1150

R F

1125-1400

1375-1700

R F R F R

1675-1900

1875-2200

2175-2450

2425-2750

2725-3175

Upper and lower inserts can be changed up or down depending on required fiber fit into the V-groove.

F & R denote the end of the insert that is visible in the cleaver . Inserts 500 μm and above are double-sided . Therefore, the F & R determine which side of the insert you are using .

Upper and lower inserts are necessary for both left and right side clamps.

Case 1: Cleaving fiber with a coating Case 2: Cleaving glass rod

L: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx

L: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx

According to coating diameter

R: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx

According to cladding diameter

Inserts according to both coating diameter and cladding diameter are necessary.

L: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-U-xxx-xxx

L: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx R: INSERT-L-xxx-xxx

According to coating diameter According to cladding diameter

Two insert pairs of the same size according to rod diameter are necessary.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00080, Revision 0, 1.5.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

26

photo

PowerCleave

®

To complement the line of world class splicing systems, AFL’s PowerCleave combines the precision of an ultrasonic cleaver with the ease and improved fiber management of the Fujikura fiber holder system . The PowerCleave utilizes the tensile stress method to avoid touching or damaging the bare glass surface during cleaving, ensuring highly robust, reliable and durable splice results . The PowerCleave provides consistent flat ends even at cleave lengths as short as 3 mm . Specially designed for use with Fujikura’s specialty market splicers, this advanced cleaving system allows for more reliability and greater splicing consistency with less dependence on operator technique .

Features

• Tensile cleaving with ultrasonic blade

• Consistent, low-angle cleaves of short cleave-length fibers

• Fiber holder system reduces fiber handling

• Clean, reliable quality

Specifications

PARAMETER

Fibers Cleaved

Minimum Cleave Length

Cleave Angle

Blade

Clamping System

Case

Battery

Dimensions (L x W x D)

Weight

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

CE Conformity

VALUE

80 µm - 200 µm (cladding diameter)

3 mm

<0 .6 typical (95% of cleaves)

Diamond with an estimated life of over 20,000 cleaves

Compatible with Fujikura specialty market fiber holder systems

ABS impact resistant with non-slip feet and a 6 .25 mm ( .24 inch)

BSW thread tripod mount for hard mounting to a workstation

9V alkaline (MN 1604), battery life approximately 10,000 cleaves

75 mm x 153 mm x 150 mm (3 .0 x 6 .0 x 5 .9 inches)

1 .1 kg (2 .4 lbs)

0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F)

-20°C to 60°C (-4°F to 140°F)

Fully complies with all EC equipment guidelines according to the CE declaration of conformity

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

PowerCleave Kit

Includes: PowerCleave, Instruction manual, 2 .5 mm x 60 mm screwdriver,

2 mm Allen wrench

AFL NO.

S009972

27

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00063, Revision 3, 5.29.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Fully automatic

• Low cleave angles of < 0 .3º

• Very flat end faces

• Designed for production environment

• Waste fiber deposition

• Long diamond life of > 26,000

• PC controllable

AutoCleaver

The AutoCleaver is a fully automatic, ultra high precision fiber cleaver with a typical cleave angle of less than 0 .3° . Designed for industrial applications where high accuracy, reliability and production yield are required, the AutoCleaver has a built-in microprocessor which controls all vital parameters and settings such as fiber positioning, clamping, fiber tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . The cleaver can be connected to an external PC from which all programmable parameters and settings can be accessed .

The AutoCleaver has a diamond blade with an extensive life, generating typically more than 26,000 cleaves per blade . With interchangeable adapters to fit all commercially available fiber holders, the AutoCleaver’s adapter is easily adjustable for desired cleave lengths and the automatic fiber waste disposal system removes any hazardous fiber scraps .

The AutoCleaver comes in a small bench top design, workbench-mountable or ready to be integrated into different subsystems .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Fiber Cladding

Fiber Coating

Cleave Angle

Cycle Time

# of Cleaves/Blade

Fiber Waste

Power Supply

Compressed Air

PC Connection

Dimensions

Weight

* Fiber specific handling kits required

** Not included in delivery

VALUE

80-230 µm*

160 - 900 µm*

Typical < 0 .3º

Typical <12 sec

>30,000

Typical < 20 mm

External 12V DC

External Compressor**, 6 bar, 4 mm instant push-in fitting

RS-232

175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H)

1 .4 kg

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

AutoCleaver with Power Supply and Cord

(Includes: V-groove and Height Adjuster for 125 µm fiber, PC software,

RS-232 cable, Adapter Plate FJK, AC STD, manual and tools)

AFL NO.

50000000-US

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Adaptor Plate FJK, AC STD

V-groove, STD, Cla 80 µm (Blue)

V-groove, STD, Cla 125-199 µm (Yellow)

V-groove, STD, Cla 200-349 µm (Orange)

Height Adjuster STD, Cla 80 µm (Blue)

Height Adjuster STD, Cla 125-159 µm (Yellow)

Height Adjuster STD, Cla 160-199 µm (Blank/Grey)

Height Adjuster STD, Cla 200-349 µm (Orange)

Diamond blade

Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool

Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25A

Adapter for Power Supply, US

AFL NO.

50000020

51030010

51030020

51030030

51040010

51040020

51040030

51040040

50000010

50000050

50100240

50100241

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00033, Revision 2, 2.9.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

28

Features

• Fully automatic

• Low cleave angles: < 0 .50°

• Very flat end faces

• Operator independent

• Designed for production and laboratory environments

• Automatic scrap fiber collection

• Long diamond life

• PC controllable

• Adaptable for fiber holders of the

Fujikura FSM-45F-LDF and

FSM-45PM-LDF fusion splicer

AutoCleaver LDF

The AutoCleaver LDF is a high precision fiber cleaver, designed for cleaving of Large

Diameter Fibers . It provides outstanding cleaving performance for large diameter fibers from 250 μm up to 1200 μm in diameter . It also supports cleaving of fibers as small as 125 μm . The unique and patent-pending cleaving process generates typical cleave angles of less than 0 .5 degrees with LDF fibers .

The AutoCleaver LDF can be configured for use with the Fujikura FSM-45 series of fusion splicers and therefore supports splicing operations with large diameter fibers .

The cleaved fiber is transferred from the cleaver to the Fujikura splicer using a standard

Fujikura fiber holder . The built in Microprocessor controls all vital parameters and settings, such as fiber alignment, clamping, tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . This control of sensitive parameters guarantees a high cleaving repeatability and accuracy . During cleaving, the fiber coating is clamped by a touchoperated tension clamp . The clamp is quickly interchangeable based on the fiber coating diameter . A v-groove clamping block and a fiber height adjuster are selected based upon the diameter of the fiber cladding . The fiber coating tension clamp as well as the V-groove clamp block and height adjuster work together as a fiber handling kit to ensure optimum cleaving performance for a particular fiber . These parts may be selected at the time of cleaver purchase from the selection guide matrix . Other sets are easily exchanged by the operator to set the cleaver up for another fiber size .

The AutoCleaver LDF also accepts the use of NYFORS fiber holders in place of the tension clamps normally used for coating clamping . This provides versatile use of the cleaver for operations when splicing is not required . The cleaver is designed to generate minimum amounts of fiber waste, typically less than 20 mm . An automatic waste disposal system removes any hazardous fiber scraps . The cleaver can be connected to an external PC that gives access to all programmable parameters and settings .

The AutoCleaver LDF comes in a small bench top design . It has been designed to easily permit recessed mounting for ergonomic workbench operations in a production environment and is therefore ready to be integrated into different subsystems .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Fiber Cladding

Fiber Coating

Cycle Time

Cleave Angle

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diamter

Fiber Waste

Power Supply

Compressed Air

PC Connection

Dimensions

Weight

* Fiber specific handling kits required

** Not included in delivery

VALUE

250 - 1000 µm*

300 - 1500 µm*

Typical < 14 seconds

Typical < 0 .5º

230 - 1000 µm

250 - 1500 µm

Typical < 20 mm

External 12V DC

External Compressor**, 6 bar 4 mm instant push-in fitting

RS-232

175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H)

2 .5 kg

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00035, Revision 4, 2.3.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

29

AutoCleaver LDF

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

AutoCleaver LDF with Power Supply and Cord

Includes: Adaptor Plate FJK, PC software, RS-232 cable, manual and tools

Nyfors AutoCleaver LDF w/Universal Stage

Includes: Long Rail, Power Supply & Cord Adaptor Plate FJK, PC software, RS-232 cable, manual and tools

* See Fiber Handling matrix below for additional required items .

Selection Guide Matrix for Determining Fiber Handling Kit

DESCRIPTION LABEL

V-Groove (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter

V-groove, LD, Cladding 200-349 µm

V-groove, LD, Cladding 350-699 µm

Orange

Green

V-groove, LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm Red

Height Adjuster (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter

Height Adj . LD, Cladding 200-349 µm

Height Adj . LD, Cladding 350-529 µm

Height Adj . LD, Cladding 530-699 µm

Orange

White

Black

Height Adj . LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm Red

Linear Insert (Used only with Fujikura splicers) Select size based on fiber coating diameter

Linear Insert, Coating 210-699 µm

Linear Insert, Coating 700-1000 µm

210-699

700-1000

Misc. Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Diamond blade

Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool

Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25A

Adapter for Power Supply, US

Universal Stage NFF FH Base

AFL NO.

50100000-US

S015274

AFL NO.

51030030

51030040

51030050

51040040

51040050

51040060

51040070

51050010

51050020

AFL NO.

50000010

50000050

50100240

50100241

S014770

30

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00035, Revision 4, 2.3.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Variable angle cleaving,

0 to >15 degrees

• Semi automatic

• Easy handling

• Operator independent

• Designed for production and laboratory environments

• Automatic fiber waste collection

• Long-lasting diamond

• PC controllable

AutoCleaver LDA

The AutoCleaver LDA is a high precision fiber cleaver, designed for angle cleaving of large diameter fibers (LDF) . It is a special version of the well-known AutoCleaver LDF which provide outstanding cleaving performance for fibers from 230 μm up to 1000 μm in diameter . The unique and patent pending cleaving process generates typical cleave angles of less than 0 .5 degrees . The AutoCleaver LDA is capable of cleaving fibers with a coating diameter up to 1000 μm, achieving cleave angles from 0 up to more than

15 degrees with very consistent ±0 .5 degrees cleave angles . The cleave angle is set using a micrometer screw positioner allowing the operator to quickly setup the cleaver for different fiber sizes or cleave angles .

The V-groove clamp block and the fiber height adjuster are selected to match the diameter of the fiber cladding . The V-groove clamp block and the height adjuster work together as a fiber handling kit to ensure optimum cleaving performance for a particular fiber range . These parts have to be be selected from the Selection Guide Matrix when you purchase the cleaver . The parts are easily exchanged by the operator to set the cleaver up for a different fiber size .

The built-in microprocessor controls all parameters and settings, such as clamping, tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . This control of sensitive parameters guarantees a high cleaving repeatability and accuracy .

The cleaver is designed to generate a minimum amount of fiber waste, typically less than 20 mm . An automatic waste disposal system removes any hazardous fiber scraps .

The cleaver can be connected to a PC that gives access to all programmable parameters and settings . The AutoCleaver LDA comes in a small bench top design .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Cycle time

Cladding diameter

Coating diameter

Cleave angle

Fiber waste length

Power supply

VALUE

Typical < 18 seconds

230-800+ μm*

250-1000 μm

0 to >15 degrees

Typical < 20 mm, automatic disposal

External 12 V DC, 15 W

Compressed air supply

PC Interface

Dimensions

External compressor**, 6-8 bar, 4 mm instant push-in fitting

RS-232

175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H)

Weight 2 .5 kg

* Fiber specific handling parts required . See the Selection Guide Matrix for more information .

31

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00034, Revision 0, 8.30.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AutoCleaver LDA

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

AutoCleaver LDA with Power Supply and Cord

Includes: AutoCleaver LDA unit for angle cleaving, PC software, RS-232 cable, Manual and Tools

* See Fiber Handling matrix below for additional required items .

Selection Guide Matrix for Determining Fiber Handling Kit

DESCRIPTION LABEL

V-Groove (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter

V-groove, LD, Cladding 200-349 µm

V-groove, LD, Cladding 350-699 µm

V-groove, LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm

Orange

Green

Red

Height Adjuster (Used with all splicer brands) Select size based on fiber cladding diameter

Height Adj . LD, Cladding 200-349 µm

Height Adj . LD, Cladding 350-529 µm

Height Adj . LD, Cladding 530-699 µm

Height Adj . LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm

Orange

White

Black

Red

Misc. Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Diamond blade

Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool

Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25A

Adapter for Power Supply, US

AFL NO.

50400000

AFL NO.

51030030

51030040

51030050

51040040

51040050

51040060

51040070

AFL NO.

50000010

50000050

50100240

50100241

32

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00034, Revision 0, 8.30.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Fully automatic

• Low cleave angles of < 0 .3º

• Very flat end faces

• Operator independent

• Designed for production environment

• Waste fiber deposition

• Long diamond life

• Available for 80 or 125 µm fibers

• PC controllable a +/ - 10 µm

AutoCleaver S1 -80 µm / S1-125 µm

When a specific and accurate bare fiber length is required, the AutoCleaver S1 provides the perfect cleave every time . Sensing the edge of the coating and adjusting the bare fiber length according to the customers’ specifications, the AutoCleaver S1 cleaves

80 µm and 125 µm fibers automatically . Cleave angles are typically under 0 .3° with excellent end face quality .

A built-in microprocessor controls all the vital parameters and settings such as fiber positioning, clamping, fiber tension and the exact position and speed of the diamond blade . The cleaver can be connected to an external PC, enabling access to all programmable parameters and settings .

The AutoCleaver S1 is available in a small bench top design, workbench-mountable or ready to be integrated into different sub-systems . At the time of order, the desired cleave length must be specified . The minimum cleave length possible is 3 mm and the maximum is 6 .5 mm . The bare fiber length can be fine-tuned by software between 0 and 500 µm .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Fiber Cladding

Fiber Coating

Cleave Angle

Cycle Time

Cladding diameter

# of Cleaves/Blade

Fiber Waste

Power Supply

Compressed Air

PC connection

Dimensions

Weight

* Fiber specific handling kits required

** Not included in delivery

VALUE

80 - 125 µm*

160 - 400 µm*

Typical < 0 .3º

Typical < 14 seconds

80 and 125 µm

> 30,000

Typical < 20 mm

External 12V DC

External Compressor**, 6 bar 4 mm instant push-in fitting

RS-232

175 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 104 mm (H)

1 .4 kg

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

AutoCleaver S1-80 µm with Power Supply and Cord

(Includes: V-groove & Height Adjuster, Adaptor Plate, PC software, manual and tools)

AutoCleaver S1-125 µm with Power Supply and Cord

(Includes: V-groove & Height Adjuster, Adaptor Plate, PC software, manual and tools)

AFL NO.

50100029

50100028

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Adaptor Plate FJK, AC STD

Adaptor Plate NYF/ECA, AC STD

V-groove, STD, Cla . 80 µm

V-groove, STD, Cla . 125-199 µm

Height Adj . STD, Cla . 80 µm

Height Adj . STD Cla . 125-159 µm

Diamond blade

Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool

Power Supply, 100-240V, 1 .25 A

Adapter for Power Supply, US

AFL NO.

50000020

50000030

51030010

51030020

51040010

51040020

50000010

50000050

50100240

50100241

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00036, Revision 3, 10.15.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

33

Features

• Fully automatic

• Low cleave angles of < 0 .5º

• Very flat end faces

• Operator independent

• Automatic fiber waste collection

• Long-lasting diamond

• PC controllable

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE

Fiber Cladding 125 - 1000 µm*

Fiber Coating 250 - 1500 µm*

Cycle Time Typical < 14 seconds

Cleave Angle Typical < 0 .5º

Fiber Waste Typical < 20 mm

Power Supply External 12V DC

Compressed Air 4mm instant push-in fitting

PC Connection RS-232

Dimensions 175 mm(W) x 138 mm(D) x 104 mm(H)

Weight 2 .5 kg

* Fiber specific handling kits required

AutoCleaver S2

The AutoCleaver S2 contains special fiber clamps with air pressure-controlled clamping forces, designed for cleaving air-clad fiber . Coupled with modified software, these features enable the AutoCleaver S2 to handle otherwise difficult-to-cleave fibers .

The clamping force of the fiber clamps is set individually by changing the air pressure .

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

AutoCleaver S2 - Small Cylinder/FJK

Includes: 12 mm v-groove clamping cylinder, FJK Fiber Holder Adapter LDF, RS-232 cable,

PC software, tools and manuals

AutoCleaver S2 - Large Cylinder/FJK

Includes: 20 mm v-groove clamping cylinder, FJK Fiber Holder Adapter LDF, RS-232 cable,

PC software, tools and manuals

AFL NO.

50100030

50100092

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

V-groove, STD, Cladding 125-199 µm

V-groove, LD, Cladding 200-349 µm

V-groove, LD, Cladding 350-699 µm

V-groove, LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm

Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 200-349 µm

Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 350-529 µm

Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 530-699 µm

Height Adjuster LD, Cladding 700-1000 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 200-299 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 300-399 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 400-499 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 500-599 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 600-699 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 700-799 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 800-899 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 900-999 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 1000-1099 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 1100-1199 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 1200-1299 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 1300-1399 µm

Holder, LD, Coating 1400-1499 µm

Distance Plate LD Cladding 200-349 µm

Distance Plate LD Cladding 350-699 µm

Distance Plate LD Cladding 700-1000 µm

Diamond blade

Cleaver Blade Replacement Tool

Power Supply, 100-240 V, 1 .25 A

Adapter for Power Supply, US

650 µm

750 µm

850 µm

950 µm

1050 µm

1150 µm

1250 µm

1350 µm

1450 µm

Orange

Green

Red

LABEL

Yellow

Orange

Green

Red

Orange

White

Black

Red

250 µm

350 µm

450 µm

550 µm

51010050

51010060

51010070

51010080

51010090

51010100

51010110

51010120

51010130

51020010

51020020

51020030

50000010

50000050

50100240

50100241

AFL NO.

51030020

51030030

51030040

51030050

51040040

51040050

51040060

51040070

51010010

51010020

51010030

51010040

34

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00037, Revision 4, 10.15.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Documents images from critical end-faces during production

• Precise results

• Fast and easy handling

CleaveMeter 3D

LDF

The CleaveMeter 3D

LDF

is a non-contact (Michelson) interferometer used to examine all types of large diameter fibers with a cladding diameter of 250-1200µm . The optical system consists of a CCD camera with two user-selectable magnifications . Connected to the USB-port of an external PC, parameters and settings are programmed from the PC .

A small bench-top design, the CleaveMeter

LDF

is designed to be compatible with all

NYFORS’ automatic large diameter fiber (LDF) cleavers such as the AutoCleaver

LDF

and the CleaveMaster

LDF

. The CleaveMeter

LDF

accepts the fiber holders used by the NYFORS cleavers without mechanical adjustments . For other types of holders, customized adapters must be provided .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Fiber Cladding

Curing Coating

Power Supply

PC Connection

Dimensions

Weight

* Fiber specific adaptor plates required

VALUE

250 - 1200µm

300 - 1500µm

USB port

USB port

95mm (W) x 160mm (D) x 140mm (H)

1 .5kg

Ordering Information

PART NO.

30000005

MISC. ACCESSORIES

30010010

30020010

DESCRIPTION

CleaveMeter LDF/Excluding Adapter Plate

Adapter Plate, FJK, 200-259µm

Adapter Plate, NYFORS, Generic

Octagon 400µm

0 .38˚

Circular 550µm

0 .17˚

35

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00039, Revision 2, 2.10.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FU

SION

SPLICER

S

Fiber Optic Cable

HJS-02

HJS-03

HJS-03-24 with Power Assist Tool

Hot Jacket Strippers

The HJS-02, HJS-03 and HJS-03-24 hot jacket strippers provide superior ribbon andfield-ribbonized stripping performance . They conserve energy with a Power

Save feature when the splicer is operated by battery power . A temperature selection switch provides easy field optimization for different fibers or operating conditions .

An optional single-fiber adapter may be used to provide easy single-fiber capability for difficult-to-strip fibers . These strippers accept all Fujikura field and factory splicer designed fiber holders . The HJS-03 is a battery powered hot jacket stripper specifically designed for use withthe SpliceMate fusion splicer but it can be used in other applications . The HJS-03-24 hot jacket stripper is designed for smooth and controlled stripping of 24-fiber ribbon .

Specifications

MODEL

Applicable Fiber Count

Ribbon Thickness

Stripping Length

Typical Heating Time

Standard Heating Temperature

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Power Supply

Operating Conditions

Storage Conditions

HJS-02, HJS-03

1 to 12 Fiber Ribbon

250 µm to 400 µm

35 mm maximum

3 second Normal Mode

8 second Power Save Mode

100ºC

107 mm x 40 mm x 29 mm

195 g (0 .43lb)

12V DC

-10ºC to 50ºC

-40ºC to 80ºC

HJS-03-24

1 to 24 Fiber Ribbon

250 µm to 400 µm

35 mm maximum

3 second Normal Mode

30 second Power Save Mode

100ºC

149 mm x 58 mm x 36 mm

300 g (0 .66 lb)

12V DC

-10ºC to 50ºC

-40ºC to 80ºC

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Strippers

HJS-02 Hot Jacket Stripper (12 fibers max .) Includes DCC-11

HJS-02-80 Hot Jacket Stripper (80 µm cladding) Includes DCC-11

HJS-03 Battery Powered Hot Jacket Stripper

HJS-03-24 Hot Jacket Stripper (24 fibers max .)

AFL NO.

S010340

S013264

S013996

S012960

S012964 HJS-03-24PA Power Assist Tool for HJS-03-24

AC Power Operation

ADC-09 AC Adapter (for HJS-02, HJS-03 and HJS-03-24)

ACC-09 AC Power Cord (for ADC-09)

DC Power Operation

S014389

S014390

DCC-11 DC Power Cord for HJS-02/HJS-03 (for FSM-17R/50R/18R/60R) S013852

DCC-03 DC Power Cord for HJS-02/HJS-03 (for FSM-30R/40R24) S006126

Miscellaneous

SAD-01 Single Fiber Adapter for HJS-02 S010428

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00031, Revision 4, 8 .7 .12

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

Features

• 250 µm and 900 µm fiber capability

• Short cycle time

• Lightweight and portable

AFL PowerStrip

AFL PowerStrip is a thermal stripper used in high strength splicing . Using the proven blade and centering design of the Schleuniger FiberStrip 7030 in addition to the fiber holder system, the AFL PowerStrip automatically centers the fiber, heats the buffer or coating and strips the buffer at a controlled rate with perfect alignment . The fiber holder system reduces fiber handling, making this tool ideal for any production environment .

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE

Fibers Stripped - Single Buffered Fiber Cladding diameter: 125 µm standard, 80 µm optional

Coating diameter: 250 µm and 900 µm standard, 160 µm and 400 µm optional

Clamping System Fujikura fiber holder clamp; compatible with FSM-45F/PM and 100 series fiber holders

Stripping Length

Heater Temperature Range

Heating Time

Up to 35 mm

110°C to 150°C (230°F to 302°F)

1 .5 to 13 seconds

Cycle Time

Power Supply

Dimensions (L x W x D)

Weight

CE Conformity

Approximately 5 seconds/cycle (after heating)

Input: 100 to 240 V AC, 50/60 ± 3 Hz; Output: 12 V DC, 12 W, 1 A

209 mm x 57 mm x 45 mm (8 .25 x 2 .25 x 1 .8 inches)

0 .7 kg (1 .5 lbs)

Complies with all CE equipment guidelines

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

AFL PowerStrip Kit

Carrying case, fiber holder clamping system, blades and centralizers for 125/250 µm and 125/900 µm fiber, power supply 230 V AC or 100/120 V AC, power cord 2 m

(6 .5 feet), cleaning brush and tool set (hex keys, adjustment screwdriver)

Coating Blades

80/160 µm

125/250 µm

125/400 µm

125/900 µm

250/400 µm

Centralizers

160 µm

250 µm

400 µm

900 µm

Power Supply

12 V DC W/PLUG ADPT

* Custom blades and centralizers available on request .

AFL NO.

S012808

S012656

S012596

S012628

S012604

S014400

S012652

S012600

S012624

S012608

S015185

37

High Tensile Stripper

The Fujikura high tensile stripper HTS-12 provides excellent strength performance when removing 250 µm and 400 µm buffer from optical fibers . Heating temperature and duration are fully adjustable for a variety of buffer materials . Self centering blades eliminate the need for an external guide and make replacement quick and easy .

Designed for use with the FSM-40F/PM fiber holder system, the HTS-12 is an ideal solution for stripping when high strength fusion splices are a must .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Applicable Fiber:

Cladding Diameter

Coating Diameter

Stripping Length

Temperature Settings

Heating Time

Power Supply

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

Operating Conditions

VALUE

125 µm

250 µm / 400 µm (optional)

35 mm max

120º, 140º, 160º, or 180º C (adjustable)

3 seconds approximate

100 to 240 VAC (50 to 60 Hz)

140 x 60 x 60 (mm) / 5 .51 x 2 .36 x 2 .36 (inches)

600 g / 1 .3 lbs

0ºC to 40ºC, 10% to 85% RH (non-condensing)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

HTS-12 High Tensile Stripper w/ 250 µm Blades

400 µm Blade for HTS-12

250 µm Blades for HTS-12

AFL NO.

S012094

S011946

S011942

38

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00030, Revision 1, 2 .10 .11

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

Included Accessories

USC-03 Ultrasonic Cleaner

The Fujikura ultrasonic cleaner model USC-03 provides a simple and cost effective method for cleaning optical fibers when high strength fusion splices are required .

This ultrasonic cleaner readily accepts all FH-40-XXX, FH-50-XXX, FH-60-XXX and

FH-100-XXX series fiber holders . The Universal Fiber Holder Adapter, available as an optional accessory, enables the use of FH-XXX series fiber holders .

The high frequency ultrasonic action cleans debris and coating residue without damaging the exposed cladding and a built-in timer ensures that the required cleaning time is consistently used for all fibers processed . This cleaner, when used in conjunction with high strength stripping and cleaving accessories, produces outstanding results for the most demanding high strength applications .

Features

• Built-in timer assures correct cleaning time

• Adjustable high intensity vibratory cleaning action

• Adjustment knob allows fine-tuning of fiber submersion depth

• Alcohol bath lid prevents cleaning fluid evaporation when machine is idle

Specifications

PARAMETER

Applicable Fibers

Applicable Fiber Holders

Recommended Fluid

Tank Capacity

Ultrasonic Frequency

Fiber Cleaning Length

Output Power

Timer Range

Power Requirement

Operating Environment

Storage Environment

Dimensions (W x D x H)

Weight

VALUE

Single optical fiber

FH-40, 50, 60 and 100 series

Ethyl-alcohol

24 cc to 45 cc

50 kHz

54 mm (max), adjustable

10 W (max)

1 to 99 seconds

AC 100 to 240 V / 50 Hz to 60 Hz

0oC to 40oC, 0 to 95% RH, non-condensing

-20˚C to 60˚C, non-condensing humidity

95 x 190 x 157 (mm) / 3 .74 x 7 .48 x 6 .18 (inches)

1 kg / 2 .2 lbs

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

USC-03

Universal Fiber Holder Adapter

ADC-10 Power Adapter

ACC-09 Power Cord

AFL NO.

S014783

S013568

S012548

S014390

39

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00064, Revision 3, 5 .14 .15

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

Cleavers

FSR-05

FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07

Optical Fiber Recoaters

AFL offers a complete lineup of high quality fiber recoaters to address the small packaging needs of the fiber optic industry . The FSR series recoaters provide automatic operation with an easily exchangeable, low cost, mold design . A quick change resin bottle and pump assembly make messy, cumbersome, and time consuming acrylate changes a thing of the past . The pump system also provides a purge cavity for elimination of bubbles in the acrylate material . A programmable resin injection system provides an exact volume of resin to the mold cavity to ensure consistent and repeatable recoat performance . While the base model FSR-05 provides only recoating functions, the FSR-06 and FSR- 07 also provide programmable rate and force proof-testing capabilities up to 2 kgf or 10 kgf respectively .

All of the recoaters are compatible with special recoating resins to provide higher stiffness recoating for 900 μm jacketed fibers, as well as specialty low-index resins for recoating of double-clad fibers . A USB - PC interface allows the user to control and store key parameters associated with the recoating process . The quartz mold technology provides very consistent recoating quality and have an estimated lifetime of 10,000 recoats per mold set .

FSR-06

FSR-07

Features

Easy mold, resin and pump exchange

Quartz molds for high-quality, consistent recoating

Wide selection of available mold sizes

Automated operation

Bubble elimination system

Programmable resin injection

Selectable proof–tester

PC interface with USB

Specifications

PARAMETER

Applicable fiber coating

Recoating diameter

Recoating length

Recoating time

Resin injection

Recoat material

Material of mold

Recoat modes

Proof-test modes

Load application

Tension

Dimensions

Weight

Power source

LCD monitor

PC interface

Operating condition

Storage condition

FSR-05 FSR-06

Colored and non-colored

FSR-07

195 μm, 255 μm, 280 μm, 450 μm, 670 μm, 1000 μm

Custom sizes are available

4 to 50 mm

Injection 20 sec/Curing 4 sec

(Jacket diameter 250 μm with 280 μm MOLD)

Volume and speed are programmable

UV curable Acrylate

Recommended specification for other viscosity 2000-6000 cps

Curing wavelength 365± 15 nm

DSM Desotech DesoLite(R) 950-200 recommended

Quartz

100 modes

All variables programmable

30 modes

Speed, force, time programmable

252 mm (W) x 135 mm (D) x 169 mm (H)

Linear Clamp

0 .5 kgf ~ 2 .0 kgf

Mandrel

0 .5 kgf ~ 10 .0 kgf

252 mm (W) x 175 mm (D) x 169 mm (H)

2 .9 kg 4 .3 kg 4 .5 kg

AC 100 to 240 C /50 to 60 Hz (External AC adaptor ADC-19)

4 .7 inch, Tilt angle

USB 2 .0 Type B mini

10 to 30°C, 0 to 90% (non dew)

-40 to 60°C (non dew, no resin)

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00081, Revision 2, 5.26.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

40

Cleavers

FSR-05, FSR-06 and FSR-07 Optical Fiber Recoaters

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

FSR-05

Includes: 280 μm mold, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable and M-FSR05 instruction manual .

FSR-06 with 280 μm mold

Includes: 280 μm mold, 2 kgf Proof Tester, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable, PC-02 Fiber protect cover and M-FSR05 instruction manual .

FSR-06 with 450 μm mold

Includes: 450 μm mold, 2 kgf Proof Tester, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable, PC-02 Fiber protect cover and M-FSR05 instruction manual .

FSR-07

Includes: 10 kgf Proof Tester, 280 μm mold, ADC-19 AC adapter, ACC-09 AC power cord, USB-01 USB Cable, PC-03 Fiber protect cover and M-FSR05 instruction manual .

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Fiber protect cover for FSR-06: PC-02

Fiber protect cover for FSR-07: PC-03

Tube set: FSR-05-TUBE-01

Pump head: FSR-05-PUMP-01

UV resin bottle: FSR-05-BTL-01

Force gauge adaptor: FGA-02

MOLDS

FSR-05-MOLD-195

FSR-05-MOLD-255

FSR-05-MOLD-280

FSR-05-MOLD-450

FSR-05-MOLD-670

FSR-05-MOLD-1000

Easy mold, resin, and pump exchange

Factory installation is not required

Bubble Separator

AFL NO.

S016103

S016104

S016186

S016105

AFL NO.

S016107

S016108

S016109

S016110

S016112

S016113

S016133

S016134

S016106

S016135

S016136

S016137

Mold exchange

Bubble Separator Performance

Resin and pump exchange

41

Spare Pump for quickly changing

UV resin type: FSR-05-pump-01

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00081, Revision 2, 5.26.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dispensing Robot is easily removed from the rear of the AutoCoater for rapid recoat resin exchange

Uniform Diameter

Over-Mold (Over-Coating)

Undersize Recoating

AutoCoater 2

Designed for high strength applications, the AutoCoater 2 restores the protective coating on spliced acrylate-coated optical fibers . It is fully automatic, allowing for operator skill independence in factory environments with high productivity and cost advantages .

Recoating compound is injected automatically into soft silicone recoating molds identical to those used in NYFORS manual recoaters . These silicone molds are easily & rapidly exchangeable with no realignment required . With different sizes and custom molds available, the operator can not only easily exchange molds to meet requirements for different fiber and fiber coating diameters, but he can also choose whether to (a) recoat to a uniform diameter that exactly matches the original fiber coating diameter, (b) recoat with a cross section slightly smaller in diameter than the original fiber coating (undersize), or (c) recoat with a larger diameter that moverlaps the primary coating at each end of the recoat section (over-coating) .

With easy and rapid reconfiguration and simple setup, the AutoCoater 2 is the ideal choice for fully automatic skill-independent recoating operations where flexibility is required to meet many different recoating needs and specifications .

Rapid exchange of recoating resin type

The customer selected recoating compound is automatically injected from an easily attached 1 oz Nalgene bottle, functioning as the recoater reservoir tank . This greatly simplifies refilling in high volume production .

This bottle as well as the injection pump, supply lines, and injection needle comprise an easily exchangeable recoating compound “Dispensing Robot” . The dispensing robot may be rapidly removed with only 2 screws and one electrical interface connection . Since it can be removed and exchanged as a single unit, the need to purge or cleanse the injection pump and supply lines when changing from one type of recoating resin to another is completely eliminated . Another option when using several compounds in parallel is to operate the recoater in manual mode, using a syringe for manual resin injection of recoating compound into the mold .

The combination of mold sizes and mold types (for uniform and undersize recoating as well as overcoating) and the simplicity of exchanging recoating compounds underscores the flexibility of the soft mold AutoCoater 2 as the most versatile and easily adaptable automatic recoater in the world .

Features

• Consistent, high quality recoating

• Automatic and skill independent

• Short cycle time

• Linear and mandrel strength testing

• Uniform diameter, overcoating and undersize recoating capability

• Easy exchange of recoating resin type

• No need for compressed air or vacuum

• Compatible with all common recoating resins including low-index and high temperature materials

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00067, Revision 1, 2.4.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

42

AutoCoater 2

Other features

Short curing times are achieved through an efficient UV LED array arranged along the length of the mold . Curing times depend on the fiber and fiber coating diameter as well as the properties of the customer-selected recoating resin, but are typically as short as 3 seconds which allows for very fast recoating operations with total cycle times of 15 seconds or less – faster than any competing recoater on the market .

Besides standard

High-index materials, low-index recoating compounds can be rapidly cured, typically with a curing time of no more than 30 seconds .

High temperature (200°C) acrylate recoating compounds useful for oil and gas down-hole applications are also compatible, as well as stiffer recoat resins suitable for recoating 900 µm jacketed fibers .

Strength tests can be carried out with the linear clamps or mandrels (optional) . Linear proof tests can be performed up to 22 N, while the mandrels allow for tensile tests with forces up to 100 N . Level of force, pulling rate and hold times at maximum force are programmable .

The AutoCoater 2 comes in an ergonomic, bench-top design for comfortable operation . The main operator interface is a user-friendly and easy-to-navigate GUI on the touch screen control panel . System software supports storable and user-defined programs for easy process change . Remote monitoring and supervision can be carried out through an Ethernet interface .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Curing time

Cycle time

Light source

Wavelength

Injection

Mold mounting

Mold length

Recoating diameter (μm)

Linear proof test

Mandrel Tensile Test (optional item)

Hold time

Pull rate

Display units

PC connection

Compressed air

Power supply

Dimensions

Weight

VALUE

Programmable, 3 s typical

15 seconds typical

UV LED

380-385 nm

Automatic from 1 oz bottle

Exchangeable

34 mm and 55 mm

165, 250, 300, 400, 550 and 900 μm

Programmable, 0-22 N

Programmable, 0-100 N

Programmable

0 .5-20 N/s lbs, kg, N, kpsi, GPa

Ethernet and USB flash drive

Not needed

External 12 V DC, 60 W

270 mm (W) x 210 mm (D) x 115 mm (H)

4 .5 kg

43

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00067, Revision 1, 2.4.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

AutoCoater 2

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

AutoCoater 2 w/ Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter), Fiber Tensioner-Standard,

Packet of 250 µm Molds (34 mm length), Mold Guide Pins, Manual and Tools

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Mold Options

Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Custom molds are available upon request

Miscellaneous

Mold Guide Pins

Fiber Tensioner, 900 µm (left and right)

Mandrels (Rotary Tensile Test)

Dispenser Robot

Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter)

AFL NO.

10100035

AFL NO.

10100036

10100037

10100038

10100039

10100040

10100078

10100041

10100042

10100043

10100044

10100045

10100046

10100079

10100047

10100070

10100061

10100056

10100069

90100409

44

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00067, Revision 1, 2.4.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Uniform Diameter

Over-Mold (Over-Coating)

Undersize Recoating

MiniCoater 2

This compact and easy-to-use recoater is based on NYFORS proven silicone mold technology which has been developed and refined in the course of the last twenty years .

Molds are available in different sizes to cover a range of coating diameters and can easily be exchanged by the operator with no realignment required . Custom molds are available on request .

With the standard molds the recoated part of the fiber is round with a cross section that perfectly and uniformly matches that of the original fiber coating, but molds can also be selected for both over-coating and undersize recoating of optical fibers . These features makes the MiniCoater 2 well suited for research and development operations and small scale production where the fiber type and dimensions need to be changed frequently .

The cordless battery operation enables easy movement from lab-to-lab, or from one production area to another .

Injection of the recoating compound is performed manually . While this does require a manual user operation, it also ensures flexibility because the user can immediately switch from one type of recoating compound to another (e .g . from a high-index recoating material to a low-index material) without any need to flush out a recoater reservoir and injection pumping system . This, in addition to the rapidly exchangeable mold sizes and shapes (for uniform diameter and undersize recoating as well as overcoating), ensures the flexibility and adaptability of the MiniCoater 2 .

Short curing times are achieved through a highly efficient UV LED array, which also has the ability to cure low-index recoating compounds used in fiber laser manufacturing .

In addition, the MiniCoater 2 is compatible with recoating materials that can withstand

200°C high temperature applications such as down-hole applications in oil and gas wells .

The MiniCoater 2 has a simple two button control with a three digit display and comes in a very compact package . The small size and light weight of the MiniCoater 2™ makes it ideal for situations where the recoater must be frequently moved from one lab or production area to another . The small size also facilitates easy ergonomic integration into a production work bench where space is at a premium . In addition, since the

MiniCoater 2 may be operated by battery power, and also due to the small size and weight, it is well suited to recoating in a remote field environment where a high degree of portability is required .

Features

• Ideal recoater for remote sites such as on oil rigs

• Very compact design

• Small, lightweight, highly portable

• Runs on built-in rechargeable battery or AC adapter

• Battery provides power for hours of remote-site operation

• Compatible with high-temperature recoating compounds

• Easy mold exchange and replacement

• Handles most fiber dimensions with custom molds available

• Uniform high quality recoating

• Short curing times

• High and low-index recoating

• Uniform diameter, over-coating and undersize recoating capability

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00070, Revision 2, 10.15.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

45

MiniCoater 2

Specifications

PARAMETER

Curing time

Light source

Wavelength

Mold material

Mold length

Recoating diameter (μm)

Power supply

Dimensions

Weight

VALUE

Programmable, 3 seconds typical

UV LED

380-385 nm

Silicone

34 mm and 55 mm

165, 250, 300, 400, 550 & 900 μm

Battery or external 12 V DC, 40 W

150 mm (W) x 77 mm (D) x 60 mm (H)

0 .7 kg

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

MiniCoater 2 w/ Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU adapter), Fiber Clamps (for 165-330 µm & 330-900 µm),

Packet of 250 µm Molds (34 mm length), Mold Guide Pins, Manual and Tools

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Mold Options

Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Custom molds are available upon request

Miscellaneous

Mold Guide Pins

Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter)

FIBER CLAMPS,MINIC 2,165-330 µm

FIBER CLAMPS,MINIC 2,330-900 µm

AFL NO.

10100033

AFL NO.

10100036

10100037

10100038

10100039

10100040

10100078

10100041

10100042

10100043

10100044

10100045

10100046

10100079

10100047

10100070

90100409

10100074

10100058

46

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00070, Revision 2, 10.15.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

ReCoater 2 XL™ with optional Mandrels attached

Features

• Extended length recoating up to more than 100 mm

• Easy mold exchange and replacement

• Handles most fiber dimensions, with custom molds available

• Uniform diameter, overcoating and undersize recoating capability

• Short curing times

• High and low-index recoating

• Linear or mandrel strength testing

Uniform Diameter

Over-Mold (Over-Coating)

Undersize Recoating

ReCoater 2 XL

The extended length ReCoater 2 XL is used to restore the protective coating on acrylate-coated optical fibers in high strength applications . Designed to process long sections of stripped fiber, it accepts silicone molds of up to 110 mm length .

Molds are available in different sizes to cover a range of fiber coating diameters and can easily be exchanged with no realignment required . With standard molds the recoated part of the fiber is round with a cross section that perfectly and uniformly matches that of the original coating, but molds can also be selected for both overcoating and undersize recoating of optical fibers . These features as well as the ability to recoat very long stripped fiber sections makes the ReCoater 2 XL ideal for research and development operations and small scale production where the fiber type and length need to be changed frequently .

Injection of the recoating compound is performed manually . While this does require a manual user operation, it also ensures flexibility because the user can immediately switch from one type of recoating compound to another (e .g . from a high-index recoating material to a low-index material) without any need to flush out a recoater reservoir and injection pumping system .

This, in addition to the rapidly exchangeable mold sizes and shapes (for uniform diameter and undersize recoating as well as overcoating), ensures the flexibility and adaptability of the extended length ReCoater 2 XL .

Short curing times are achieved through an efficient UV LED array, arranged along the length of the mold . Curing times depend on the fiber and fiber coating diameter as well as the properties of the customer-selected recoating resin, but are typically as short as 3 seconds which allows for very fast recoating operations . The highly efficient light source also makes it possible to cure low-index recoating compounds used in fiber laser manufacturing .

Strength tests can be carried out with linear clamps or mandrels (optional) . Linear proof tests can be performed up to 22 N, with programmable levels of force, pulling rates and hold time at maximum force . With the mandrels, tensile tests can be performed with forces up to 100 N . Linear clamps are carefully designed so that the primary coating is not damaged .

The ReCoater 2 XL comes in an ergonomic, bench-top design for comfortable operation .

The main operator interface is an easy-to-navigate and user-friendly GUI on the touch screen control panel . System software supports storable and user-defined programs for easy process change . Remote monitoring and supervision can be carried out through an

Ethernet interface .

47

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 1, 2.3.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

ReCoater 2 XL

Specifications

PARAMETER

Curing time

Light source

Wavelength

Mold material

Mold mounting

Mold length

Recoating diameter (μm)

Linear proof test

Rotary tensile test (optional item)

Resolution

Hold time

Pulling speed

Pulling rate

Display units

PC connection

Power supply

Compressed air

Dimensions

Weight

VALUE

Programmable, 3 seconds typical

UV LED

380-385 nm

Silicone

Exchangeable

34 mm, 55 mm and 110 mm

165, 250, 300, 400, 550 & 900 μm

Programmable, 0-22 N

Programmable, 0-100 N

0 .01 N

Programmable

Programmable

0 .5-20 N/s lbs, kg, N, kpsi, GPa

Ethernet and USB flash drive connection

External 12 V DC, 60 W

Not needed

270 mm (W) x 170 mm (D) x 98 mm (H)

3 .9 kg

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

ReCoater 2 XL w/ Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter), Fiber Tensioners, Standard, Packet of 250 µm Molds (110 mm length),

Mold Guide Pins (Extended length), Manual and Tools

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Mold Options

Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 34 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 55 mm (10 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 55 mm (10 pieces)

AFL NO.

10100036

10100037

10100038

10100039

10100040

10100078

10100041

10100042

10100043

10100044

10100045

10100046

10100079

10100047

DESCRIPTION

Mold Options (continued)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 165 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 250 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 300 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 400 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 550 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)

Mold, Rec 2-series, 730 um, 110 mm (5 pieces)

Mold, ReC 2-series, 900 µm, 110 mm (5 pieces)

Custom molds are available upon request

Miscellaneous

Mold Guide Pins (Extended)

Fiber Tensioner, 900 µm (left and right)

Mandrels

Power Supply (incl . US, UK and EU Adapter)

AFL NO.

10100068

AFL NO.

10100048

10100049

10100050

10100051

10100052

10100080

10100053

10100071

10100061

10100056

90100409

48

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00071, Revision 1, 2.3.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Fully automatic

• High pulling force

• Easy to operate

• Compact size

• PC controlled

• Logging of test data

ProofTester

The ProofTester is a compact and lightweight instrument ideal for strength testing of optical fibers up to 30 N . The ProofTester is developed to meet all types of applications where a strength test has to be performed . The ProofTester is designed with the user in mind . The fibers are easily placed in the correct position by guided linear clamps, and with a “One Touch” go button, the testing starts automatically . The built-in microprocessor controls all the important parameters such as pulling force, pull speed and hold time . This allows for a completely controlled test every time . The ProofTester can be connected to an external PC, which enables access to all programmable parameters and settings . The ProofTester is adapted for stand alone use or to be integrated in different subsystems .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Fiber Buffers

Tensile Test

Resolution

Pulling Speed

Hold Time

Power Supply*

Compressed Air

Dimensions

Weight

* Not included in delivery

VALUE

160 - 900 µm

1 - 30 N

0 .1 N

20 - 100 mm/min

0 - 10 sec

External 12V DC

External Compressor*, 5-7 bar, 4 mm tube instant push-in fitting

210 mm (W) x 138 mm (D) x 110 mm (H)

2 .3 kg

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

ProofTester (Includes: PC software, RS-232 cable, manual and tools)

Power Supply (Purchased separately)

Power Adapter (Purchased separately)

AFL NO.

10100027

50100075

50100009

49

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00042, Revision 3, 11.21.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FAT-04

Fiber Arrangement Tool

The FAT-04 features an easy-to-use fiber arrangement method utilizing linear travel .

The FAT-04 includes a spare paste applicator to allow ribbon making to continue even if one of the paste applicators needs cleaning .

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

FAT-04 Fiber Arrangement Tool*

SP-1 Foam Pads for FAT-04

(One set = 5 sheets of 25 pads each)

Paste Applicator Blocks for FAT-04 (2 pieces)

AFL NO.

S010212

S009016

S010952

* FAT-04 includes 4 oz . FAA-03A ribbon forming adhesive, paste applicator blocks, cleaning swabs,

CL-02 clips and SP-1 foam pads

FAA-03A

Ribbon Forming Adhesive

A key advantage of our fiber arrangement tool is the use of the ribbon forming adhesive .

Ribbons formed with this adhesive have excellent stripability, especially compared to ribbonizing methods using tape . Unlike tape methods, the paste does not “gum-up” the stripping tool and cause broken fibers . The paste holds the stripped coating residue into a single piece of debris that is easily cleaned from the stripper . If needed, the ribbon can be easily separated into individual fibers using alcohol .

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

FAA-03A ribbon-forming adhesive (0 .5 liter bottle)

FAA-03A ribbon-forming adhesive (4 oz . dispensing bottle)

AFL NO.

S008622

S008720

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved . PP-4-00015, Revision 4, 5 .15 .15

Specifications are subject to change without notice .

Splice Protection Sleeves

AFL offers a wide selection of fiber protection sleeves to meet any application . The FP series is the industry standard for durable and lasting protection of single fiber splices in field installations, while the FP-04(T) and FP-05 provide the same durable protection for 8 and 12 fiber ribbon respectively .

The FPS01 and FPS04 series are specially designed for optical components, where small packaging is a priority . These micro sleeves provide the known reliability of Fujikura sleeves in the smallest possible lengths . This easy and cost effective method is a great alternative to recoating . The FPS01 and FPS04 series offer a wide range of options to accommodate various coating sizes, and are manufactured in a variety of lengths . This gives great flexibility in designing optical modules .

Standard Sleeves: Dimensions & Applicable Fiber

SLEEVES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 900 MICRONS

DESCRIPTION

FP-60

FP-40

FP-03(34)

SLEEVE LENGTH

60 mm

40 mm

34 mm

FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH

16 mm

10 mm

10 mm

SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK

3 .1 mm (max .)

3 .1 mm (max .)

3 .1 mm (max .)

PACKAGING AFL NO.

1000 Box/100 Pack S015915

1000 Box/100 Pack S015916

500 Box/10 Pack S000453

SLEEVES FOR TFOCA CABLE (DUAL 900 μm)

DESCRIPTION FIBER COUNT SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH

FP-D900 2 40 mm 10 mm

SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK

3 .6 mm (max .)

PACKAGING AFL NO.

1000 Box & 50 Pack S014413

SLEEVES FOR RIBBON FIBERS

DESCRIPTION FIBER COUNT SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH

FP-04(T) Up to 8 fibers 40 mm 10 mm

FP-05

FP-05-28

Up to 12 fibers

Up to 12 fibers

40 mm

28 mm

10 mm

10 mm

FPS04-30

FPS08-28

FPS24-40

Up to 4 fibers 30 mm

Up to 8 fibers 28 mm

Up to 24 fibers 40 mm

10 mm

10 mm

10 mm

SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK

4 .1 mm (max .)

4 .5 mm (max .)

4 .5 mm (max .)

2 .4 mm (max .)

3 .4 mm (max .)

8 mm (max .)

Specifications

PARAMETER

Outer tube

Inner tube

Strength member

Operation condition (after shrink)

Storage condition (before shrink)

DESCRIPTION

FP-60/40/03 series

FP-04(T) / FP-05

VALUE

Polyethylene

FP-60/40/03 series

FP-04(T) / FP-05

Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate (Polyolefin Copolymer)

Stainless steel

Quartz glass

-40 to 75°C, 0 to 95% RH (Non dew)

-40 to 60°C, Non dew

PACKAGING

250 Box/25 Pack

250 Box/5 Pack

250 Box/25 Pack

AFL NO.

S002105

S003027

S014720

1,000 Box/25 Pack S010848

500 Box/25 Pack

200 Box/5 Pack

S013560

S013004

FP-03 series

FPS01 series

FP-40 series

FP-60 series

FP-04(T)/05

FPS04-30

FPS08-28

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00051, Revision 5, 8.1.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

51

Splice Protection Sleeves

Micro Sleeves: Dimensions & Applicable Fiber

FPS01-400 SERIES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 400 MICRON FIBER

DESCRIPTION

FPS01-400-12

FPS01-400-15

FPS01-400-20

FPS01-400-25

FPS01-400-34

FPS01-400-40

SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK

12 mm

15 mm

20 mm

25 mm

34 mm

40 mm

4 mm

4 mm

8 mm

10 mm

15 mm

16 mm

1 .5 mm

1 .5 mm

1 .5 mm

1 .5 mm

1 .5 mm

1 .5 mm

PACKAGING

50 Pack

50 Pack

50 Pack

50 Pack

50 Pack

1,250 Box

AFL NO.

S014088

S012668

S012672

S012676

S012680

S011914

FPS01-900 SERIES FOR SINGLE FIBERS UP TO 900 MICRON FIBER

DESCRIPTION

FPS01-900-15

FPS01-900-20

FPS01-900-25

FPS01-900-34

FPS01-900-45

SLEEVE LENGTH FIBER CLEAVE LENGTH SLEEVE DIAMETER AFTER SHRINK

15 mm

20 mm

25 mm

34 mm

45 mm

4 mm

6 mm

6 mm

13 mm

16 mm

2 .3 mm

2 .3 mm

2 .3 mm

2 .3 mm

2 .3 mm

Specifications

PARAMETER

Outer tube

Inner tube

Strength member

Operation condition (after shrink)

Storage condition (before shrink)

PACKAGING

50 Pack

50 Pack

50 Pack

50 Pack

50 Pack

MODEL VALUE

FPS01 series / FPS04-30 Polyethylene

FPS01 series

FPS04-30 / FPS08-28

Ethylene-Vinyl Acetate (Polyolefin Copolymer)

Stainless steel

Quartz glass

-40 to 75°C, 0 to 95% RH (Non dew)

-40 to 60°C, Non dew

AFL NO.

S012684

S012688

S011954

S012692

S012696

Type Variations

52

FULL SCALE

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00051, Revision 5, 8.1.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Cotton Swabs

Thorough cleaning of a fusion splicer’s optical elements and alignment V-grooves is critical to ensure successful trouble-free splicing operations . CS-1 Cotton Swabs are especially useful for such cleaning operations . The small size of the CS-1 swabs ensures accessibility in tight places and will not leach out chemicals or lint and contaminate optical elements .

DESCRIPTION

CS-1 Cotton Swabs (pack of 25 each)

PART #

S003719

Features

• Precision ceramic V-groove alignment

• Built-in magnifier and lamp to inspect fiber placement in V-grooves

Temporary Joining Tools

The TJ-03 and TJ-24 provide a temporary fiber splice for fiber and cable connections to test equipment such as OTDRs . The TJ-03 uses a precision ceramic V-groove to align up to 12 fibers simultaneously and the TJ-24 aligns up to 24 fibers . The fibers are prepared for joining by using standard mass fusion fiber preparation tools (fiber holders, hot jacket stripper, and cleaver .) Using the TJ-03 or TJ-24 in conjunction with an OTDR equipped with an optical switch provides rapid one button optical tests of 12 or 24 fibers .

DESCRIPTION

TJ-03 Temporary Splice Kit:

Fiber Holders (1 pair) FH-50-12, CT-30 Cleaver, HJS-02 Hot Jacket

Stripper, ADC-09 AC Adapter for HJS-02, and the ACC-09 Power Cord

TJ-03 Temporary Splice (without fiber preparation tools)

TJ-24 Temporary Splice Kit:

Fiber Holders (1 pair) FH-24, CT-20 Cleaver, HJS-03 Hot Jacket Stripper,

ADC-09 AC Adapter for HJS-03, Power Assist Lever for HJS-03, and the

ACC-09 Power Cord

TJ-24 Temporary Splice (without fiber preparation tools)

PART #

S012772

S010456

S013080

S011666

53

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-4-00005, Revision 2, 1.17.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR

Test, Troubleshoot and Document Single-mode and Multimode Fiber Networks

Features

• 30 dB dynamic range single-mode

• 16-hour battery life

• Remote display capable

• Touch and Test

®

intuitive user interface

• New faster processor

• Crisp bright display for indoor/outdoor viewing

• Integrated OPM standard; integrated VFL standard

• Inspection capable with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

• Rugged, hand-held, lightweight (<1 kg)

• Prepaid Calibration plans, Cal and Cal Plus

Test Modes

Full Auto OTDR – Normal (point-to-point) fiber cable construction testing and fault location

Expert OTDR – Full function OTDR for experienced users includes

Auto and Auto-Once setup

Real-Time OTDR – Fault location, splice verification

Optical Power Meter – Measure optical power or fiber loss

Visual Fault Locator – Red laser for fiber bend and break location

Languages supported

English

French

German

• Italian

• Polish

• Spanish

• Portuguese

• Turkish

• Chinese (Simplified, Traditional)

M210 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

AFL’s M210 is the only inspection ready QUAD OTDR that combines OTDR, OPM and VFL capability with a proven, easy-to-use and easy-to-learn user interface. The M210 is the latest addition to the M200 family of OTDRs. Like other members of the M200 family, the

M210 offers the intuitive Touch and Test user interface in a rugged, lightweight, easy-to-hold package ready for field use. The M210 features a more powerful processing engine, a higher resolution display and, for the first time in an OTDR of its size, an integrated

Optical Power Meter.

Touch and Test simplifies the M210 user experience, minimizes human errors and reduces training time by providing one-touch access to the Full-Auto, Expert and Real-Time OTDR test modes, OPM measurement mode as well as the Results Management and Job

Creation menus. The M210 allows setting Pass/Fail thresholds to industry standard TIA/ISO or user-values and will automatically alert users of failing fibers. Touch and Test enables both experts and novices alike to complete jobs more accurately and in less time.

54

© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

M210 QUAD Certification Kit (Tier 1 and Tier 2)

M210 QUAD Test and Inspection Kit (Tier 2)

M210 OTDR in Hard Transit Case

M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR

M210 OTDR Soft and Hard Case Options

The M210 micro OTDR is available as a single-mode, multimode or single-mode/ multimode model in either a soft or hard case and as part of a QUAD Certification kit or QUAD Test and Inspection kit. M210 OTDRs are ideal for testing, analyzing and troubleshooting enterprise, LAN/WAN, campus and military single-mode and multimode

(62.5 and 50 micron) fiber networks.

All M210 models support IEC 61300-3-35 fiber end-face visual inspection practices using a DFS1 Digital FiberScope. OTDR traces (.sor format), OPM measurement results and fiber end-face images can be saved together in a job. These results can be downloaded to a computer for analyzing and editing using the included companion, Test Results Manager,

TRM

®

2.0 Basic application software.

M210 QUAD Certification Kit in Hard Transit Case

This kit is designed for integrated single-mode and multimode Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing with fiber end-face image capture. The M210 stores OTDR traces, loss readings and end-face images in a logical Job Structure for each fiber. Review results on the M210 and transfer to a PC for analysis and acceptance report documentation using included companion TRM ® (Test Results Manager) software. In TRM, apply standards and applications to loss readings to assure fibers meet the increasing bandwidth needs of fiber networks such as 10 GbE. This kit includes the QUAD M210, OLS4 LED/Laser

Source, DFS1 FiberScope and cleaning accessories in a compact hard transit case.

The hard transit case is a rugged, injection molded ABS case with a full length hinge, padlock loops, secure latches and O-ring seal to protect the contents from dust and water. The case is large enough to hold test, inspection and cleaning accessories and small enough to carry on an airplane. See accessories page.

M210 QUAD Test and Inspection Kit in Hard Transit Case

This kit is designed for performing Tier 2 OTDR testing and troubleshooting and end-face inspection. This kit includes the QUAD M210, DFS1 FiberScope and cleaning accessories in a compact rugged hard transit case. See accessories page.

M210 OTDR in Hard Transit Case

Available in SM, MM or QUAD OTDR models. The hard transit case is large enough for optional test, inspection and cleaning accessories. See accessories page.

M210 OTDR in Soft Case

Available in SM, MM or QUAD OTDR models. The soft case has a shoulder strap and a large pocket to simplify carrying equipment in the field. The pocket is large enough to accommodate cleaning and test accessories. See accessories page

M210 OTDR in Soft Case

© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

55

M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR

Test Results Manager Software

Using TRM

®

(Test Results Manager), the companion PC software included with all M210 OTDRs, users can create acceptance reports conforming to industry guidelines. TRM allows users to create customized cover pages with their company logos and generate results pages showing dual wavelength traces and event tables, end-face image, Event Map and loss data for each fiber.

Test, Inspection and Cleaning Accessories

DFS1 FiberScope Inspection Kit FCP2-00-0900 Basic Cleaning Kit

TRM

®

(Test Results Manager) Certification report page

SC, ST, FC LC/MU D-LC Ultra 2.5

Mini-100 SC, ST, FC, LC/MU

One-Click Cleaner Series

Accessories Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC inspection kit

DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC inspection kit

DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit without adapters

Fiber Ring, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m

Fiber Ring, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m

Fiber Ring, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m

Fiber Ring, single-mode, 150 m

AFL NO.

DFS1-00-04XU

DFS1-00-04XA

DFS1-00-04XN

FR1-M5-150-x1-x2

FR1-L5-150-x1-x2

FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 a

Wet Cleaning kit for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors

Dry Cleaning kit

Basic Cleaning kit with carry case (includes One-Clicks,

FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB)

Basic Cleaning kit with MPO Cleaners and carry case

(includes One-Clicks, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes,

Cletop SB, MPO/MTP Cleaner)

One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans)

FR1-SM-150-y1-y2 a

8500-20-0900

8500-20-0901

FCP2-00-0900

FCP2-00-0901

One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans)

One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans)

One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans)

8500-05-0001MZ

8500-05-0002MZ

8500-05-0005MZ

8500-05-0006MZ

One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ

One-Click Ultra Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC, 500 cleans x 2) 8500-05-0008MZ a a

Note: a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1, y2).

56

© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR

Specifications a

OTDR

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Center Wavelengths

Wavelength Tolerance

Dynamic Range (SNR = 1)

Event Dead Zone

Linearity g

Loss Threshold

Loss Resolution

Units

OTDR Modes

Trace File Format c

Attenuation Dead Zone

Pulse Widths

Range Settings

Reflectance Resolution

Reflectance Accuracy h

Real Time Refresh Rate d

Trace File Storage Medium

Trace File Storage Capacity

Trace File Transfer to PC b

Sampling Points

Minimum Data Point Spacing e

Distance Uncertainty/Accuracy f

MULTIMODE

Laser

SINGLE-MODE

Laser

Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11; IEC 60825-1:2007-03 Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11; IEC 60825-1:2007-03

850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm

±20/±30 nm

26 dB

±20/±30 nm

30 dB

1.5 m

9 m

10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1 µs, 3 µs m

250 m to 32 km

Up to 16,000

0.25 m

Group Index of Refraction (GIR) 1.4000 to 1.6000

±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)

±0.05 dB/dB

0.02 dB

0.01 dB

0.01 dB

±2 dB

1 Hz j

1.5 m

9 m

10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1, 3, 10 µs

250 m to 208 km

Up to 16,000

0.25 m

1.4000 to 1.6000

±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)

±0.05 dB/dB

0.02 dB

0.01 dB

0.01 dB

±2 dB

1 Hz k m, km, ft, kft, mi

Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time

Bellcore GR-196 Version 1.1

Internal and USB

>1000 internal, 1000s on USB

USB

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified.

b. Longest Range and Pulse Width, 3 minutes Averaging Time, Filter on.

c. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -40 dB (multimode) or -45 dB (single-mode) event using 10 ns pulse width. d. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter.

e. Range <8 km.

f. Does not include GIR uncertainty.

g. Typical.

h. For a non-saturated event.

j. 16 km Range, Filter off.

k. 32 km Range, Filter off.

m. 3 µs @ 1300 nm

© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR

Specifications a

OPM (STANDARD)

Calibrated Wavelengths

Detector Type

Display Range b

Accuracy @ -10 dBm

Resolution

Measurement Units

Wavelength ID c

Set Reference

Data Storage

Tone Detection d

VFL (STANDARD)

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Wavelength

Output Power (nominal)

GENERAL

Display Type

Size (in boot)

Weight

Power

850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625, 1650 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously)

InGaAs 2mm

+6 to -70 dBm

±0.25 dB

0.01 dB dB, dBm, mW

Yes

Yes

Yes

270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz

Laser

Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11; IEC 825-1:1993, 60825-1:2007-03

635 nm ±20 nm

0.8 mW

Battery Life e

Recharge Time f

Auto Shut Off

Connectivity

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Relative Humidity

DFS1 DIGITAL FIBERSCOPE SUPPORT

Field of View

Optical Resolution

Detection Capability

3.5-inch transflective color, high contrast, high reflectivity (20%) for optimum indoor/outdoor viewing , QVGA with touchscreen

23 x 11 x 7 cm (8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in)

<1.4 kg (3 lb)

Removable Li-ion or AC/DC power adapter (input 100-240 V, ~1.5 A 47-63 Hz) output 18 V DC/3.6 A (can test while charging, can operate on AC with battery removed)

16 hours

4 hours

0-60 minutes

USB host/full speed 1.1

-10°C to +50°C

-20°C to +60°C

0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing)

400 x 300 µm

4 µm

2 µm

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified.

b. Measurement Range:

+3 to -65 dBm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -60 dBm for 850 nm c. Wavelength ID Range:

+3 to -50 dBm for 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dBm for 850 nm d. Tone Detect Range:

+3 to -50 dBm 1300 to 1625 nm, and +3 to -40 dBm for 850 nm e. Typical with new battery, per GR-196-Core Issue 2.

f. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating.

58

© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

M210 Multifunction Micro OTDR

M210 Models and Included Adapters

WAVELENGTHS (nm)

850 1300 1310 1550

DYNAMIC

RANGE (dB)

OTDR PORT

ADAPTERS

OPM PORT

ADAPTERS

30/30

26/26

SC, FC

SC, ST

SC, 2.5 mm Universal

SC, 2.5 mm Universal

26/26/30/30 SC, FC, ST SC, 2.5 mm Universal

AFL BASE

MODEL NO.

M210-20

M210-22

M210-25

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

M210 QUAD Certification Kit (Tier 1 and 2): M210 QUAD, OLS4, DFS1* in hard case

M210 QUAD Test and Inspection Kit (Tier 2): M210 QUAD, DFS1* in hard case

AFL NO.

M210-25K-01-HC2

M210-25K-01-HC1

* When ordering, specify DFS1 model. The DFS1 FiberScope kit is available as either PC/UPC inspection kit

(DFS1-00-04XU model) or APC inspection kit (DFS1-004XA model).

M210 OTDR, SM (1310/1550), OPM, VFL in hard case

M210 OTDR, MM (850/1300) OPM, VFL in hard case

M210 OTDR, QUAD (850/1300/1310/1550), OPM, VFL in hard case

M210 OTDR, SM (1310/1550) OPM, VFL in soft case

M210 OTDR, MM (850/1300) OPM, VFL in soft case

M210 OTDR, QUAD (850/1300/1310/1550), OPM, VFL in soft case

M210-20U-01-HC

M210-22U-01-HC

M210-25U-01-HC

M210-20U-01

M210-22U-01

M210-25U-01

All M210 OTDRs include a USB flash drive, an AC adapter, UCI switchable adapters for OTDR and OPM ports, trace analysis and documentation software and a quick reference guide.

When ordering, select options as follows:

Optical Configuration (NN), (U) for UPC connection and Language (LL). Add (HC) only if ordering the hard case option.

Example: M210-25U-01-HC -> This model number indicates M210 QUAD with the English/European language pack in the optional hard case.

M210

NN

Optical Configuration (NN)

20 = 1310/1550 nm SM

22 = 850/1300 nm MM

25 = 850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM

OTDR port ferrule (U = UPC)

U LLL

HC

Hard Case option (HC)

(Select (HC) only if ordering hard case option)

Quick Reference Guide Language (LLL)*

ENG = English

CHS = Chinese, Simplified

CHT = Chinese, Traditional

DEU = German

FRA = French

ITA = Italian

POL = Polish

*Specify Language for OTDR Quick Reference Guide

POR = Portuguese

SPA = Spanish

TUR = Turkish

Calibration Plans

M210 OTDR AND/OR KIT

MODEL

M210-25K-01-HC1

M210-25K-01-HC2

M210-20U-01-HC

M210-22U-01-HC

M210-25U-01-HC

M210-20U-01

M210-22U-01

M210-25U-01

2 YR CAL PLAN

AFL NO.

CAL2-00-M210-25K-HC1

CAL2-00-M210-25K-HC2

CAL2-00-M210-20

CAL2-00-M210-22

CAL2-00-M210-25

CAL2-00-M210-20

CAL2-00-M210-22

CAL2-00-M210-25

2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN

AFL NO.

CAL2-01-M210-25K-HC1

CAL2-01-M210-25K-HC2

CAL2-01-M210-20

CAL2-01-M210-22

CAL2-01-M210-25

CAL2-01-M210-20

CAL2-01-M210-22

CAL2-01-M210-25

Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at a discounted price, a convenient calibration expiration email service, express calibration services and access to our product knowledge base.

Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty (three years total coverage).

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2012-2013, AFL, all rights reserved. M210-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2013-05-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR

Hand-held Multifunction OTDR and Loss Test Set

Features

• Patented in- or out-of-service OTDR testing from a single port

• Icon-based LinkMap

display with pass/fail for easy network analysis

• ServiceSafe

®

live PON detection and OTDR test without service disruption

• Wave ID reduces insertion loss test time and eliminates setup errors

• 34/32 dB dynamic range at 1310/1550 nm

• Best-in-class 0.8/3.5 m event/attenuation dead zones

• Rugged, hand-held, lightweight (<1 kg)

• High-contrast, backlit display: Easily viewed, even in direct sunlight

• Industry-leading battery life: >12 hours continuous operation

• Instant On: Ready to test in <5 seconds

Applications

• Cost-effective point-to-point and FTTH PON testing

• Troubleshoot in-service FTTH networks, including live PON power measurements plus

PON OTDR testing at 1625 nm.

• Complete multi-wavelength insertion loss tests faster and eliminate setup errors using

Wave ID source and power meter.

• Generate fiber-identifying tones and stable CW signals using integrated optical source.

• Trace fibers or locate faults using the Visual Fault Locator (VFL).

The AFL OFL280-10x FlexTester family offers an unmatched combination of optical fiber test functions, ease-of-use, portability, and value. All OFL280 FlexTester models include an integrated single-mode 1310/1550 nm OTDR with PON-optimized and standard test modes, optical power meter, 1310/1550 nm laser source, and visual fault locator.

With new LinkMap, pass/fail analysis, macro-bend and splitter detection, launch quality check, plus AFL’s unique ServiceSafe and

Wave ID features, OFL280 FlexTesters enable even novice users to troubleshoot like pros.

The OFL280 FlexTester family offers four models to best suit your application needs:

OFL280-103: Verify both in-service and out-of-service FTTx networks from a single port. Includes 1310/1550/1625 nm live PON OTDR with integrated PON Power Meter.

OFL280-102: Most complete out-of-service FTTx PON testing at all PON wavelengths (1310/1490/1550 nm).

OFL280-100: Cost-effective 1310/1550 nm OTDR for out-of-service installation testing or troubleshooting both FTTx PON and pointto-point fiber optic networks.

Over 1000 OTDR test results (Telcordia SR-4731 .SOR file format) may be saved in the OFL280’s internal memory. Stored OTDR and

OPM results may be transferred to PC via wireless Bluetooth

®

or USB cable. Windows

®

compatible TRM 2.0

®

Test Results Manager software is included for OTDR and OPM results viewing, analysis, and professional report generation.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

60

OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR

New LinkMap

Simplifies Network Troubleshooting

Using the OFL280’s new LinkMap capability, even novice users can troubleshoot optical networks like a pro! LinkMap interprets the tested network and presents an icon-based view of network elements clearly identifying fiber start, end, connectors, splices, splitters, and macro-bends. Loss and reflectance of network elements is compared to usersettable pass/fail thresholds and displayed with clear pass/fail indications. Users can instantly toggle between LinkMap and Trace view at the press of a button.

With launch quality check, integrated macro-bend and splitter event detection, OFL280

OTDRs offer even greater ease-of-use. OFL280s also provide a Link Summary showing end-to-end link length, loss, loss/distance and ORL.

ServiceSafe

®

Testing on Live PONs

In FTTx PONs, troubleshooting a faulty fiber connection from one out-of-service subscriber’s location using a 1310/1550 nm OTDR could disrupt service to active subscribers. AFL’s ServiceSafe feature alerts the OTDR user to the presence of live traffic and prevents the initiation of service-disrupting 1310/1550 nm OTDR tests. The

OFL280-103 additionally measures downstream power levels at 1490 and/or 1550 nm, and allows the user to initiate an OTDR test using the non-disruptive 1625 nm OTDR wavelength. To eliminate unnecessary connector wear, 1625 nm live PON OTDR testing and PON power measurements are performed through the same optical port used for

1310/1550 OTDR testing (US patent 8,411,259).

Fast, error-free Loss Tests using Wave ID

OFL280s integrate an Optical Laser Source (OLS) and Optical Power Meter (OPM) supporting AFL’s unique Wave ID capability. With Wave ID, the OPM automatically synchronizes to a single or multi-wavelength Wave ID optical signal sent by another

OFL280, FLX380, or AFL hand-held OLS. The OPM automatically measures power and loss at each wavelength, saving significant test time and eliminating setup errors.

The integrated OLS and OPM also generate and detect fiber-identifying tones to enable positive fiber identification before disconnecting fibers during maintenance.

Create Professional Test Reports using TRM

®

2.0

Stored OTDR and/or OPM results may be uploaded to a PC via USB or Bluetooth

®

.

Uploaded results may be viewed and analyzed using TRM 2.0 Test Results Manager software included with each OFL280 FlexTester. The TRM report generation wizard enables users to easily generate professional, custom acceptance test reports conforming to industry guidelines.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

61

OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR

OFL280 Features and Applications by Model

FEATURES

Compatible with all AFL optical power meters and laser sources, including tone and Wave ID features

Compatible with AFL optical fiber identifiers (OFI)

Integrated high-power optical power meter

Integrated visual fault locator (red laser)

1310 nm – OTDR, PON OTDR, laser source (CW, wave ID, tone)

1550 nm – OTDR, PON OTDR, laser source (CW, wave ID, tone)

1490 nm – OTDR, PON OTDR, laser source (CW, wave ID, tone)

1625 nm – FTTx live fiber OTDR with filtered detector for in-service PON testing

1490/1550 nm – FTTx PON Power Meter (Detects and measures downstream PON power levels)

-100

OFL280 MODELS

-102 -103

FIBER TESTING APPLICATIONS

Point-to-point cable construction and troubleshooting.

Verify end-to-end length, loss, and ORL. Verify splice and connector loss and reflectance. Locate sources of excess loss and/or reflections, including macro-bends.

FTTx PON construction.

Test to or through splitters. Verify end-to-end length, loss and ORL. Verify splitter, splice and connector loss and reflectance. Locate sources of excess loss and/or reflections, including macro-bends.

FTTx customer fiber troubleshooting - dark fibers (hard faults).

Locate cable cuts, open splices, and bad connections.

FTTx in-service (Live PON) troubleshooting.

Automatically detect live PONs. Prevent service-disrupting 1310/1550 nm OTDR tests on live PONs. Locate macrobends, poor splices or high-loss connections without disrupting service to active PON subscribers.

FTTx service turn-up (commissioning).

Verify PON power levels at the ONT (subscriber) location. Locate faults in the distribution or drop cables, or between splitters in PONs built using distributed splitter architecture, all without disrupting service to active PON subscribers.

-100

OFL280 MODELS

-102 -103 a

Note:

a. Adds ability to perform OTDR and loss tests at 1490 nm. However, testing at 1310 and 1550 nm is recommended and generally is all that is needed to test or fault-locate inactive (dark) FTTx PONs during construction.

OFL280-100 and -102 models OFL280-103 model

Visual Fault Locator

Visual Fault Locator

Optical Power Meter

Dark Fiber OTDR

Laser Source

Optical Power Meter

Dark Fiber OTDR

Laser Source

Live Fiber OTDR

PON Power Meter

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

62

OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR

OFL280 FlexTester Kit Configurations

OFL280 FlexTesters are available in the following kit configurations:

• OFL280 FlexTester Soft Carry Case Kits

• OFL280 FlexTester PRO/PRO2 Kits

• OFL280 FlexTester Complete/Complete2 Kits

All FlexTester kits include a rechargeable, replaceable Li-Ion battery pack, AC charger with country-specific power cord, tool-free interchangeable connector adapters with dust caps, TRM

®

2.0 Test Results Manager software, USB cable, and a quick reference guide.

OFL280 FlexTester PRO Test kit

FlexTester PRO2 & Complete2 include FOCIS Flex Inspection

OFL280 FlexTester PRO/PRO2 Test and Inspection Kit

FlexTester PRO & PRO2 Kits combine a user-selected OFL280 with either the FOCIS PRO or FOCIS Flex Fiber Optic Connector Inspection System, UPC or APC connector inspection adapter tips, cleaning supplies, and a rugged, waterproof hard carry case with room for additional fiber rings and cleaning supplies. FOCIS PRO and FOCIS Flex enable inspection of ferrule ends of patch cord connectors and end-faces of connectors mounted inside bulkhead adapters. PRO/PRO2 Kits include LinkMap

plus TRM 2.0 Advanced.

PRO Kits include FOCIS PRO comprising the DFS1 Digital FiberScope and hand-held

DFD1 Touchscreen Tablet. FOCIS PRO includes image capture, save, AFL’s unique imagepairing capability, plus IEC and user-adjustable pass/fail analysis. With FOCIS PRO’s dedicated Touchscreen Tablet, the OFL280 is available for OTDR and optical loss testing.

PRO2 Kits include a 150 m fiber ring plus FOCIS Flex, a hand-held and auto-focusing inspection probe with integrated display, rechargeable battery, internal storage and pass/fail analysis. Its Bluetooth communications enable FOCIS Flex to instantly transfer captured images and pass/fail results to a paired FlexTester for display and/or storage.

OFL280 FlexTester Soft Case Kit

OFL280 Complete/Complete2 Installation & Maintenance Kit

Select a FlexTester Complete or Complete2 Kit to add an Optical Fiber Identifier for an even more complete network installation and maintenance test solution. FlexTester

CMP/CMP2 Kits include LinkMap with Pass/Fail plus TRM 2.0 Advanced.

Complete Kits combine an OFI-200D Optical Fiber Identifier with a user-selected

OFL280, 150 m single-mode fiber ring (launch cable), FOCIS PRO with UPC or APC adapter tips, two One-Click Cleaners, standard FlexTester accessories, hard carry case.

Complete2 Kits combine a user-selected OFL280 and choice of Optical Fiber Identifier with 150 m fiber ring, FOCIS Flex, UPC or APC adapter tips, cleaning supplies, standard

FlexTester accessories, and rugged, waterproof, hard carry case.

OFL280 FlexTester Soft Carry Case Kit

OFL280 FlexTester Soft Carry Case kits include the user-selected OFL280, standard accessories plus a One-Click Cleaner, packaged in a convenient soft carry case.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

63

OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR

Specifications a

OTDR

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Fiber Type

Available Wavelengths

Wavelength Tolerance

Dynamic Range (SNR=1)

Laser

Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

Single-mode

1310/1490/1550/1625 nm

±20/±20/±20/±10 nm

34/32/32/30 dB

Event Dead Zone

b

Attenuation Dead Zone

Pulse Widths

Range Settings

c

0.8 m

3.5 m

5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns, 1, 3, 10 µs

250 m to 240 km

Data Points

Data Point Spacing

Up to 30,000

5.0 cm (range <1.5 km),

Range/30,000 (range >1.5 km)

Group Index of Refraction (GIR) 1.4000 to 1.7000

Distance Uncertainty (m)

Linearity

Trace File Format

Trace File Storage Medium

Data Transfer to PC

PON OTDR Modes

Standard OTDR Modes

LASER SOURCE

±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)

±0.05 dB/dB

.SOR per Telcordia SR-4731 Issue 2

4GB internal memory (>1000 traces)

USB cable

Test to splitter or through splitter

Full Auto, Expert, Real Time

Emitter Type

Fiber Type

Available Wavelengths

Wavelength Tolerance

Spectral Width (FWHM)

Internal Modulation

Wavelength ID (one, two, or three wavelengths)

Output Power Stability

Output Power

Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

Single-mode

1310, 1490, 1550 nm

±20 nm

5 nm (maximum)

270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz, CW

Compatible with AFL Optical Power Meters and

Light Sources

0.25 dB

-1 dBm (1310, 1550 nm) ±1.5 dB;

+3 dBm (1490 nm ) ±1.5 dB

PON POWER METER FOR SINGLE-MODE ONLY

Calibrated Wavelengths

Detector Type

Isolation

Measurement Range

Accuracy

d

Resolution

Measurement Units

OPTICAL POWER METER

1490, 1550 nm

Filtered InGaAs

> 40 dB

+23 to – 50 dBm

±0.5 dB

0.01 dB dBm or Watts (nW, µW, mW)

Calibrated Wavelengths

Detector Type

Measurement Range

Tone Detect Range

Wavelength ID Range

Accuracy

e

Resolution

Measurement Units

VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR

1310, 1490, 1550, 1625, 1650 nm

InGaAs

+23 to -50 dBm

+3 to -35 dBm

+3 to -35 dBm

±0.25 dB

0.01 dB dB, dBm or Watts (nW, µW, mW)

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Wavelength

Output Power (nominal)

Modes

GENERAL

Size (in boot)

Weight

Operational Temperature

Storage Temperature

Power

Battery Life

Display

Visible red laser

Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

650 ±20 nm

0.8 mW into single-mode fiber

CW, 2 Hz flashing

20.1 x 13.0 x 5.3. cm (7.9 x 5.1 x 2.1 in)

0.8 kg (1.8 lb)

-10 °C to +50 °C, 0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing)

-20 °C to +60 °C, 0 to 95 % RH (non-condensing)

Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC adapter

12 hours, backlight ON, continuous operation

LCD, 320 x 240, 3.5 inch (89 mm), color, high-contrast transflective with backlight and AR coating

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 25 °C unless otherwise specified.

b. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -45 dB event using 5 ns pulse width. c. Typical distance from the location of a -45 dB reflective event to the point where the trace falls and stays within 0.5 dB of backscatter, using a 5 ns pulse width. d. At calibration wavelengths and power levels of approximately -5 dBm for 1550 nm and -10 dBm for 1490 nm.

e. At 1310/1550 nm wavelengths with CW power level of approximately -10 dBm.

64

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

OFL280-10x FlexTester OTDR

Ordering Information

ORDER ENTRY FORMAT INCLUDING OPTIONS

OFL280-1xx[C]-[LNG]-[AC]

OFL280-1xx[C]-LM-[LNG]-[AC]

OFL280-1XX-LM-[LNG]

OFL280-1xx[C]-PRO-[LNG]-[AC]

OFL280-1xx[C]-PRO2-[LNG]-[AC]-[TIP]-[FR]

OFL280-1xx[C]-CMP-[LNG]-[AC]-[FR]

OFL280-1xx[C]-CMP2-[LNG]-[AC]-[TIP]-[FR]-[OFI]

KIT CONFIGURATION

OFL280-1xx Basic Kit

OFL280-1xx Basic Kit with LinkMap

Upgrade with Pass/Fail plus TRM

®

2.0 Advanced

LinkMap Upgrade with Pass/Fail plus TRM 2.0 Advanced (for previously shipped OFL280)

OFL280-1xx PRO Kit (with FOCIS PRO and cleaning supplies)

OFL280-1xx PRO2 Kit (with FOCIS Flex, fiber ring, cleaning supplies)

OFL280-1xx Complete Kit (with FOCIS PRO, OFI-200D, fiber ring, cleaning supplies)

OFL280-1xx Complete2 Kit (with FOCIS Flex, OFI choice, fiber ring, cleaning supplies)

Select OFL280 Options:

[C]

U

A

OTDR/Source Connector Type

UPC

APC

[LNG] Language Option

ENG

English

CHS

Simplified Chinese

CHT

DEU

FRA

ITA

Traditional Chinese

German

French

Italian

[LNG] Language Option

JPN

KOR

POL

Japanese

Korean

Polish

POR

SPA

Portuguese

Spanish

TUR Turkish

Select OFL280 PRO, PRO2, CMP, CMP2 Kit Options:

[FR]

Blank

SC/SC

SC/FC

150 m SMF Fiber Ring

N/A in PRO & CMP kits

FR1-SM-150-SC-SC

FR1-SM-150-SC-FC

SC/LC

SC/ST

FR1-SM-150-SC-LC

FR1-SM-150-SC-ST

SC/ASC

FR1-SM-150-SC-ASC

SC/AFC

FR1-SM-150-SC-AFC

SC/ALC

FR1-SM-150-SC-ALC

LC/LC

FR1-SM-150-LC-LC

LC/ASC

FR1-SM-150-LC-ASC

LC/ALC

FR1-SM-150-LC-ALC

[FR] 150 m SMF Fiber Ring

ASC/FC

FR1-SM-150-ASC-FC

ASC/ST

FR1-SM-150-ASC-ST

ASC/ASC FR1-SM-150-ASC-ASC

ASC/AFC FR1-SM-150-ASC-AFC

ASC/ALC FR1-SM-150-ASC-ALC

ALC/ALC FR1-SM-150-ALC-ALC

FC/FC

FR1-SM-150-FC-FC

FC/ST

FC/LC

FR1-SM-150-SC-ST

FR1-SM-150-FC-LC

FC/AFC

FR1-SM-150-FC-AFC

AFC/AFC FR1-SM-150-AFC-AFC

IT

IL

DK

JP

CH

[AC]

US

EU

UK

CN

Destination

Country

FlexTester

AC Plugs

FOCIS PRO FOCIS Flex

USA 3-wire, 115V, Type K US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, US

European Union 3-wire, 250V, Type B US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU

United Kingdom 3-wire, 250V, Type D US, EU, UK, SAA 3-pin, UK

China, Australia 3-wire, 250V, Type C US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, SAA

IN

Denmark

Japan

Switzerland

Italy

Israel

India

3-wire, 250V, Type E US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU

3-wire, 125V, Type M US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, US

3-wire, 250V, Type L US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU

3-wire, 250V, Type I US, EU, UK, SAA 2-pin, EU

3-wire, 250V, Type H US, EU, UK, SAA Select (US,

EU, UK, SAA)

3-wire, 250V, Type G US, EU, UK, SAA Select (US,

EU, UK, SAA)

[TIP] FOCIS Flex Tips & Cleaning (PRO2 and CMP2 kits only)

Blank

Option not available in standard soft case, PRO and CMP kits

SC

FC

LC

SC-UPC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm UPC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning

FC-UPC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm UPC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning

LC-UPC bulkhead tip, 1.25 mm UPC ferrule tip, 1.25 mm cleaning

ASC

AFC

ALC

SC-APC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm APC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning

FC-APC bulkhead tip, 2.5 mm APC ferrule tip, 2.5 mm cleaning

LC-APC bulkhead tip, 1.25 mm APC ferrule tip, 1.25 mm cleaning

[OFI] Optical Fiber Identifier Option Description (CMP2 kit only)

Blank Option only available in CMP2 kit

200D

OFI-200D - Jacketed & buffered fiber; 2 kHz only

400

OFI-400 - Jacketed & buffered fiber; power & tone display

400C

OFI-400C - Jacketed fiber only OFI-400

400HP OFI-400HP - High-power OFI-400

FTTx

OFI-FTTx - Active ONT Detector (FTTx PON systems)

NO

YES F

IBER SYSTEM

S

I S O

9 0 0 1

CERTIFIED

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OFL2-28-2000 Revision 1U, 2014-12-17

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

65

M710 Multifunction OTDR

Test, Troubleshoot and Report Single-mode and Multimode Fiber Networks

M710 Compact QUAD OTDR

Features

• TruEvent

advanced event analysis

• Inspection capable with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

• Live fiber detection prevents damage to network equipment

• Up to 13 hours battery life

• Dynamic range up to 44 dB for long range testing

• Automatic Pass/Fail analysis

• Large 6.5 inch full color touchscreen display

• Integrated Optical Power Meter (OPM) and

Visual Fault Locator (VFL)

• Front Panel and First Connector Check features ensures accurate measurements

Applications

• Test and certify campus & central office networks and

Distributed Antenna Systems (DAS) fiber infrastructure

• Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing and certification of SM and MM networks

• Document and create standards compliant acceptance reports with TRM

®

2.0, companion PC software

• Inspection of fiber end-faces using DFS1 Digital FiberScope

• Real-Time OTDR - fault location and splice verification

M710 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

The M710 OTDR from AFL combines ease of use (Touch and Test

) and high performance in a rugged, large display package. With singlemode dynamic ranges up to 44 dB and a MM/SM QUAD option, the M710 OTDR is ideal for testing and troubleshooting

LAN/WAN, metro and long haul networks. Industry leading dead zones enhance the user’s ability to locate and measure events.

The M710 models utilize AFL’s industry leading TruEvent technology to provide a new level of accuracy and reliability in event analysis.

Touch and Test simplifies the M710 user experience, minimizes human errors and reduces training time by providing one-touch access to all OTDR test modes, OPM testing, Results Management and Job Creation menus. The M710 allows setting Pass/Fail thresholds to industry standard TIA/ISO values or user defined criteria and will automatically alert users of failing fibers. Touch and Test enables any technician to complete jobs more accurately and in less time, making it the ideal field test tool.

*M710 series languages supported: English, Chinese, French, German, Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish. Please specify language when ordering.

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. M710-00-2000 Revision 1A, 2015-01-23

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

66

M710 Multifunction OTDR

Specifications a

OTDR MODEL

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Center Wavelengths

Wavelength Tolerance

Dynamic Range (SNR = 1)

b

Event Dead Zone

Attenuation Dead Zone

Pulse Widths

Range Settings

Sampling Points

Minimum Data Point Spacing

Group Index of Refraction (GIR)

Distance Uncertainty (m)

Linearity

g

Loss Threshold

Loss Resolution

Reflectance Accuracy

Trace File Format

h

Trace File Storage Media

f

M710-40

1310/1550 nm

±25/25 nm

44/42 dB

0.8 m

4 m e

d

±0.03 dB/dB

SINGLE-MODE OTDR OPTIONS

M710-20

Laser

Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

1310/1550 nm

±25/25 nm

41/39 dB

0.8 m

4 m

e d

M710-21

1310/1550/1625 nm

±25/25/10 nm

41/39/39 dB

0.8 m

4 m

e d

QUAD OTDR OPTION

M710-24

850/1300/1310/1550 nm

±25/25/25/25 nm

25/24/40/38 dB

0.8 m

d

4 m

e c

5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns;

1, 3, 10, 20 µs

MM 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns;

1 µs

SM 5, 10, 30, 100, 300 ns;

1, 3, 10, 20 µs

250 m to 256 km

MM 250 m to 64 km

SM 250 m to 256 km

Max. 64,000 points

0.125 m

1.4000 to 1.6000

±(1 + 0.0005 % x distance + data point spacing)

±0.05 dB/dB ±0.05 dB/dB

0.05 dB

0.01 dB

±2 dB

SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE Appendix A & B and SR-4731)

Internal flash memory

USB flash drive (2 USB host ports)

Downloadable from OTDR directly to PC

Internal 1000 fibers

USB

Full Auto, Real Time, Expert

SC/ST/FC/LC

±0.05 dB/dB

Trace File Storage Capacity

Data Transfer to PC

OTDR Modes

Tool Free Adapters

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified.

b. Longest Range and Pulse Width, 3 minutes Averaging Time, Filter on, Typical.

c. 62.5 µm fiber for multimode test.

d. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of an unsaturated event with reflection <-45 dB for SM and <-40 dB for MM using a 5 ns pulse width.

e. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter caused by an unsaturated event with reflection <-45 dB for SM and <-40 dB for MM using a 5 ns pulse width.

f. Does not include GIR uncertainty.

g. Typical.

h. For a non-saturated event.

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. M710-00-2000 Revision 1A, 2015-01-23

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

67

M710 Multifunction OTDR

Specifications a

POWER METER

Calibrated Wavelengths

Detector Type

Measurement Range (dBm)

Accuracy

b

Measurement Units

Wavelength ID

c

Set Reference

Data Storage

Tone Detection

M710-40

SINGLE-MODE OTDR OPTIONS

M710-20 M710-21

850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm (displays up to 3 simultaneously)

Filtered InGaAs detector

+26 to -50 dBm

±0.25

dB, dBm, mW

Yes

Yes

Yes

270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz

QUAD OTDR OPTIONS

M710-24

850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm

(displays up to 3 simultaneously)

InGaAs 2 mm

+3 to -70 dBm

VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Wavelength

Output Power (nominal)

ALL M710 OTDR MODELS

Laser

Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11, IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

635 ±20 nm

0.8 mW

GENERAL

Display

Anti-Reflective (AR) Coating

Size

Weight

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Power

Battery Life

d, f

Recharge Time

e, f

ALL M710 OTDR MODELS

16.51 cm (6.5 in), color, transflective (indoor/outdoor) touch screen display

Yes

190.5 x 269.2 x 69.8 mm (7.5 x 10.6 x 2.75 in)

2.36 kg ( 5.22 lb)

-10°C to+50°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)

-20°C to+60°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)

Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter

13 hours continuous OTDR testing

4 hours

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.

b. Accuracy measured at -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.

c. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with AFL’s Wave ID Series Light Sources.

d. Typical, per GR-196-CORE issue 2, depending on display brightness.

e. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating.

f. External battery charger available.

68

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. M710-00-2000 Revision 1A, 2015-01-23

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

M710 Multifunction OTDR

Ordering Information

The M710 OTDRs work with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope (the DFS1 includes a software update for the OTDR). The M710 models come with an integrated Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), Optical Power Meter (OPM), and a large transflective touch screen display. Each model includes an OTDR, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and OPM loss reporting, AC adapter

a

, switchable test port adapters, and cleaning accessories in a soft carry case. When placing an order, select options as follows: Optical Configuration (NN), OTDR port ferrule (F), and Language (LL). Example: The model number M710-21U indicates M710 SM with UPC OTDR port ferrule, and English language option. Language option will be selected during ordering process.

M710

NN F LL

Optical Configuration (NN)

24 = QUAD LR (long range):

850/1300 nm MM and 1310/1550 nm SM

21 = 1310/1550/1625 nm SM

20 = 1310/1550 nm SM

40 = 1310/1550 nm SM

OTDR Port Ferrule (F)

U = UPC

A = APC

b

Language (LL) c

01 = English, French, German,

Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish

08 = English, Traditional and Simplified Chinese

Accessories

Custom kits may be created by ordering an M710 OTDR model, a pre-configured accessories kit (M700 - H1) and accessories from the table below. The hard carry case has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, test leads/jumpers, the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit, OLS2-Dual or OLS4 optical light source, and cleaning accessories (items must be ordered separately).

AFL NO.

M700 - H1

DESCRIPTION

Pre-configured Accessories Kit

Includes hard case with One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC (2.5 mm), One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (1.25 mm), and CleanConnect 500

Hard carry case,M7x0/C SERIES,W/FOAM

DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit

DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit

DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters

OLS2-Dual laser light source with Wave ID, 1310/1550 nm

OLS4 integrated LED and laser light source with Wave ID, 850/1300/1310/1550 nm

Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m

Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m

Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, 62.5/125 µm multimode, 150 m

Fiber Ring, standard, 1 fiber, single-mode, 150 m

Zippered Jumper Carry Case

All types of fiber optic cleaning supplies are available. Visit www.AFLglobal.com/Cleaning or call factory for details.

Notes:

a. Specify power cord type (country) when ordering an OTDR. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge.

b. Available on the SM port for -20, -21, -24 models only.

c. When ordering OTDR, indicate language preference for the OTDR Quick Reference Guide.

d. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2).

1400-01-0090PZ

DFS1-00-04XU

DFS1-00-04XA

DFS1-00-04XN

OLS2-Dual

OLS4

FR1-M5-150-x1-x2

d

FR1-L5-150-x1-x2

d

FR1-M6-150-x1-x2

d

FR1-SM-150-x1-x2

d

1400-01-0086PZ

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. M710-00-2000 Revision 1A, 2015-01-23

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

69

TE

ST E

QUIPMEN

T

DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Dirty connector

DFS1 Digital FiberScope with M210 OTDR

Features

• Ergonomic, hand-held design

• Single-handed operation

• 400x magnification

• Fast, easy focus and display capture

• Video output via USB port to M- and C-series or user PC

• Powered from USB; no batteries required

• Extensive assortment of interchangeable fiber connector and bulkhead adapter tips

• Adapter tips easily changed; no tools required

• Use AFL SimpleView PC software with DFS1 to inspect connectors using a laptop PC

Clean connector

DFS1 Digital FiberScope

The DFS1 Digital FiberScope supports magnified video inspection of optical fiber connector end-faces during fiber optic cable and connector installation and maintenance. The ergonomically designed hand-held unit illuminates fiber end-faces and delivers magnified images via USB port to AFL’s M-series OTDRs,

C-series OTDRs and Certification Testers. FiberScope software displays, labels and stores captured images as part of connector installation and/or maintenance records.

A large adjustment knob permits easy focusing using real-time view. Once focused, a conveniently located trigger button signals the attached display device to capture the image for analysis and archiving. The scope’s ergonomic shape and control locations support comfortable, single-handed operation.

The DFS1 is powered through the USB port, eliminating the need for an additional battery or AC power supplies. Electronic video inspection eliminates all danger of eye damage from active (lit) fibers carrying either visible or infrared wavelengths.

An extensive assortment of adapters supports inspection of a wide range of optical jumper cable connector ferrules and bulkhead adapters. Bulkhead adapter tips are available in multiple lengths as well as 60° angle. Connector adapters are available for PC, UPC or APC polished ferrules in 1.25 mm,

2.5 mm and other diameters. The DFS1 is available in three different kits which provide either PC/UPC adapters, APC adapters or no adapters.

AFL SimpleView ™ Fiber Inspection Software is an application, which permits the DFS1 Digital FiberScope to be used with

Windows ® XP or Windows ® 7 computers. AFL SimpleView software displays a live, high-resolution video image of the endface of an optical fiber on the PC’s display. SimpleView software is a free download www.AFLglobal.com.

Applications

• Ideal for telco, broadband and enterprise applications

• Optical connector and bulkhead adapter inspection

• Display and analyze fiber end-face quality on C- and M-series

• Visually inspect fiber end-faces for damage or contamination impairing optical transmission

• Generate installation inspection records, associating captured digital photo with fiber ID

www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780

70

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. DFS1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

TE

ST E

QUIPMEN

T

DFS1 Digital FiberScope with M700 OTDR

DFS1 Digital FiberScope Kit

DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Specifications a

PARAMETERS

400X

~400 µm x 300 µm

0.5 μm detectable

0°C to 50°C

-20°C to 70°C

Manual adjustment, 2 mm max travel

35 mm diameter x 175 mm length (without tip)

200 g

Blue LED

USB port of M-series OTDRs or C-series OTDRS and Certification Testers

Note:

a. All specifications valid at 23°C ±2°C (73.4°F ±3.6°F) unless otherwise specified.

VALUE

Magnification

Field of View

Resolution

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Focus

Dimensions

Weight

Light Source

Power Supply

Ordering Information

The DFS1 is available in three different kits which provide either PC/UPC adapters, APC adapters, or no adapters. All kits include soft carry case, a storage box to hold up to six adapter tips, FiberScope display software update for M-series OTDRs (M200, M700) or C-series OTDRs and Certification Testers (C840, C850, C860, C880), and a quick reference guide.

DESCRIPTION

DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit includes:

(1) DFS1-00-04X0MR DFS1 USB Digital FiberScope

(1) DFS1-00-0001MR Universal 1.25 mm male PC adapter tip

(1) DFS1-00-0002MR Universal 2.5 mm male PC adapter tip

(1) DFS1-00-0003MR SC and FC female bulkhead adapter tip

(1) DFS1-00-0004MR LC female bulkhead adapter tip

(1) DFS1-04-0001MZ soft carry case for scope and adapters

(1) 8500-05-0001MZ One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC

(1) 8500-05-0002MZ One-Click Cleaner LC/MU

(1) 1400-01-0093MZ 6-compartment adapter tip storage box

(1) DFS1-001-00 DFS1 software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, C880

DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit includes:

(1) DFS1-00-04X0MR DFS1 USB Digital FiberScope

(1) DFS1-01-0002MR Universal 2.5 mm male APC adapter tip

(1) DFS1-01-0003MR SC/APC and FC/APC bulkhead adapter tip

(1) DFS1-01-0011MR SC/APC bulkhead adapter tip

(1) DFS1-04-0001MZ soft carry case for scope and adapters

(1) 8500-05-0001MZ One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC

(1) 1400-01-0093MZ 6-compartment adapter tip storage box

(1) DFS1-001-00 DFS1 software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, C880

DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters includes:

(1) DFS1-00-004X0MR DFS1 USB Digital FiberScope

(1) Soft carry case for scope and adapters

(1) 6-compartment adapter tip box

(1) DFS1-001-00 DFS1 software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860, C880

DFS1 FiberScope display software update for M200, M210, M700, C840, C850, C860,

C880

AFL NO.

DFS1-00-04XU

DFS1-00-04XA

DFS1-00-04XN

DFS1-001-00 www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780

71

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. DFS1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

TE

ST E

QUIPMEN

T

DFS1-00-0001MR

DFS1-00-0002MR

DFS1-00-0004MR

DFS1-00-0013MR

DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Ordering Information (continued)

DFS1 Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Soft carry case for DFS1 Digital FiberScope and adapters

6-compartment adapter tip storage box

11-compartment adapter tip storage box

One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC

One-Click Cleaner LC/MU

AFL SimpleView PC viewer software

DESCRIPTION

PC FERRULE CONNECTOR ADAPTER TIPS

Universal 1.25 mm tip for PC ferrule connector

Universal 2.5 mm tip for PC ferrule connector

Universal 2.0 mm tip for PC ferrule connector

Slim 1.6 mm tip for PC ferrule (termini)

Slim 1.25 mm probe tip for LuxCis and termini

Slim 2.5 mm PC ferrule tip for ELIO and termini

Tip for ELIO 1.25 mm ferrule connector

SC/PC AND FC/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS

Tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter

Short extended tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter

Medium extended tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter

Long extended tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter

60° angled tip for SC/PC and FC/PC bulkhead adapter

60º angled tip for SC/PC bulkhead adapter

ST/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS

Tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter

Short extended tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter

Medium extended tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter

Long extended tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter

60° angled tip for ST/PC bulkhead adapter

LC/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS

Tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter

Short extended tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter

Medium extended tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter

Long extended tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter

60° angled tip for LC/PC bulkhead adapter

AFL NO.

DFS1-04-0001MZ

1400-01-0093MZ

1400-01-0094MZ

8500-05-0001MZ

8500-05-0002MZ

Free download from www.AFLglobal.com

DFS1 Adapter Tips

The following table identifies commonly required adapter tips. Other adapter tips available. Please consult the factory for additional adapter tips and prices.

AFL NO.

DFS1-00-0001MR

DFS1-00-0002MR

DFS1-00-0005MR

DFS1-00-0006MR

DFS1-00-0038MR

DFS1-00-0039MR

DFS1-00-0008MR

DFS1-00-0003MR

DFS1-00-0010MR

DFS1-00-0011MR

DFS1-00-0012MR

DFS1-00-0013MR

DFS1-00-0040MR

DFS1-00-0014MR

DFS1-00-0015MR

DFS1-00-0016MR

DFS1-00-0017MR

DFS1-00-0018MR

DFS1-00-0004MR

DFS1-00-0019MR

DFS1-00-0020MR

DFS1-00-0021MR

DFS1-00-0022MR

www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780

72

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. DFS1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

TE

ST E

QUIPMEN

T

DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Ordering Information (continued)

DESCRIPTION

E2000/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS

Short extended tip for E2000/PC bulkhead adapter

Medium extended tip for E2000/PC bulkhead adapter

Long extended tip for E2000/PC bulkhead adapter

MU/PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS

Tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter

Short extended tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter

Medium extended tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter

Long extended tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter

60° angled tip for MU/PC bulkhead adapter

MTP/PC MULTI-FIBER ADAPTER TIPS (FERRULE & BULKHEAD)

MTP/PC bulkhead adapter extended tip; includes base plus MTP/PC front end tip.

Test ferrules using adapter tip with bulkhead adapter.

Front end tip for MTP/PC ferrule and bulkhead adapter

MTP/PC and MTP/APC bulkhead adapter extended tip kit; includes base plus MTP/PC and MTP/APC front end tips. Test ferrules using adapter tip with bulkhead adapter.

Multi-row MTP/PC bulkhead adapter extended tip; Includes base plus MTP/PC front end tip. Test multi-row MTP/PC ferrules using this adapter tip with multi-row bulkhead adapter

MISCELLANEOUS PC BULKHEAD ADAPTER TIPS

Tip for LEMO 2.0 mm bulkhead adapter

Tip for LX.5/PC bulkhead adapter

Tip for 2.0 mm termini bulkhead adapter

Tip for 1.6 mm termini bulkhead adapter

Tip for ELIO 1.25 mm bulkhead adapter

APC TIPS

Universal 1.25 mm tip for APC ferrule connector

Universal 2.5 mm tip for APC ferrule connector

Tip for SC/APC and FC/APC bulkhead adapter

Tip for SC/APC bulkhead adapter

Tip for LC/APC bulkhead adapter

Short extended tip for SC/APC bulkhead adapter

60° angled tip for SC/APC bulkhead adapter

Tip for E2000/APC bulkhead adapter

Tip for LX.5/APC bulkhead adapter

MTP/APC bulkhead adapter extended tip kit; includes base plus MTP/APC front end tip.

Test ferrules using adapter tip with bulkhead adapter.

Front end tip for MTP/APC ferrule and bulkhead adapter

AFL NO.

DFS1-00-0023MR

DFS1-00-0024MR

DFS1-00-0025MR

DFS1-00-0026MR

DFS1-00-0027MR

DFS1-00-0028MR

DFS1-00-0029MR

DFS1-00-0030MR

DFS1-00-0037MR

DFS1-00-0041MR

DFS1-00-0042MR

DFS1-00-0050MR

DFS1-00-0031MR

DFS1-00-0032MR

DFS1-00-0033MR

DFS1-00-0034MR

DFS1-00-0036MR

DFS1-01-0001MR

DFS1-01-0002MR

DFS1-01-0003MR

DFS1-01-0011MR

DFS1-01-0004MR

DFS1-01-0005MR

DFS1-01-0006MR

DFS1-01-0008MR

DFS1-01-0009MR

DFS1-01-0010MR

DFS1-01-0012MR

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780

73

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. DFS1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Network Simulators

NSR-Series Rack-mountable Network Simulators

NS-Series NS Bench Top Network Simulators

Features

• User-specified fiber type

• User-specified fiber types and lengths

• User-specified events such as mechanical or fusion splices

• OTDR trace provided for documentation

• Variety of connector styles available

• NSR models are Rack-mountable

• The NS models are rugged, field-portable

• The NSR models can accommodates up to 100 km of fiber

(NSR Models)

• N.I.S.T. Traceable

Applications

• Laboratory testing

• Classroom training

• Field troubleshooting

• OTDR calibration

NS and NSR Series Fiber Optic

Network Simulators

Fiber Optic Network Simulators from AFL are custom built “fiber boxes” intended to duplicate installed fiber optic facilities.

Training schools, laboratory testing or field troubleshooting are just few of the many applications for units. Network simulators may be ordered with customer-specified lengths of multimode or single-mode fiber. Events such as connections, fusion splices and mechanical splices can be added at various points within the fiber to duplicate installed networks. A full range of connector types are available including SC, ST, FC and LC. Angled or nonangled connectors can be specified. Each network simulator includes full documentation for insertion loss, attenuation/km and event location/value.

The NS models network simulators are housed in rugged field-portable, bench top cases. The NS models accommodates up to 15 km of optical fiber.

The NSR models network simulators are custom built rackmountable fiber boxes. The NSR models are housed in either

18 or 23-inch rack-mountable box. These network simulators can accommodate multiple lengths.

Ordering Information

Contact AFL at (800) 321-5298 or (603) 528-6278 for a quote for your custom Network Simulator.

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. NSR1-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

74

OTDR Fiber Rings

FR1-M6-150-SC-ST

FR1-SM-1000-SC-ST

OTDR Fiber Rings

Measuring an insertion loss of the near-end and/or far-end connection of a fiber optic link with an OTDR requires a launch and/or receive test cable. A launch cable, which connects the OTDR to the link under test, reveals the insertion loss and reflectance of the near-end connection. A receive cable, which connects to the far-end of the link, reveals the insertion loss and reflectance of the far-end connection. Launch and receive test cables can range from 150 m to 1 km (or longer) in length. Because very long test cables are impractical to transport and use, AFL offers coiled lengths of 50 µm multimode, 62.5 µm multimode, or single-mode fiber packaged in compact rings.

Fiber Rings of 150 m of fiber are ideal for premises fiber network test applications.

Fiber Rings of 500 m and 1 km of single-mode fiber are designed for broadband, long haul fiber network test applications.

Fiber Ring Models

CONFIGURATION FIBER TYPE FIBER LENGTH AFL NO.

Standard, one fiber Multimode, 50 µm, OM2 150 m (492 ft) FR1-M5-150- x1- x2

Standard, one fiber, Laser Optimized Multimode, 50 µm, OM3 150 m (492 ft) FR1-OM3-150-x1-x2

Standard, one fiber, Laser Optimized Multimode, 50 µm, OM4 150 m (492 ft) FR1-OM4-150-x1-x2

Standard, one fiber Multimode, 62.5 µm 150 m (492 ft) FR1-M6-150- x1- x2

Standard, one fiber Single-mode 150 m (492 ft) FR1-SM-150-y1-y2

Standard, one fiber

Standard, one fiber

Single-mode

Single-mode

Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657.

A2 BIF

Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657.

A2 BIF

Standard, one fiber, Bend Insensitive Single-mode, G.657.

A2 BIF

500 m (1640 ft)

150 m (492 ft)

FR1-SM-500-y1-y2

1000 m (3280 ft) FR1-SM-1000-y1-y2

FR1-BIF-150-y1-y2

500 m (1640 ft) FR1-BIF-500-y1-y2

1000 m (3280 ft) FR1-BIF-1000-y1-y2 x1, x2 — connectors for multimode cables, specify type [ST, SC, ASC (angled SC), FC, AFC (angled FC), LC] y1, y2 — connectors for single-mode cables, specify type [ST, SC, ASC (angled SC), FC, AFC (angled FC), LC]

Other connector types, fiber types, and fiber lengths will be quoted upon request.

FR1-SM-150-SC-SC

75

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FR00-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

OTDR Fiber Rings

How to Generate a Baseline Trace Using Fiber Rings

• Use the Fiber Ring as a launch cable.

Connect the Fiber Ring between your OTDR and the fiber link under test. This will allow you to measure the loss of the near-end connection.

• Use the Fiber Ring as a receive cable.

Connect the Fiber Ring to the far-end connector of your fiber link under test. This will allow you to measure the loss of the far-end connection.

• By using Fiber Rings as both launch and receive cables, as shown in the diagram below, you can measure total insertion loss of the fiber link under test.

Fiber ring - launch cable

Fiber ring connector

2

1

OTDR port

OTDR

3

6

Fiber link under test

4

Fusion splice

Near-end connection

5

Far-end connection

7

Fiber ring - receive cable

8

End of receive cable

Example OTDR Test Configuration with Launch and Receive Cables

OTDR port

Near-end connection

1

2

Fiber ring - launch cable

Fusion splice

3

4

8

6

5

7

End of receive cable

Fiber link under test

Far-end connection

Fiber ring - receive cable

OTDR Trace Made using Launch and Receive Cables

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FR00-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

76

OPM1 Optical Power Meter

This portable optical power meter may be used to measure optical power in premises, telco, or broadband fiber optic networks. When used with an LED or laser light source, the

OPM1 can also measure the attenuation (insertion loss) of multimode or single-mode cables.

With only two controls–ON/OFF and wavelength–the OPM1 is our simplest to use optical power meter. Power is displayed in dBm only - making the OPM1 an ideal meter for fiber optic training courses.

Optical power in dBm and the calibration wavelength setting are displayed on an easy-to-read LCD display. The optical input port accepts AFL thread-on style connector adapter caps. Adapter caps are required and must be ordered separately.

The OPM1 is fully N.I.S.T. traceable and runs on a standard 9-volt alkaline battery.

Features

• 850, 1300, 1310, 1550 nm

• Premises (Ge) and broadband (InGaAs) models

• Displays optical power (dBm)

• Our simplest to use optical power meter

• N.I.S.T. traceable

Applications

• OPM1-2C for testing multimode and single-mode networks

• OPM1-3C optimized for WAN, CATV, and Telco systems

• Fiber Optic Training courses

77

© 2002-2012, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM1-00-2001 Revision R, 2012-07-06

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

OPM1 Optical Power Meter

Specifications a

OPTICAL

SPECIFICATIONS

OPM1-2C

Calibration Wavelengths 850, 1300, 1310,

Detector Type

1550 nm

Germanium (Ge)

OPM1-3C

850, 1300, 1310, 1550,

1625 nm

InGaAs

+6 to -70 dBm Measurement Range

Accuracy b

+6 to -60 dBm

±0.25 dB

Measurement Units dBm

GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Power

Adapter Caps

Typical 60 hours with 9V battery

2.5 mm Universal Included for FC, ST, SC

Connector specific adapters available

Operating Temperature -10 °C to 50 °C

Relative Humidity 0 to 95 % (non-condensing)

Storage Temperature -30 °C to 60 °C

Size (H x W x D)

Weight

14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in)

0.26 kg (0.58 lb)

Note:

a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.

b. Accuracy measured at 25ºC and -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

FC adapter

SC adapter

ST

®

adapter

LC adapter

* See www.AFLglobal.com for full list of adapter caps

AFL NO.

8800-00-0200

8800-00-0209

8800-00-0202

8800-00-0225

Ordering Information

INCLUDES

Protective rubber boot, 9V battery, manual, 2.5 mm Universal Adapter cap and carrying case.

AFL NO.

All OPM1 models

Optical power meters and optical light sources can be packaged together as a kit.

Calibration Plans

AFL recommends annual calibrations on AFL Test and Inspection products. Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at a discounted price, a convenient calibration expiration email service, express calibration services and access to our product knowledge base. Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the

Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty

(three years total coverage).

MODEL

OPM1-2C

OPM1-3C

2 YR CAL PLAN

AFL NO.

CAL2-00-OPM1-2

CAL2-00-OPM1-3

2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN

AFL NO.

CAL2-01-OPM1-2

CAL2-01-OPM1-3

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2002-2012, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM1-00-2001 Revision R, 2012-07-06

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

78

Power Meters

OPM4-FTTx PON Power Meter

AFL’s OPM4-FTTx measures downstream signals in FTTH and other passive optical networks (PON) that use 1490 nm for data and 1550 nm for video traffic. Equipped with PON specific wavelength filters and a dual photo detector, the OPM4-FTTx can separately and simultaneously measure 1490 and 1550 nm power at the ONT or other points in an FTTx PON. Measurements are clearly visible on the dual-wavelength display – even in direct sunlight.

Visual Fault Locator

(VFL) - 650 nm (red) standard on all OPM4-FTTx units. A majority of fiber failures occur in the first few meters of the fiber – at connection points. The integrated VFL allows technicians to quickly perform short-range fault location and connectivity testing without extra tools.

The power meter and VFL ports accept thread-on style adapter caps and are compatible with angled or non-angled connectors. The OPM4-FTTx offers an automatic power shut-off feature, long battery life from standard AA alkaline batteries, and is fully N.I.S.T. traceable.

Features

• BPON, GPON, and EPON compatible

• Simultaneous power measurement at 1490 and 1550 nm

• Power shown in units of dBm or µW

• Comparison of power levels in dB

• Integrated VFL

• Auto power shut-off feature

• Dual-wavelength, sunlight readable LCD display

• Compatible with APC or UPC connectors

• Standard alkaline AA batteries

• Handheld, rugged, lightweight

• N.I.S.T traceable

Applications

• ONT splitter installation testing

• Designed for rapid ONT troubleshooting

• Supports BPON, EPON, and GPON configurations

• Fault-locating drop cables and F2 fibers from FDH to ONT

79

© 2008-2012, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM4-14-2000 Revision 1E, 2012-07-06

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

OPM4-FTTx PON Power Meter

Specifications a

POWER METER

Calibrated Wavelengths 1490 nm, 1550 nm

Signal Format CW or downstream BPON, GPON, or EPON

Detector Type

Measurement Range

Filtered InGaAs

+10 to -50 dBm @ 1490 nm; +20 to -50 dBm @

1550 nm

Accuracy b

Resolution

Measurement Units

VFL LASER

±0.5 dB (±0.35 dB typical)

0.01 dB dB, dBm, μW

Output Power (typical) 0.8 mW

Wavelength (nominal) 650 nm

Safety Class II, FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 & 1040.11, IEC 60825-

1: 2007-3

GENERAL

Power 2 AA batteries

Battery Life (typical) Power meter - 100 hours; Power meter (backlight on)

- 16 hours;

Power meter and VFL - 6 hours; Power meter (backlight on) and VFL - 5 hours

Operating Temperature -10°C to 50°C, 90 % RH (non-condensing)

Storage Temperature

Size (H x W x D)

Weight

-30°C to 60°C, 90 % RH (non-condensing)

14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in)

0.26 kg (0.58 lb)

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.

b. At calibration power levels of approximately -5 dBm for 1550 nm and -10 dBm for 1490 nm.

Ordering Information

INCLUDES

OPM4-FTTx PON power meter, 2 AA batteries, protective rubber boot, SC adapter for power meter port, 2.5 mm universal adapter for VFL port, user’s guide, and carry case

AFL NO.

OPM4-FTTx

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

FC adapter

SC adapter

ST® adapter

LC adapter

AFL NO.

8800-00-0200

8800-00-0209

8800-00-0202

8800-00-0225

Calibration Plans

AFL recommends annual calibrations on AFL’s Test and Inspection products. Prepaid Cal plans offer two annual calibrations at a discounted price, a convenient calibration expiration email service, express calibration services and access to our product knowledge base. Cal Plus plans offer the same services as the

Cal plans with the addition of a two year extended warranty

(three years total coverage).

MODEL

OPM4-FTTH

2 YR CAL PLAN

AFL NO.

CAL2-00-OPM4-FTTH

2 YR CAL PLUS PLAN

AFL NO.

CAL2-01-OPM4-FTTH

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2008-2012, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM4-14-2000 Revision 1E, 2012-07-06

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

80

Optical Power Meters

OPM5 Optical Power Meter

OPM4 Optical Power Meter

OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters

Features

• Rugged, dependable, tools backed with 5-Year Warranty

• Single-mode and multimode applications

• Wave ID supports testing up to three wavelengths simultaneously

• Field swappable connector adapters provide flexibility

• Large display visible in direct sunlight. Backlight for dim conditions

• Stores optical reference at each calibrated wavelength

• Detection of multiple test tones for fiber identification

• Equipped with five-minute auto-off feature

• Long battery life from globally available 2 x AA (Mignon) batteries

• Fully N.I.S.T. traceable.

Applications

• Passive Optical Networks (PON) testing

• Save test data for Report Generation (OPM5)

• OPM(5/4)-4D (Filtered-InGaAs) for high power (+26 dBm) CATV Broadband networks or DWDM system applications

• OPM(5/4)-3D (InGaAs) for Telecommunications networks

• OPM(5/4)-2D (Ge) for Premises LAN/WAN multimode or single-mode networks

• OPM4-1D (Silicon) for multimode / plastic optical fiber applications

With more than 25 years of experience in the optical testing industry and thousands of units in use around the world, AFL is a trusted supplier of optical power meters. Backed by

5-year product warranties, these are the quality products you can trust.

Designed for use in outside plant environments

• Splash resistant controls

• Withstands one-meter drop test

• Controls designed for easy operation with gloves

• Field swappable optical adapters allow access for cleaning optical port and supports multiple connector styles

• Efficient design provides long test time from globally available AA batteries

OPM5 with Data Storage of Test Results

File Management system allows technicians to organize test results into multiple files and transfer stored results via USB to a PC for analyzing, generating reports, and printing.

The supplied powerful PC Analysis and Reporting Tool (TRM

®

2.0) allows users to apply industry-standards-based rules to test results and create comprehensive certification reports. Users can generate network Pass/Fail results demonstrating compliance to industry standards and illustrate headroom.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM0-00-2000 Revision 1B, 2014-10-08

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

81

OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters

Specifications a

OPTICAL

MODEL OPM5-4D, OPM4-4D

Calibrated Wavelengths 850, 980, 1300, 1310, 1490,

1550, 1625 nm

Detector Type Filtered InGaAs

Measurement Range +26 to -50 dBm

Tone Detect Range +6 to -30 dBm

+6 to -25 dBm for 850 nm

Wavelength ID Range +6 to -30 dBm

+6 to -25 dBm for 850 nm

Accuracy

b

Resolution

Measurement Units

OPM5-3D, OPM4-3D

850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550,

1625 nm

InGaAs

+10 to -75 dBm

+10 to -50 dBm

+10 to -45 dBm for 850 nm

+10 to -50 dBm

+10 to -45 dBm for 850 nm

OPM5-2D, OPM4-2D

850, 1300, 1310, 1490, 1550 nm 650, 660, 780, 850 nm

Germanium (Ge)

+6 to -60 dBm

+6 to -50 dBm

+6 to -45 dBm for 850 nm

+6 to -50 dBm

+6 to -45 dBm for 850 nm

±0.25 dB

0.01 dB dB, dBm, μW

OPM4-1D

Silicon (Si)

+6 to -70 dBm

+6 to -45 dBm

GENERAL

Power

Adapter Caps

Battery Life

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Size (H x W x D)

Weight

2 x AA batteries, accepts standard mini-USB power adapter

Order with one: 1.25 mm Universal, 2.5 mm Universal, FC, SC, ST, LC. Other connector adapters available

300 hours

-10 °C to 50 °C, 90 % RH (non-condensing)

-30 °C to 60 °C, 90 % RH (non-condensing)

14.0 x 8.1 x 3.8 cm (5.5 x 3.2 x 1.5 in)

0.26 kg (0.58 lb)

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.

b. Accuracy measured at 25 ºC and -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.

Ordering Information

All OPM models include optical power meter, 2 AA batteries, protective rubber boot, customer specified adapter cap, and carry case.

OPM5 models also include TRM

®

2.0 software (Basic License). Quick Ref Guides (PDF format) are available in Chinese Simplified, Chinese

Traditional, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Portuguese, Spanish and Turkish on www.AFLglobal.com/OPMQRG.

When placing an order, select options as follows:

• Model Number (M),

• Detector Type (N),

• Connector Configuration (CC)

Model Number (M)

M = 5, 4

Detector Type (N)

N = 4, 3, 2, 1

OPM

M N CC

Connector (CC)

CC = FC, SC, ST, LC, 2.5 mm,

1.25 mm (ONE ONLY!)

MODEL

OPM5-4D

OPM5-3D

OPM5-2D

OPM4-4D

OPM4-3D

OPM4-2D

OPM4-1D

CALIBRATED WAVELENGTHS (nm)

650 660 780 850 980 1300 1310 1490 1550 1625

DETECTOR TYPE

InGaAs

InGaAs

Germanium

InGaAs

InGaAs

Germanium

Silicon

MEASUREMENT

RANGE (dBm)

+26 to -50

+10 to -75

+6 to -60

+26 to -50

+10 to -75

+6 to -60

+6 to -70

PC SOFTWARE

TRM 2.0

TRM 2.0

TRM 2.0

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM0-00-2000 Revision 1B, 2014-10-08

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

82

OPM5 and OPM4 Optical Power Meters

OPM Accessories

DESCRIPTION

ADAPTER CAPS

2.5 mm Universal (accepts FC, SC, and ST ferrules)

1.25 mm Universal (accepts LC and MU ferrules)

FC

SC

ST ®

LC simplex/duplex

E-2000

MU simplex

2.5 mm open Universal. Accepts SC duplex, OptiTap connector for measuring optical power.

SMA

D4

Biconic

DIN 47256

Radiall PFO/VFO

ADAPTERS FOR PLASTIC OPTICAL FIBER (POF)

1000 mm bare fiber (plastic)

HP-HFBR-45XX POF Universal

USB CABLE

USB Cable: PC (USB-A) to OPM (USB-MINI B):

• Connect OPM to PC for data upload to TRM ® 2.0

• External Power for OPM (when used with customer supplied USB-A power source)

OPM5 MODEL OPM4 MODEL

Connect to PC and External power External power only

AFL NO.

8800-00-0214

8800-00-0224

8800-00-0200

8800-00-0209

8800-00-0202

8800-00-0225

8800-00-0221

8800-00-0226

8800-00-0219

8800-00-0203

8800-00-0201

8800-00-0204

8800-00-0211

8800-00-0212

8800-00-0223

8800-00-0271PR

6000-00-0024MR

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. OPM0-00-2000 Revision 1B, 2014-10-08

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

83

Attenuators and Network Activation Kits

VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator

The VOA6-SM is a rugged, lightweight variable optical attenuator that is ideal for use in a wide range of single-mode fiber link certification and engineering test applications.

Managers will appreciate its simplicity, which minimizes training requirements and speeds deployment. Field technicians will appreciate the simple thumbwheel attenuation control, which allows precise, one-hand operation. Engineers will appreciate the accuracy and return loss performance of the VOA6-SM.

The VOA6-SM is a two-port passive optical device that, when inserted in an optical link, allows a technician to perform several important certification tasks. For example, when the fixed output level of a laser transmitter is too high for downstream devices, the VOA6-SM can be used to determine the amount of fixed attenuation required to match power levels. Alternately, during activation and certification of a new circuit, the VOA6-SM can be used to vary the amount of link loss and determine the optical headroom of the circuit. The 45 dB optical return loss of the VOA6-SM makes it ideal for use with sensitive DFB laser transmitters and other devices that can be degraded or damaged by reflected power.

The VOA6-SM is calibrated at key FTTx wavelengths including 1310, 1490, 1550 and

1625 nm and can be used in the calibration, engineering and production test lab as well as in the field. Its rugged construction ensures many years of service.

The VOA6-SM operates on an internal Li-Ion battery and includes a 10-minute auto power down and 60-second backlight power off capabilities. An AC adapter and battery charger is standard with every unit.

Features

• 9 µm /125 µm fiber applications

• 2 dB to 60 dB attenuation

• Thumbwheel for one-handed operation

• Maintains attenuation setting with power on/off.

• Calibrated for key FTTx wavelengths

• 45 dB return loss for use with DFB Lasers

Applications

• BER testing

• System tolerance to signal attenuation

• New equipment turn-ups

• Simple to operate lab attenuator

• Validate link budgets and optical margin

• Determine optical pad value

• Characterize optical components, modules, and systems

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. VOA6-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

84

VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator

Specifications a

OPTICAL

Fiber Type

Wavelength Range

Calibrated Wavelengths

Measurement Range

Insertion Loss

Resolution

Linearity

Repeatability

Accuracy

Setting Type

Function

Return Loss b

Max Input

GENERAL

Connector Adapters

9/125 µm single-mode

1260 – 1650 nm

1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm

2 – 60 dB

2 dB (max)

0.05 dB

±0.5 dB

±0.2 dB

±0.8 dB

Continuous over entire range

Bi-directional

45 dB

+20 dBm

Battery

Battery Life c

Auto-Off Feature

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Humidity

Dimensions

Weight

FC/PC standard

SC/PC, ST/PC (available – switchable)

Li-Ion rechargable

100 hrs

10 min

-10 °C to 55 °C (14 °F to 131 °F)

-40 °C to 70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F)

0 % to 90 % (non-condensing)

210 x 115 x 55 mm (8.27 x 4.53 x 2.17 in)

450 g (1.0 lb)

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 23 °C ±2 °C (73.4 °F ±3.6 °F) unless otherwise specified.

b. Typical.

c. Unit powered off in between level changes. Typical time spent changing level <20 minutes per hour.

Ordering Information

VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator comes with a protective rubber boot, AC adapter, Li-Ion battery, battery charger and a soft carry case.

DESCRIPTION

VOA6-SM Variable Optical Attenuator

AFL NO.

VOA6-SM-FC

Accessories and Connector Adapters

DESCRIPTION

FC Connector (order 2)

SC Connector (order 2)

ST Connector (order 2)

Protective Rubber Boot

Carry Case

One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC

Cletop-SB

Visual Fault Identifier, 650 nm

AFL NO.

2900-FT-LS-FC MR

2900-FT-LS-SC MR

2900-FT-LS-ST MR

1400-10-0220PZ

1400-01-0087PZ

8500-05-0001MZ

8500-10-0016MZ

HiLite

* VOA6-SM Attenuator has two ports. Order connector adapters in pairs

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. VOA6-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

85

C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM

C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM

C850 Compact QUAD OTDR

Features

• OTDR dynamic range: 22 dB (MM), 26 dB (SM)

• Inspection capable with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope

• Integrated OPM, OLS, and VFL (650 nm)

• Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time OTDR test modes

• Touch and Test

user interface

• Automatic Pass/Fail analysis (TIA/ISO/EN)

• Internal (1000s tests) and USB storage

• Wave ID detect if used with Wave ID series light sources

• >8 hours battery life or AC power

• TRM

®

2.0 reporting software

• Available in seven languages

C850 OTDR with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Applications

• Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing of premise networks

• Bi-directionally measure loss and length of fiber links

• Perform Pass/Fail Event and Link measurements

• Certify fibers using Pass/Fail criteria of industry standards, applications and user-defined limits

• Create professional certification reports

The C850 Certification OTDR from AFL combines ease of use (Touch and Test

) and multiple functionality in a hand-held test set designed for testing and inspecting multimode and single-mode fibers. The C850 integrates an OTDR with Optical Light Sources (OLS), an Optical Power Meter (OPM), Visible Fault Locator (VFL) and inspection capability for testing and troubleshooting enterprise networks.

OTDR Auto modes, OPM Wave ID, and Pass/Fail thresholds simplify the user experience, reduce training time and testing errors enabling even novice users to get the job done quickly and accurately.

The C850 OTDR combines ease-of-use and functionality for performing OTDR and loss testing of optical fibers in enterprise networks

(campus and buildings). OTDR and OPM test results for the same fibers are stored in logical job folders by cables allowing for easy review, selection, maintenance, and report generation using supplied Windows

®

compatible software.

The C850 OTDR can be used in pairs or with a C840 to perform Tier 1 dual-wavelength, two fiber bi-directional tests. Loss and length can be measured and compared to ISO/TIA/EN or User standards or applications to provide Pass/Fail feedback regarding the fibers ability to meet the acceptance criteria to be certified.

The C850 supports visual inspection per IEC 61300-3-35 using the DFS1 Digital FiberScope allowing users the ability to view and document connector end-face images with their OTDR traces and loss results.

Thousands of OTDR test results may be saved as standard .SOR files, which can be stored internally or on the supplied USB drive. Test results are transferable via a USB cable or USB drive to a computer for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows

® compatible software - TRM

®

2.0 (Test Results Manager). Acceptance reports generated using TRM can include OTDR traces with summary and event information with or without Pass/Fail indication, Event maps, and end-face images.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C850-00-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-08

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

86

C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM

Specifications a

OTDR

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Center Wavelengths

Wavelength Tolerance

Dynamic Range (SNR = 1)

Event Dead Zone

b

Attenuation Dead Zone

c

Pulse Widths

n

Range Settings

Sampling Points

Minimum Data Point Spacing

Group Index of Refraction

(GIR)

Distance Uncertainty (m)

d

Linearity

e

Loss Threshold

Loss Resolution

Reflectance Accuracy

f

VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR

Emitter Type

Safety Class

MULTIMODE

Laser

Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

850/1300 nm

±20/30 nm

22 dB

1310/1550 nm

±20/30 nm

26 dB

1.5 m

9 m

±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)

±0.05 dB/dB

0.05 dB

0.01 dB

±2 dB

SINGLE-MODE

10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10 µs

250 m to 64 km 250 m to 208 km

Up to 16,000

0.25 m

1.4000 to 1.6000

Wavelength

Output Power (nominal)

LIGHT SOURCE

Available Wavelengths

(nominal)

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Output Power

Stability (after 15-minute warm-up)

Wave ID Transmit

Tone Generation

Laser

Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

650 nm ±20 nm

0.8 mW

MULTIMODE PORT

850/1300 nm

SINGLE-MODE PORT

1310/1550 nm

LED

>-20 dBm, 62.5 µm MM

g

Laser

Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

0 dBm, 9 µm SM

±0.1 dB over 1 hour ±0.07 dB over 1 hour

±0.15 dB over 8 hours

Yes

270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 kHz, 2 kHz

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.

b. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width. c. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width.

d. Does not include GIR uncertainty.

e. Typical.

f. For a non-saturated event.

POWER METER

Calibrated Wavelengths

Detector Type

Measurement Range

Accuracy

h

Measurement Units

Wavelength ID

j

Set Reference

Data Storage

Tone Detection

GENERAL

850, 1300 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm

InGaAs 2 mm

+6 to -60 dBm

±0.25

dB, dBm, mW

Yes (to -47 dBm)

Yes

Yes

Yes (to -47 dBm)

Test Modes OTDR (Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time), Auto Test,

OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS

SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE Appendix A, B; SR-4731) Trace File Format

Length Measurement Range 5 km (MM);

200 km (SM)

Data Storage Internal flash memory

USB flash drive (2.0)

Data Storage Capacity

Downloadable from unit directly to PC

Internal >1000 fibers

Data Transfer to PC

Tool Free Adapters

Size

Weight

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Power

Battery Life

k, m

Recharge Time

l, m

Display

USB

Modular cleanable SC/ST/LC

27.4 x 19.3 x 7.1 cm

(10.8 x 7.6 x 2.8 in)

2.3 kg ( 5 lb)

-10°C to +50°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)

-20°C to +60°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)

Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter

>8 hours continuous testing

4 hours

16.51 cm (6.5 in), color, transflective g. Output power will be approximately 3 dB less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper.

h. Accuracy measured at -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.

j. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with Wave ID

Series Light Sources.

k. Typical, depending on display brightness.

l. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. m. External battery charger available.

n. 3 µs not available at 850 nm. 10 µs not available at 850/1300 nm.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C850-00-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-08

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

87

C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM

The C850 OTDR kits and options allow users to buy the test equipment functionality needed today and grow to meet the demands of certification testing.

The C850 combined with an OLS optical light source will allow users to test and generate detailed reports with both OTDR and

Loss results shown for each fiber and in charts by cable.

Users can add a C840 or another C850 to perform Certification testing. Two C850s or a C840 Tester and C850 can be used together to perform Tier 1 dual wavelength MM (850/1300 nm) and SM (1310/1550 nm) auto tests of one or two fibers in one or both directions as well as measure both loss and length of the fibers and compare to industry standards

(TIA/ISO/EN), applications and user-defined threshold values to certify the fibers.

The C850 OTDR and C840 Certification Tester work with the

DFS1 Digital FiberScope.

Ordering Information

When placing an order, select options as follows: Model, Optical Configuration, Language, and Case.

Example: C850 — 100 — LP1 — H2

C850

NNN LLL CC

Model

C850

Optical Configuration (NNN)

100 = QUAD 850/1300 nm MM

and 1310/1550 nm SM

Language (LLL)

LP1 = Language: English, French German,

Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish

Case (CC)

S1 = Soft case

H1 = Hard case and soft case with cleaning accessories

Specify Language when ordering a C850 to indicate language preference of OTDR Quick Reference Guide.

Specify power cord type (country) when ordering a C850. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge.

Additional power cords may be purchased separately.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C850-00-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-08

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

88

C850 Compact QUAD OTDR with QUAD OLS and OPM

Ordering Information (continued)

Each C850 kit includes the C850 QUAD OTDR with integrated OLS, OPM, VFI, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and certification or OPM loss reporting, AC adapter, switchable test ports adapters and accessories (see table below). The C850 hard carry case kit has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, jumpers in a jumper carry case, and the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit (accessory items must be ordered separately).

ADAPTERS

OTDR/OLS

SC, ST, LC

SC, ST, LC

OPM VFI

AFL NO.

SC, 2.5 mm, 1.25 mm 2.5 mm 1.25 mm C850-100-LP1-S1

SC, 2.5 mm, 1.25 mm 2.5 mm 1.25 mm C850-100-LP1-H1

CARRY CASE AND ACCESSORIES

Soft case

Soft and hard cases

CLEANING PRODUCTS

One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm

One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm

One-Click Cleaner LC, 1.25 mm

CleanConnect 500

C850—100—LP1—H1 Kit Contents

ITEM

C850

DESCRIPTION

QUAD OTDR/Auto Test Certification Tester

Adapters

Miscellaneous

Accessories

OTDR and OLS ports — SC, ST, LC

OPM port — SC, 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal

VFI port — 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal

Mandrel — 62.5 µm, 3 mm jacket and 50 µm, 3 mm jacket

Stylus pen for touch screen

USB thumb drive, 1G; USB to mini-USB cable

Small plastic parts box (2) to store adapter caps and mandrels

AC adapter (1), specify country of use

One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm Cleaning

Accessories

Cases

One-Click Cleaner LC/MU, 1.25 mm

CleanConnect 500

Hard transit case — holds C850, and above accessories

Soft case for C850

Report Software PC software

OTDR, Inspection, and Cleaning Accessories

DESCRIPTION

DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit

DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit

DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters

Fiber Ring, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m

Fiber Ring, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m

AFL NO.

DFS1-00-04XU

DFS1-00-04XA

DFS1-00-04XN

FR1-M5-150-x1-x2

a

FR1-L5-150-x1-x2

a

FR1-M6-150-x1-x2

a

FR1-SM-150-y1-y2

a

Fiber Ring, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m

Fiber Ring, single-mode, 150 m

Wet Cleaning Kit (shown) for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors

Dry Cleaning Kit

One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans)

One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans)

One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans)

8500-20-0900

8500-20-0901

8500-05-0001MZ

8500-05-0002MZ

8500-05-0005MZ

One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0006MZ

One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ

Zippered Jumper Carry Case 1400-01-0086PZ a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1,y2).

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C850-00-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-08

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

89

Certification Products

C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit

Features

OTDR dynamic range: 22 dB (MM); 26 dB (SM)

Inspection capable with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Integrated OPM, OLS, and VFL (650 nm)

OLS sources: LED - 850/1300 nm; Laser - 1310/1550 nm

Full Auto, Expert, Real-Time OTDR test modes

>8 hours battery life or AC power

Touch and Test ™ user interface; TRM ® reporting software

Automatic Pass/Fail analysis (TIA/ISO/EN)

Internal (1000s tests) and USB storage

Wave ID detect if used with Wave ID series light sources

Available in Seven languages

Applications

• Tier 1 and Tier 2 testing of premise networks

• Bi-directionally measure loss and length of fiber links

• Perform Pass/Fail Event and Link measurements using OTDR

• Measure loss and length of fiber links

• Certify SM and MM fibers using Pass/Fail criteria of industry standards, applications and user-defined thresholds

• Create professional certification reports

C860 with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

The C860 QUAD Certification and OTDR Test Kit from AFL includes one hand-held C840 QUAD OLTS Tester and one C850 QUAD OTDR/

OLTS with built-in auto test functionality. With this kit, technicians can troubleshoot and perform both Tier 1 and Tier 2 certification tests of MM and SM fiber networks, store results and create professional test reports.

The C850 is both a QUAD Certification Tester and full-featured QUAD OTDR in a compact case with a large transflective touch screen display suitable for both indoor and outdoor operation. The C850 features single-mode and multimode OTDR, Optical Light Sources

(OLS), Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), and an Optical Power Meter (OPM). As an OTDR, the C850 supports Full Auto, Expert

(manual) and Real-Time test modes, simultaneous dual and single wavelength testing, and Event and Pass/Fail analysis based on default or user-defined thresholds. The C840 QUAD Certification Tester includes VFL, OPM, and both single-mode (1310/1550 nm) and multimode (850/1300 nm) OLS. The C840 may be used alone as a traditional power meter or light source to measure fiber loss or as a visual fault locator to find fiber breaks.

The C860 kit combines ease of use (Touch and Test

) with multiple functionality and supports visual inspection per IEC 61300-3-35 using the DFS1 Digital FiberScope allowing users the ability to view and document connector end-face images with their OTDR traces and loss results. Thousands of test results may be stored internally or on the supplied USB drive. Test results are transferable via a USB cable or USB drive to a computer for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows

®

compatible software - TRM

®

(Test

Results Manager). Acceptance reports generated using TRM can include OTDR traces with summary and event information with or without pass/fail indication, Event maps, and end-face images.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C860-00-2000 Revision 1L, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

90

C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit

Specifications a

OTDR

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Center Wavelengths

Wavelength Tolerance

Dynamic Range (SNR = 1)

Event Dead Zone

b

Attenuation Dead Zone

c

Pulse Widths

Range Settings

Sampling Points

Minimum Data Point Spacing

Group Index of Refraction

(GIR)

Distance Uncertainty (m)

d

Linearity

e

Loss Threshold

Loss Resolution

Reflectance Accuracy

f

VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Wavelength

Output Power (nominal)

MULTIMODE

±20/30 nm

22 dB

1.5 m

9 m

0.25 m

±(1 + 0.005 % x distance + data point spacing)

±0.05 dB/dB

0.05 dB

0.01 dB

±2 dB

SINGLE-MODE

Laser

Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

850/1300 nm 1310/1550 nm

±20/30 nm

26 dB

10, 30, 100, 300 ns; 1, 3, 10 µs

250 m to 64 km 250 m to 208 km

Up to 16,000

1.4000 to 1.6000

Laser

Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

650 ±20 nm

0.8 mW

POWER METER

Calibrated Wavelengths

Detector Type

Measurement Range

Accuracy

h

Measurement Units

Wavelength ID

j

Set Reference

Data Storage

Tone Detection

LIGHT SOURCE

Available Wavelengths (nom.)

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Output Power

Stability (after 15 minutes warm up)

Wave ID Transmit

Tone Generation

MM PORT

850/1300 nm

LED

SM PORT

1310/1550 nm

Laser

Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

>-20 dBm, 62.5 µm MM

g

0 dBm, 9 µm SM

±0.1 dB over 1 hour ±0.07 dB over 1 hour

±0.15 dB over 8 hours

Yes

270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 KHz, 2 kHz

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 25 °C unless otherwise specified.

b. Typical distance between the two points 1.5 dB down each side of a reflective spike caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width. c. Typical distance from event location to point where trace is within 0.5 dB of backscatter caused by a -45 dB event using 10 ns pulse width.

d. Does not include GIR uncertainty.

e. Typical.

f. For a non-saturated event.

850, 1300 1310, 1490, 1550, 1625 nm

InGaAs 2 mm

+6 to -60 dBm

±0.25

dB, dBm, mW

Yes (to -47 dBm)

Yes

Yes

Yes (to -47 dBm)

GENERAL

Test Modes

Trace File Format

Length Measurement Range

Data Storage

Data Storage Capacity

Data Transfer to PC

Tool Free Adapters

Size

Weight

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Power

Battery Life

k, m

Recharge Time

l, m

Display

C850 OTDR C840 TESTER

OTDR (Full Auto, Expert,

Real-Time), Auto Test,

OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS

SR-4731 (GR-196-CORE

Appendix A, B; SR-4731)

Auto Test,

OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS

N/A

5 km (MM); 200 km (SM)

Internal flash memory

USB flash drive (2.0)

Downloadable from unit directly to PC

Internal >1000 fibers

USB

Modular cleanable SC/ST/LC

27.4 x 19.3 x 7.1 cm

(10.8 x 7.6 x 2.8 in)

23 x 11 x 7 cm

(8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in)

2.3 kg ( 5 lb) 0.9 kg (2 lb)

-10 °C to +50 °C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)

-20 °C to +60 °C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)

Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter

>8 hours continuous testing

4 hours

16.51 cm (6.5 in), color, transreflective

8.9 cm (3.5 in), color, transreflective g. Output power will be approximately 3 dB less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper.

h. Accuracy measured at 25 ºC and -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.

j. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with Wave ID

Series Light Sources.

k. Typical, depending on display brightness.

l. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. m. External battery charger available.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C860-00-2000 Revision 1L, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

91

C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit

The C840 and C850 can be used together to perform Tier 1 dual wavelength MM (850/1300 nm) and SM (1310/1550 nm) auto loss tests of one or two fibers in one or both directions as well as measure both loss and length of the fibers and compare to industry standards (TIA/ISO/EN), applications and userdefined thresholds values to certify the fibers. Either unit can be identified as the Main or Remote.

The user may test two fibers at two wavelengths bi-directionally and store the results into the main unit. Featuring rich file naming, the Job setup wizard allows the user to define both the cable and fiber end locations, creating easily identifiable trace files, which are managed into Job and Cable folders.

The C850 OTDR and C840 Certification tester work with the

DFS1 Digital FiberScope.

Ordering Information

When placing an order, select options as follows: Model, Optical Configuration, Language, and Case.

Example: C860 — 100 — LP1 — H1

C860

NNN LLL CC

Model

C860

Optical Configuration (NNN)

100 = QUAD 850/1300 nm MM

and 1310/1550 nm SM

Case (CC)

H1 = Hard and soft case with SC-LC cleaning accessories

Language (LLL)

LP1 = Language: English, French, German,

Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish

Specify Language when ordering a C860 Kit to indicate language preference of OTDR Quick Reference Guide.

Specify power cord type (country) when ordering a C860 Kit. One power cord is included with each AC adapter at no charge.

Additional power cords may be purchased separately.

92

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C860-00-2000 Revision 1L, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

C860 QUAD OTDR and Certification Test Kit

Ordering Information (continued)

Each kit includes one compact C850 QUAD OTDR/OLTS, one hand-held C840 QUAD Certification Tester, USB Flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and certification or OPM loss reporting, (2) AC adapters, switchable test ports adapters, and accessories (see below). The C860 hard carry case kit has room for up to 6 Fiber Rings, jumpers in a jumper carry case, and the DFS1 Digital FiberScope kit (accessory items must be ordered separately).

CARRY CASE

Soft (C850) and hard cases

OTDR/OLS

SC, ST, LC

ADAPTERS

OPM

SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm

C860—100—LP1—H1

ITEM

C850

C840

Adapters

DESCRIPTION

QUAD OTDR/Auto Test Certification Tester

QUAD Auto Test Certification Tester

Miscellaneous

Accessories

OTDR and OLS ports — SC, ST, LC

OPM ports — SC, 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal

VFI ports — 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal

Mandrels (2) 62.5 µm, 3 mm jacket and (2) 50 µm, 3 mm jacket

Stylus pens for touch screen. USB thumb drive, 1G.

USB to mini-USB cable

Small plastic parts box (2) to store adapter caps and mandrels

AC adapter (2), specify country of use

Cleaning

Accessories

Cases

(2) One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm; One-Click Cleaner LC/

MU, 1.25 mm (H2 kit only); CleanConnect 500

Hard transit case — holds C850, C840, and above accessories

Soft case for C850

Report Software PC software and user guide

VFI

2.5, 1.25 mm

CLEANING PRODUCTS

One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5mm

One-Click Cleaner LC, 1.25 mm

CleanConnect 500

AFL NO.

C860-100-LP1-H1

OTDR, Inspection, and Cleaning Accessories

DESCRIPTION

DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit

AFL NO.

DFS1-00-04XU

DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit

DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters

Wet Cleaning Kit (shown) for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors.

DFS1-00-04XA

DFS1-00-04XN

Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, 50/125 µm multimode, 150 m

FR1-M5-150-x1-x2 a

Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, Laser Optimized, 50 µm multimode, 150 m FR1-L5-150-x1-x2 a

Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, 62.5/125 mm multimode, 150 m

FR1-M6-150-x1-x2 a

Fiber Ring, 1 fiber, single-mode, 150 m

FR1-SM-150-y1-y2

8500-20-0900 a

Dry Cleaning Kit

One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans)

One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans)

8500-20-0901

8500-05-0001MZ

8500-05-0002MZ

One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans)

One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans)

8500-05-0005MZ

8500-05-0006MZ

One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ

Zippered Jumper Carry Case 1400-01-0086PZ

Notes:

a. When ordering Fiber Rings, specify connector types (x1, x2, y1,y2).

NO

YES F

IBER SYSTEM

S

ISO

CERTIFIED

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C860-00-2000 Revision 1L, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

93

C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit

Features

• Hand-held, 0.9 kg (2 lb)

• Inspection capable with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope

• Integrated OPM, OLS, and VFL (650 nm)

• OLS sources: LED - 850/1300 nm; Laser - 1310/1550 nm

• Dual-wavelength certification Pass/Fail

• Two fibers bi-directional and single fiber testing

• >8 hours battery life or AC power

• Touch and Test

user interface

• TRM

®

(Test Results Manager) reporting software

• Internal (1000s tests) and USB storage

• USB host and function ports

• Available in seven languages

C860 with DFS1 Digital FiberScope

Applications

• Tier 1 testing of premise networks

• Bi-directionally measure loss and length of fiber links

• Save time simultaneously testing two fibers at two wavelengths

• Verify polarity

• Certify SM and MM networks to industry standards (ISO/TIA/EN) and applications

• Find faults using integrated Visual Fault Locator

• Create and test to user defined rules

• Review Pass/Fail feedback after each test

• Review fibers by cable and retest fiber pairs if needed

• Create professional certification reports

Combining two C840 Certification Testers, the C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit from AFL is designed for testing and troubleshooting both multimode and single-mode fiber links. Each tester includes an integrated Visual Fault Locator (VFL, 650 nm), both single-mode

(Laser 1310/1550 nm) and multimode (LED 850/1300 nm) Optical Light Sources (OLS), and an Optical Power Meter (OPM). Each tester may be used alone as a traditional power meter, light source, or visual fault locator.

In Auto Test mode, the user may perform certification tests to one of the industry cabling standards (TIA, ISO, EN), one or more application standards, or a user-defined loss/length limit. Certification reports may be generated based on the selected standards and rules using PC reporting software. The transflective touch-screen display of the C840 tester is suitable for both indoor and outdoor operation.

The C840 supports visual inspection per IEC 61300-3-35 using the DFS1 Digital FiberScope allowing users the ability to view and document connector end-face images. Thousands of test results may be stored internally for transfer to a computer via a USB cable or a standard USB drive for viewing, printing, and analyzing with the supplied Windows

®

compatible software - TRM

®

(Test Results

Manager). Acceptance reports generated using TRM can include certification reports and end-face images.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C880-00-2000 Revision 1J, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

94

C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit

Ordering Information

Each C880 kit or C840 kit includes two (2) C840s or one (1) C840 Tester respectively, USB flash drive, PC software for OTDR trace analysis and certification or OPM loss reporting, AC adapters (two (2) with C880 kit, one (1) with C840 kit), switchable test ports adapters, and accessories (see table below).

CARRY CASE AFL NO.

Soft case

Soft case

Soft case

TEST CORDS

a

ADAPTERS

SC/LC

OLS

SC, ST, LC

SC/ST

SC, ST, LC

SC, ST, LC

CLEANING PRODUCTS

OPM VFI

SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm

One-Click Cleaner LC, 1.25 mm

SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm

SC, 2.5, 1.25 mm 2.5, 1.25 mm One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm

C880-100-LP1-S1

C880-100-LP1-S2

C840-100-LP1-S1

The C840 Certification Tester works with the DFS1 Digital FiberScope.

When placing an order, select options as follows: Model, Optical Configuration, Language, and Case.

Example: C880 — 100 — LP1 — S1

C880

NNN

Model

C880

Optical Configuration (NNN)

100 = QUAD 850/1300 nm MM

and 1310/1550 nm SM

C880—100—LP1—S1 (or S2) C880 Kit Contents

ITEM

C840

Adapters

Jumpers (12)

Miscellaneous

Accessories

Cleaning

Accessories

Cases

Report Software

DESCRIPTION

QUAD Auto Test Certification Tester (2 ea)

OLS Ports — SC, ST, LC

OPM port — SC, 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal

VFI port — 1.25 and 2.5 mm Universal

2 m (62.5 mm, 50 mm, SM)

Mandrels (2) — 62.5 mm, 3 mm jacket

Mandrels (2) — 50 mm, 3 mm jacket

Stylus pens for touch screen

USB flash drive -1G, USB to mini-USB cable

AC adapters (2), specify country of use

(2) One-Click Cleaner SC/ST/FC, 2.5 mm (S1 and S2 kit)

One-Click Cleaner LC/MU, 1.25 mm (S1 kit only)

Soft case (2)

PC software and user guide

Notes:

a. (4) each - 2 m (62.5µm, 50 µm, SM).

LLL CC

Case (CC)

S1 = Soft case for C840 (two units) with SC-LC test and cleaning accessories

S2 = Soft case for C840 (two units) with SC-ST test and cleaning accessories

Language (LLL)

LP1 = Language: English, French, German,

Italian, Polish, Portuguese, Spanish

Inspection and Cleaning Accessories

DESCRIPTION

DFS1 Digital FiberScope PC/UPC Inspection Kit

DFS1 Digital FiberScope APC Inspection Kit

DFS1 USB Digital Fiber Inspection Kit without Adapters

Wet Cleaning Kit (shown) for SC/FC/ST/LC connectors

AFL NO.

DFS1-00-04XU

DFS1-00-04XA

DFS1-00-04XN

8500-20-0900

Dry Cleaning Kit

One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500+ cleans)

One-Click Cleaner LC/MU (500+ cleans)

One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100+ cleans)

8500-20-0901

8500-05-0001MZ

8500-05-0002MZ

8500-05-0005MZ

One-Click Mini-100 LC/MU (100+ cleans) 8500-05-0006MZ

One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 SC, ST, FC (enlarged cleaning) 8500-05-0007MZ

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C880-00-2000 Revision 1J, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

95

C880 QUAD Certification Test Kit

Specifications a

POWER METER

Auto Test Wavelengths 850/1300 nm (MM), 1310/1550 nm (SM)

Detector Type InGaAs 2 mm

Measurement Range

Accuracy

b

Measurement Units

+6 to -60 dBm

±0.25

dB, dBm, mW

Yes (to -47 dBm)

Wavelength ID

c

Set Reference

Data Storage

Tone Detection

Yes

Yes

Yes (to -47 dBm)

LIGHT SOURCE

Available Wavelengths

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Output Power

Stability (after 15- minute warm-up)

Wave ID Transmit

Tone Generation

MULTIMODE PORT SINGLE-MODE PORT

850/1300 nm (nominal) 1310/1550 nm (nominal)

LED Laser

Class I FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC EN60825-1: 2007-03

>-20 dBm, 62.5 µm MM

d

0 dBm, 9 µm SM

±0.1 dB over 1 hour ±0.07 dB over 1 hour

±0.15 dB over 8 hours

Yes

270 Hz, 330 Hz, 1 KHz, 2 kHz

GENERAL

Test Modes Auto Test, OPM, OLS, VFL, DFS

Length Measurement Range 5 km (MM); 200 km (SM)

Data Storage Internal flash memory

Data Storage Capacity

USB flash drive (2.0)

Downloadable from unit directly to PC

Internal >1000 fibers

Data Transfer to PC

Tool Free Adapters

Size

Weight

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Power

Battery Life

e, g

Recharge Time

f, g

Display

USB

Modular cleanable SC/ST/LC

23 x 11 x 7 cm (8.8 x 4.3 x 2.8 in)

0.9 kg (2 lb)

-10°C to +50°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)

-20°C to +60°C, 0 to 90 % RH (non-condensing)

Rechargeable Li-Ion or AC power adapter

>8 hours continuous testing

4 hours

8.9 cm (3.5 in), color, transreflective

VISUAL FAULT LOCATOR

Emitter Type

Safety Class

Wavelength

Laser

Class II FDA 21 CFR 1040.10 and 1040.11,

IEC 60825-1: 2007-03

650 ±20 nm

Output Power (nominal) 0.8 mW

Notes:

a. All specifications valid at 25°C unless otherwise specified.

b. Accuracy measured at -10 dBm per N.I.S.T. standards.

c. Automatic wavelength identification and switching when used with Wave ID

Series Light Sources.

d. Output power will be approximately 3 dB less if a 50 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper is used instead of a 62.5 µm mandrel-wrapped jumper.

e. Typical, depending on display brightness.

f. Typical, from fully discharged to fully charged state, unit may be operating. g. External battery charger available.

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. C880-00-2000 Revision 1J, 2014-10-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

96

CON

NECTORS

Fiber Optic Cable

Connector Specifications

PARAMETER CONNECTOR

SC

Single-mode Assemblies

Image

FC ST LC MTP MT-RJ MU

Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Ultra Angle Flat

Insertion loss (dB)

Maximum

Typical

0 .2

0 .15

0 .25

0 .2

0 .2

0 .25

0 .25

0 .2

0 .2

0 .15

Return Loss (dB)

Minimum -55 dB -65 dB -55 dB -65 dB -55 dB —

Temp Range (°C) -40 to +85

Durability Cycles 500

-40 to +85

500

-40 to +85

500

0 .2

0 .15

-55 dB

-40 to +85

500

0 .25

0 .15

-65 dB

-40 to +75

200

Angle

0 .75

0 .35

Ultra

0 .5

0 .25

-40 to +75

200

Angle

-55 dB -35 dB —

Ultra

0 .25

0 .2

-55 dB

-40 to +85

500

Angle

Multimode Assemblies

Insertion loss (dB)

Maximum

Typical

0 .5

0 .25

Return Loss (dB)

Minimum -30 dB —

Temp Range (°C) -40 to +85

Durability Cycles 500

Cable Options

Applications

Simplex/Duplex

900 µm

1 .6 mm

2 .0 mm

2 .4 mm

3 .0 mm

Telephony

CATV/Broadband

Telco Backplanes

LAN/WAN

0 .5

0 .25

-40 to +85

500

-30 dB —

Simplex/Duplex

900 µm

1 .6 mm

2 .0 mm

2 .4 mm

3 .0 mm

Telephony

CATV/Broadband

Telco Backplanes

LAN/WAN

0 .5

0 .25

-30 dB —

-40 to +85

500

Simplex/Duplex

900 µm

1 .6 mm

2 .0 mm

2 .4 mm

3 .0 mm

Telephony

CATV/Broadband

Telco Backplanes

LAN/WAN

0 .5

0 .25

-30 dB

-40 to +85

500

Simplex/Duplex

900 µm

1 .6 mm

2 .0 mm

Telephony

CATV/Broadband

Telco Backplanes

LAN/WAN

0 .75

0 .35

-30 dB

-40 to +75

200

Bare Ribbon

Jacketed Ribbon

8-12 Fiber Count

Telephony

CATV/Broadband

Telco Backplanes

LAN/WAN

0 .5

0 .25

-20 dB

-40 to +75

200

Dual Link

Zipcord

Telephony

LAN/WAN

Bare Ribbon

Jacketed Ribbon

CATV/Broadband

Telco Backplanes

0 .5

0 .25

-20 dB

-40 to +85

500

900 µm

2 .0 mm

Telephony

CATV/Broadband

Telco Backplanes

LAN/WAN

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

97

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00047, Revision 2, 5.19.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Cable Assemblies – Indoor

BL

E

PA

TC

H &

TRUNK AS

SEM

BL

Fiber Optic Cable

Simplex Cable Assemblies

Simplex cable assemblies are offered with a variety of combinations . Connectors include

SC, FC, ST, LC and MU . 3 .0 mm, 2 .0 mm, 1 .6 mm, and 900 μm simplex cables in riser and plenum are available .

Features

• 3 .0 mm, 2 .0 mm, 1 .6 mm, and 900 μm cable diameter available

• RoHS compliant – Riser, Plenum, and LSZH rated cables available

• Cable compliant with Telcordia

®

GR-409

• Connectors compliant with Telcordia GR-326

Applications

• Building interconnections (campus LAN)

• Trunking lines direct to telecommunications closet

• Fiber patch panels within communications closets

• Links between electronic equipment and fiber patch panels

Cable Components

Connector End A

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

ALC = Angle LC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

UMA = Ultra MU

UMJ = Ultra MU-J

Multimode

PSC = SC MM

PFC = FC MM

PLC = LC MM

PST = ST MM

Ordering Information

ASC ASC RS 001

Connector End B Cable Type Fiber Count

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

ALC = Angle LC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

UMA = Ultra MU

UMJ = Ultra MU-J

XXX = No connector

RS = 3 .0 mm Riser

PS = 3 .0 mm Plenum

RM = 1 .6 m Riser

PM = 1 .6 mm Plenum

RT = 2 .0 mm Riser

PT = 2 .0 mm Plenum

JH = 900 µm

001 = 1

Multimode

PSC = SC MM

PFC = FC MM

PLC = LC MM

PST = ST MM

XXX = No connector

Q 0010

Fiber Type Cable Length (meters)

Q = Single-mode

R = Multimode 50/125

2 = Multimode 62 .5/125

L = 10G Laser Link 300

0010 = 10 meters

(specify length)

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00102, Revision 2, 5.19.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

98

Applications

• Service provider networks

• Central office and equipment buildings

• CATV carrier video systems

Features

CONNECTORS

• Ceramic ferrule utilized for precision fiber alignment

• Ribbed boot design on SC insures protected cable bending

• 40 degree LC boot option allows guided cable routing in DMX and DMXtend system applications

• Meets connector interface specifications of EIA .TIA-455 (FOCIS)

• All component materials are compliant to UL94 V-0

• Premium performance at standard grade prices

• Color-coded blue cable jacket identifies enhanced performance

• Tested in accordance with

Telcordia GR-326, issue 3 specifications

CABLE

• Fujikura fiber enables tight bend radius control and low loss

• Long term performance at a bend radius <15 mm

• Simplex, Duplex Dual-link, Quad and

8-fiber cable constructions are RoHS compliant

• Cable constructions meet or exceed

Telcordia GR-409

Bend Insensitive Cable Assemblies

AFL’s single-mode bend insensitive cable assemblies enable tight bend radii and routing to minimize signal loss due to high traffic and/or densely packed patch panel routing installations . Available in simplex, duplex, quad (4 fiber) and octo (8 fiber) cable configurations, either ultra or angled polished interfaces can be requested, thereby meeting low insertion loss and high return loss system requirements .

Various standard connector interface options are available and meet Telcordia

®

GR-326 performance requirements .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Insertion Loss

Return Loss

Cable Bend Radius

Durability

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature max typical max typical minimum

Ordering Information

SIMPLEX CABLE ASSEMBLIES,

2 MM JACKET DIAMETER

DESCRIPTION

USC-USC

ULC-ULC

ASC-ASC

UFC-UFC

AFC-AFC

USC-ULC

USC-ASC

USC-UFC

USC-AFC

ASC-AFC

USC-ULC (40° LC boot)

AFL NO.

C063770B-XXXX

C213707B-XXXX

C202687B-XXXX

C185200B-XXXX

C202691B-XXXX

C213712B-XXXX

C202702B-XXXX

C167091B-XXXX

C202705B-XXXX

C202696B-XXXX

CS001104B-XXXX

XXXX = Length (meters)

Example: 0010 = 10

VALUE

0 .25 dB

0 .15 dB

-65 dB (APC), -55 dB (UPC)

-68 dB (APC), -58 dB (UPC)

< 15 mm

200 cycles

-40°C to +85°C

-40°C to +85°C

DUPLEX DUAL-LINK CABLE ASSEMBLIES,

3.2 MM JACKET DIAMETER

DESCRIPTION

USC-USC

ULC-ULC

USC-ULC

USC-UFC

AFL NO.

C141246B-X

CS000813B-XXXX

CS000812B-XXXX

C124414B-XXXX

QUAD 4-FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES,

4.7 MM JACKET DIAMETER

DESCRIPTION

USC-USC

ULC-ULC

USC-ULC

USC-UFC

AFL NO.

C183518B-XXXX

CS000818B-XXXX

CS000661B-XXXX

C178379B-XXXX

OCTO 8-FIBER CABLE ASSEMBLIES,

5.2 MM JACKET DIAMETER

DESCRIPTION

USC-USC

ULC-ULC

USC-ULC

AFL NO.

CS000619B-XXXX

CS00815B-XXXX

CS000814B-XXXX

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00043, Revision 5, 5.19.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

99

Cable Components

Two-Fiber Cable Assemblies

Zipcord, Dual-Link and Ribbon cables are used to meet the requirements for two-fiber cable assemblies, utilizing SC, FC, ST, LC, MU and MT-RJ connectors .

Features

• Flexible, 2-fiber design

• RoHS compliant – Riser, Plenum and

LSZH rated cables available

• Cable compliant with Telcordia ® GR-409

• Connectors compliant with

Telcordia GR-326

Applications

• FDDI, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, ATM and

Fiber Channel protocols

• Communications closet to wall outlet

• Wall outlet to desk

• Interconnect and cross-connect applications

Ordering Information

UST

Connector End A

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

USF = Ultra SC Duplex

UDL = Ultra LC Duplex

SJF = MT-RJ Female

SJM = MT-RJ Male

Multimode

PSC = SC MM

PFC = FC MM

PLC = LC MM

PST = ST MM

PSF = SC Duplex MM

PDL = LC Duplex MM

PJF = MT-RJ Female MM

PJM = MT-RJ Male MM

UST RD 002

Connector End B

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

USF = Ultra SC Duplex

UDL = Ultra LC Duplex

SJF = MT-RJ Female

SJM = MT-RJ Male

XXX = No connector

Multimode

PSC = SC MM

PFC = FC MM

PLC = LC MM

PST = ST MM

PSF = SC Duplex MM

PDL = LC Duplex MM

PJF = MT-RJ Female MM

PJM = MT-RJ Male MM

XXX = No connector

Cable Type

RZ = 3 .0 mm Riser Zipcord

PZ = 3 .0 mm Plenum Zipcord

R20Z = 2 .0 mm Riser Zipcord

P20Z = 2 .0 mm Plenum Zipcord

R16Z = 1 .6 mm Riser Zipcord

P16Z = 1 .6 mm Plenum Zipcord

RD = Riser Dual Link

PD = Plenum Dual Link

Fiber Count

002 = 2

Q 0010

Fiber Type

Q = Single-mode

ITU-T G .652D

X = Single-mode

ITU-T G .657A BIF

2 = Multimode

62 .5/125 µm OM1

R = Multimode

50/125 µm OM2

L = Multimode

50/125 µm OM3/10G

Cable Length (meters)

XXXX (specify length)

0010 = 10 meters

NOTES: 1 . Refer to Connector Specifications page .

*

Single connector options, quantity two per end .

Duplex connectors are assembled with

removable clip .

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00106, Revision 2, 5.19.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

100

BL

E

PA

TC

H &

TRUNK AS

SEM

BL

Fiber Optic Cable

LC Uniboot Cable Assemblies

AFL’s LC Uniboot terminated cable assemblies offer a more compact design when compared to traditional duplex zipcord assemblies . These assemblies contain two LC connectors encased in a common housing with one boot, terminated on a single, round, two-fiber cable . Utilizing AFL’s DUAL-Link 2 .8 mm premise cable, LC Uniboot assemblies condenses the cable management to half the space used by regular zipcord assemblies .

AFL’s LC Uniboot cable assemblies offer the best solution for high-density applications .

Cable Components

Features

• LC duplex connector uses a single housing and single boot

• 2 .8 mm DUAL-Link cable; Riser, Plenum, and LSZH rated cables available

• RoHS compliant

• Connectors compliant with Telcordia ®

GR-326, TIA/EIA-604-10A(FOCIS 10)

• Cable compliant with Telcordia GR-409

Applications

• Private networks

• Data centers

• High density applications

• Interconnect and cross-connect

• Premise installations

Specifications

PARAMETER

Insertion Loss (typical)

Return Loss (typical)

Durability

Operating Temperature

Ferrule

VALUE

0 .15 dB (SM/MM)

-55 dB (SM), -30 dB (MM)

500 cycles

-40°C to +85°C

Zirconia

Ordering Information:

LC Uniboot to LC Uniboot, 2.8 mm Riser DUAL-Link Cable

FIBER TYPE

62 .5/125 µm (OM1)

50/125 µm (OM2)

50/125 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)

50/125 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)

Single-mode

AFL NO.

CS007814-XXXX

CS008116-XXXX

CS007783-XXXX

CS009233-XXXX

CS009234-XXXX

XXXX = Length (meters)

Example: 0010 = 10

Contact AFL Customer Service for information regarding plenum and LSZH rated assemblies .

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

101

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00082, Revision 1, 5.19.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Quad Cable Assemblies

Quad cable assemblies are available in a wide variety of configurations, to fit exact application needs . These assemblies are offered using four 900um coated fibers in one circular cable, featuring a 4 .8mm outer diameter .

Features

• 4 .8mm cable diameter allows flexibility and easy routing

• RoHS compliant - Riser, Plenum, and LSZH rated cables available

• 900um tight buffered fibers allow direct termination (no furcation needed)

• Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A/GR-409-CORE

• Connectors compliant with Telcordia GR-326

Cable Components Applications

• Loaded Panels

• Communications cables with both sendand-receive in a single unit

• Routing between communications closets and equipment rooms

• Intrabuilding backbones

Ordering Information

ASC ASC

Connector End A

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

USF = Ultra SC Duplex

UDL = Ultra LC Duplex

SJF = MT-RJ Female

SJM = MT-RJ Male

Connector End B

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

USF = Ultra SC Duplex

UDL = Ultra LC Duplex

SJF = MT-RJ Female

SJM = MT-RJ Male

XXX = No connector

Multimode

PSC = SC MM

PFC = FC MM

PLC = LC MM

PST = ST MM

PSF = SC Duplex MM

PDL = LC Duplex MM

PJF = MT-RJ Female MM

PJM = MT-RJ Male MM

Multimode

PSC = SC MM

PFC = FC MM

PLC = LC MM

PST = ST MM

PSF = SC Duplex MM

PDL = LC Duplex MM

PJF = MT-RJ Female MM

PJM = MT-RJ Male MM

XXX = No connector

RQ

Cable Type

RQ = Quad Riser

PQ = Quad Plenum

004

Fiber Count

004 = 4

Q 0010

Fiber Type

Q = Single-mode

ITU-T G .652D

X = Single-mode

ITU-T G .657A BIF

2 = Multimode

62 .5/125µm OM1

R = Multimode

50/125µm OM2

L = Multimode

50/125µm OM3/10G

Cable Length

(meters)

XXXX (specify length)

0010 = 10 meters

NF

Leg Diameter

NN = Non-furcated, both ends 900µm

FF = Furcated both ends

NF = 900µm end A,

Furcated end B

NOTES: 1 . Refer to Connector Specifications page .

2 . Duplex connectors are assembled with

removable clip .

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00098, Revision 2, 5.19.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

102

Ordering Information

ASC ASC

Connector End A

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

Connector End B

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

XXX = No connector

Multimode

PSC = SC MM

PFC = FC MM

PLC = LC MM

PST = ST MM

Multimode

PSC = SC MM

PFC = FC MM

PLC = LC MM

PST = ST MM

XXX = No connector

RC

Cable Type

RC = Riser (CPC)

PC = Plenum (CPC)

Circular Premise Cable (CPC) Assemblies

High-fiber count Circular Premise Cable (CPC) assemblies provide safe and cost effective installation for many applications . These assemblies help eliminate labor-intensive field termination, yet guarantee reliable performance . Featuring a unified construction for easy fiber identification and rapid installation, these assemblies are built to exceed all

TIA and Telcordia

®

requirements .

Features

• 6-144 fibers with aramid yarn reinforcement for rugged protection

• Highly flexible for ease of routing

• RoHS compliant - Riser, Plenum and

LSZH rated cables available

• Pre-installed pulling eye kits available on certain products

• 1 meter standard breakout (other lengths are custom)

• 900 µm tight buffered fibers allows direct termination; 2 .0 mm furcation available

• Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA

568-A/GR-409-CORE

• Telcordia GR-326 compliant connectors

Applications

• Head-end termination to a fiber "backbone"

• Termination of fiber rack systems

• Multi-floor deployment where select fibers are used at each floor

• Intrabuilding "backbones"

012

Fiber Count

006 = 6

012 = 12

024 = 24

036 = 36

048 = 48

072 = 72

096 = 96

144 = 144

Q 0010 NN

Fiber Type

Q = Single-mode

ITU-T G .652D

X = Single-mode

ITU-T G .657A BIF

2 = Multimode

62 .5/125 µm OM1

R = Multimode

50/125 µm OM2

L = Multimode

50/125 µm OM3/10G

Cable Length (meters)

XXXX (specify length)

0010 = 10 meters

Leg Diameter

N = 900 µm End A / XXX End B

NN = 900 µm End A and B

F = Furcated End A / XXX End B

FF = Furcated Ends A and B

FN = Furcated Ends A / 900 µm End B

NF = 900 µm End A / Furcated Ends B

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

103

NOTES: 1 . Refer to Connector Specifications page .

2 . Duplex SC and LC available

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00045, Revision 2, 5.19.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Sub-Unitized MicroCore

®

Trunk Cable Assemblies

BL

E

PA

TC

H &

TRUNK AS

SEM

BL

Features

• Sub-unitized design, with (12) 250 µm colored fibers per tube

• 12, 24, and 72 fiber counts (SM or 50

µm LOMMF) with active part numbers

• Small diameter provides superior bend performance

• Standard 2 .0 mm zipcord furcation for single fiber connectors

• One meter standard breakout

• Cable jackets & connector housings color-coded for easy identification

• Sub-unit legs identified for ease of channel routing/traceability

• Cable tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA

568-A/GR-409-CORE

• Telcordia ® GR-326 compliant connectors

Applications

• Data center systems wiring

• MTP-MTP or MTP-Fanouts, and Single

Fiber Connector Terminations

• Head-end termination to a fiber

"backbone"

• Termination of fiber rack systems

• Multi-floor deployment where select fibers are used at each floor

• Intrabuilding "backbones"

Sub-Unitized MicroCore

®

Trunk Cable Assemblies

Sub-unitized MicroCore trunk cable assemblies provide high performance for premise installations where space is a premium . The small diameter, sub-unitized design offers twelve 250 µm colored fibers per tube, with aramid strength members enclosed by a

PVC jacket, enabling high density architecture . The cable allows quick and efficient termination of MTP connectors, as well as, breakout capability to single fiber connectors .

Specifications

PARAMETER

SINGLE-MODE ASSEMBLIES

LC SC MTP

ULTRA ANGLED ULTRA ANGLED ANGLED

Insertion Loss (Typical dB)*** 0 .15

0 .15

Insertion Loss (Maximum dB) 0 .3

0 .3

Return Loss (Typical dB)*** -60 -70

0 .15

0 .3

-60

0 .15

0 .3

-70

0 .35

0 .75

-65

Return Loss (Minimum dB) -55

Temperature Range (°C) -40 to

+85

Durability Cycles 500

-65

-40 to

+85

500

-55

-40 to

+85

-65

-40 to

+85

500 500

-55

-40 to

+75

200

***

Typical values based on equal quality connectors

.

MULTIMODE ASSEMBLIES

LC SC

MTP

(LOW LOSS)

0 .15

0 .5

-35

-30

-40 to

+85

500

0 .15

0 .5

-35

-30

-40 to

+85

500

0 .15

0 .2

-30

-20

-40 to

+75

200

Ordering Information – MTP-MTP Assemblies

(Female MTPs on both ends – no pins)

(Polarity: Key Up/Key Up, Straight Through)

24

72

72

12

12

24

12

24

24

72

72

72

72

12

FIBER COUNT

12

12

24

24

NOTE: XXXX is length in meters

.

FIBER

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3)

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4)

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

Yes

PULLING EYE

No

Yes

No

Yes

Contact AFL Customer Service for additional polarity schemes available .

AFL NO.

CS009980-XXXX

CS009981-XXXX

CS009984-XXXX

CS009985-XXXX

CS009996-XXXX

CS009997-XXXX

CS010649-XXXX

CS010650-XXXX

CS003700-XXXX

CS009912-XXXX

CS003720-XXXX

CS010016-XXXX

CS008420-XXXX

CS010165-XXXX

CS010100-XXXX

CS010066-XXXX

CS010101-XXXX

CS010067-XXXX continued on next page

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00105, Revision 5, 5.18.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

104

BL

E

PA

TC

H &

TRUNK AS

SEM

BL

Sub-Unitized MicroCore

®

Trunk Cable Assemblies

72

12

12

24

24

72

FIBER

COUNT

12

12

72

12

12

24

24

24

24

72

72

72

Ordering Information – MTP Fanout Assemblies

(Male MTPs — Duplex Connectors)

FIBER

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

No

Yes

No

Single-mode Yes

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes

PULLING

EYE

No

Yes

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes

AFL NO.

MALE MTP-LC

DUPLEX

CS009521-XXXX

CS0010017-XXXX

CS003796-XXXX

CS010018-XXXX

CS003811-XXXX

CS010019-XXXX

CS011510-XXXX

CS010027-XXXX

CS003795-XXXX

CS010028-XXXX

CS003810-XXXX

CS010029-XXXX

CS009519-XXXX

CS010068-XXXX

CS010069-XXXX

CS010070-XXXX

CS010071-XXXX

CS010072-XXXX

MALE MTP-SC DUPLEX

CS010020-XXXX

CS010021-XXXX

CS010022-XXXX

CS010023-XXXX

CS010024-XXXX

CS010025-XXXX

CS010030-XXXX

CS010031-XXXX

CS010032-XXXX

CS010033-XXXX

CS010034-XXXX

CS010035-XXXX

CS010073-XXXX

CS010074-XXXX

CS010075-XXXX

CS010076-XXXX

CS010077-XXXX

CS010078-XXXX

Ordering Information – LC and SC Trunk Assemblies

(Duplex LC and SC Connectors)

24

24

72

72

12

12

12

24

24

72

FIBER

COUNT FIBER

12 Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode

Single-mode Yes

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) No

PULLING

EYE

No

Yes

No

Yes

No

72

12

12

50 µm 10gig 300 (OM3) Yes

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes

24

24

72

72

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) No

50 µm 10gig 550 (OM4) Yes

NOTE: XXXX is length in meters

.

AFL NO.

LC DUPLEX-

LC DUPLEX

LC DUPLEX-

SC DUPLEX

SC DUPLEX-

SC DUPLEX

CS010036-XXXX CS010038-XXXX CS010042-XXXX

CS010037-XXXX CS010039-XXXX CS010043-XXXX

CS004602-XXXX CS007203-XXXX CS007201-XXXX

CS004603-XXXX CS007204-XXXX CS007202-XXXX

CS004618-XXXX CS010040-XXXX CS010044-XXXX

CS004619-XXXX CS010041-XXXX CS010045-XXXX

CS010046-XXXX CS010048-XXXX CS010052-XXXX

CS010047-XXXX CS010049-XXXX CS010053-XXXX

CS004608-XXXX CS007221-XXXX CS007219-XXXX

CS004609-XXXX CS007222-XXXX CS007220-XXXX

CS004624-XXXX CS010050-XXXX CS010054-XXXX

CS004625-XXXX CS010051-XXXX CS010055-XXXX

CS010079-XXXX CS010085-XXXX CS010091-XXXX

CS010080-XXXX CS010086-XXXX CS010092-XXXX

CS010081-XXXX CS010087-XXXX CS010093-XXXX

CS010082-XXXX CS010088-XXXX CS010094-XXXX

CS010083-XXXX CS010089-XXXX CS010095-XXXX

CS010084-XXXX CS010090-XXXX CS010096-XXXX

© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00105, Revision 5, 5.18.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

105

Applications

• Multi-Dwelling Unit (MDU) drop cables for FTTH systems

• CATV Video systems

• LAN Networks

Features

CONNECTORS:

• Tested in accordance with Telcordia

GR-326, issue 3 specifications

• Meets SC interface specifications of

EIA .TIA-455-3 (FOCIS 3)

• All component materials are compliant to UL94 V-0

• Ceramic ferrule utilized for precision fiber alignment

• Keyed push-pull latching mechanism

• Connector housings are color coded

(Green) for APC identification and

-65 dB return loss

CABLE:

• Cable constructions meet or exceed

Telcordia GR-409

• 3 .0 mm cable diameter available in

Riser and Plenum grade

• Simplex and Duplex zipcord cable construction, RoHS compliant

• Cable manufactured using Corning

SMF-28e single-mode fiber

SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies

AFL single-mode SC Angled Pigtail Assemblies are designed to meet stringient performance requirements of the latest FTTH (Fiber to the Home) applications . Available in either simplex (one fiber) or duplex zipcord (two fiber) construction, the SC angled connector guarantees the high performance return loss required of video signals . Assemblies are tested and qualified to Telcordia

®

GR-326, Issue 3 requirements and meet all

EIA .TIA 455-3 (FOCIS 3) interface standards for SC connectors . The assemblies are provided in easy-to-install disposable packaging reels up to 300 feet, in 50-foot increments .

Specification

PARAMETER

Insertion loss maximum

typical

Return Loss maximum

typical

Durability

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

VALUE

0 .25 dB

0 .15 dB

-65 dB

-68 dB

200 cycles

-40°C to + 85°C

-40°C to + 85°C

Cable Components

Simplex

Duplex Zipcord

Ordering Information

RISER GRADE, SINGLE-ENDED, 3 MM

LENGTH

(FEET)

50

100

150

200

250

300

AFL NO.

SIMPLEX

DUPLEX

ZIPCORD

CS000686-0050 CS000688-0050

CS000686-0100 CS000688-0100

CS000686-0150 CS000688-0150

CS000686-0200 CS000688-0200

CS000686-0250 CS000688-0250

CS000686-0300 CS000688-0300

PLENUM GRADE, SINGLE-ENDED, 3 MM

LENGTH

(FEET)

50

100

150

200

250

300

AFL NO.

SIMPLEX

DUPLEX

ZIPCORD

CS000698-0050 CS000700-0050

CS000698-0100 CS000700-0100

CS000698-0150 CS000700-0150

CS000698-0200 CS000700-0200

CS000698-0250 CS000700-0250

CS000698-0300 CS000700-0300

PLENUM-RISER GRADE, SINGLE-ENDED, 3MM

LENGTH

(FEET)

50

100

150

200

250

300

SIMPLEX

AFL NO.

DUPLEX

ZIPCORD

CS000704-0050 CS000706-0050

CS000704-0100 CS000706-0100

CS000704-0150 CS000706-0150

CS000704-0200 CS000706-0200

CS000704-0250 CS000706-0250

CS000704-0300 CS000706-0300

Duplex Single-Jacket

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc .

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00101, Revision 2, 5.19.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

106

Features

• Field proven, durable, connecting hardware

• High-quality optical terminations meet all geometric and optical performance requirements

• Ordering flexibility; available in standard and custom lengths and connector counts

• Mini-central core type cable ≤12 fibers; stranded cable >12 fibers

• Installed hard-line entry connector with anti-twist design

• Individualized serial numbers for easy identification

• SC/UPC, FC/UPC, SC/APC, FC/APC,

LC/UPC, and MPO

• Rugged polyurethane riser-rated indoor/ outdoor loose tube single-mode uniflex cable; armored polyethylene jacket or heavy duty polyurethane uniflex

• 900 µm or 2 .0 mm / 3 .0 mm upjacketed color-coded furcation, breakout length 1 meter

Ordering Information

ASC XXX

Connector End A

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

MPO = Angle MPO

Connector End B

Single-mode

XXX = No connector

NC

Cable Type

NC = Uni-Flex

AN = Armored PE

HD = Heavy Duty

Uniflex

Node Cable Assemblies

AFL’s Node Cable Assemblies are factory tested to meet stringent installation performance demands . These assemblies make splicing from an optical node to a closure fast, easy and reliable . This connection is critical to the installation and requires an environmental seal between the cable and the node housing . AFL’s assembly comes with node fitting pre-installed on the cable, featuring an anti-twist design enabling easy mounting without twisting the cable . The mounting thread is an industry standard size of 5/8-24 UNEF .

AFL’s Node assembles feature loose-tube outdoor cable with a water-blocked cable design .

An assortment of industry standard connector styles are available such as SC/APC, SC/UPC,

FC/APC, FC/UPC, LC/UPC, and MPO . Standard or custom breakout lengths are available with standard fiber counts of 1 thru 12 terminations (>12 fibers also available), with all fibers color coded for quick/easy fiber identification .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Operating Temperature °F (°C)

Storage Temperature °F (°C)

Crush Resistance lbs (kg)

Impact Resistance

Flexing

Fiber Core Diameter (microns)

Maximum Insertion Loss (dB)

UPC Return Loss (dB)

APC Return Loss (dB)

Outer Jacket Material

Finish

Cable Pullout Tensile Strength lbs (kg)

Entry Threads in .

Dimensions in . (cm)

COLOR FURCATION - FIBER NUMBER REFERENCE

1

2

3

Blue

Orange

Green

4

5

6

Brown

Slate

White 9

7

8

VALUE

-40 to 158 (-40 to 70)

-58 to 158 (-50 to 70)

1000 (453 .5 kg)

25 lbs @ 2 .2 lbs per foot (11 .25 kg @ 0 .99 kg)

25 lbs @ 5 in . (11 .25 kg @ 12 .7 kg)

8 .3

0 .25 (UPC), 0 .35 (APC), 0 .5 (MPO)

-55

-65

Riser-rated PU / PE

Alumnium, Anodized

247 (112 .04)

0 .625 x 24

4 .25 long x 0 .875 diameter (10 .8 x 2 .22)

Red

Black

Yellow

10

11

12

Violet

Rose

Aqua

GROMMET SPECIFICATIONS - STANDARD D

Inner Diameter

Active Pull Test

0 .375"

35 lbs

Overall length

Hex Nut Size

45 mm

7/8"

Length from Hex Nut to end of front body 6 mm

Material Aluminum, Anodized

012 Q

002 = 2

004 = 4

006 = 6

008 = 8

010 = 10

012 = 12

Fiber Count

MPO (only)

008 = 8

012 = 12

(Higher fiber counts available upon request)

Fiber Type

Q = Single-mode

0010

Cable Length (meters)

XXXX (specify length)

0010 = 10 meters

N

Leg Diameter

N = 900 µm End A

F = 2 .0 mm Furcated

End A

M = 3 .0 mm Furcated

End A

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00158, Revision 2, 9.23.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

107

Features

• Field proven, durable connecting hardware

• High quality optical terminations meet all geometric and optical performance requirements

• Ordering flexibility; available in standard and custom lengths and connector counts

• Mini-central core type cable

• Installed hard-line entry connector

• Gel-filled cable

• Individualized serial numbers

• SC/UPC, FC/UPC, SC/APC, FC/APC,

LC/UPC

• Two to twelve fiber counts available

LightLink Fiber Receiver Service

Cable Assemblies (FRSC)

AFL’s LightLink Fiber Receiver Service (Node Service) cable assemblies are factory tested to meet stringent installation performance demands . These assemblies make splicing from an optical node to a closure fast, easy and reliable . This connection is critical to the installation and requires an environmental seal between the cable and the node housing . AFL’s assembly comes with this node fitting pre-installed on the cable, featuring an anti-twist design enabling easy mounting without twisting the cable . The mounting thread is an industry standard size of 5/8-24 UNEF .

AFL’s FRSC assembles feature loose-tube outdoor cable with a water-blocked cable design . An assortment of industry standard connector styles are available such as

SC/APC, SC/UPC, FC/APC, FC/UPC, and LC/UPC . Standard or custom breakout lengths are available with fiber counts of 1 thru 12 terminations, with all fibers color coded for quick/easy fiber identification .

Fiber Receiver Service Cable with Armored PE Jacket

Specifications

PARAMETER

Operating Temperature °F (°C)

Storage Temperature °F (°C)

Crush Resistance lbs . (kg)

Impact Resistance

Flexing

Fiber Core Diameter (microns)

Maximum Insertion Loss (dB)

UPC Return Loss (dB)

APC Return Loss (dB)

Outer Jacket Material

Finish

Cable Pullout Tensile Strength lbs . (kg)

Entry Threads in .

Dimensions in . (cm)

VALUE

-40 to 158 (-40 to 70)

-58 to 158 (-50 to 70)

1000 (453 .5 kg)

25 lbs . @ 2 .2 lbs . per foot (11 .25 kg @ 0 .99 kg)

25 lbs . @ 5 in . (11 .25 kg @ 12 .7 kg)

8 .3

0 .25 (UPC), 0 .35 (APC)

-55

-65

Riser-rated PVC

Nickel-tin plated brass

247 (112 .04)

0 .625 x 24

4 .25 long x 0 .875 diameter (10 .8 x 2 .22)

108

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00086, Revision 1, 1.25.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink Fiber Receiver Service

Cable Assemblies (FRSC)

Fiber Receiver Service Cable with

Non-Armored All-Dielectric UniFlex

Features

• Polyurethane riser rated indoor/outdoor loose tube single-mode cable

• Polyurethane jacket reinforced with aramid yard for exceptional durability

• Easy installation

• Design eliminates movement of cable components

• 900µm or 2 .4mm upjacketed color-coded legs, 2 .0mm LC

• Breakout length 1 meter

• Available in single-mode pigtails

• Pulling strength in excess of 150 lbs .

• Anti-twist crimp

• Flexible bend radius of 19cm for installation and 10cm for operation

• Variety of single-mode connector styles

(not available in multimode)

• Cable cut and terminated to custom lengths

• Connector ends clearly labeled for quick identification

• Available in fiber counts from 2-12 fibers

• Ultra Polish available for all connector types

• Angle Polish available on FC and SC connectors

Specifications

2

3

COLOR FURCATION - FIBER NUMBER REFERENCE

1 Blue 4 Brown 7

Orange

Green

5

6

Slate

White

8

9

Red

Black

Yellow

10

11

12

Violet

Rose

Aqua

GROMMET SPECIFICATIONS - STANDARD D

Inner Diameter 0 .375”

Active Pull Test 35 lbs .

Overall length

Hex Nut Size

Length from Hex Nut to end of front body

Material

45mm

7/8”

6mm

Aluminum Gold Anodized

Ordering Information

ASC XXX

Connector End A

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

Connector End B

Single-mode

XXX = No connector

NC

Cable Type

NC = Uni-Flex

AN = Armored PE

012

Fiber Count

002 = 2

004 = 4

006 = 6

008 = 8

010 = 10

012 = 12

Q

Fiber Type

Q = Single-mode

0010

Cable Length (meters)

XXXX (specify length)

0010 = 10 meters

N

Leg Diameter

N = 900µm End A

F = Furcated End A

109

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00086, Revision 1, 1.25.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Applications

• Outdoor Cabinets

• External-Building Runs

• Vaults

• CEV’s

Specifications

Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube

Riser Rated stranded design loose tube cable is moisture and U .V . resistant, S-Z stranded for easy mid-span access, UL-listed type OFNR (UL1666) riser-rated, and can be used in both duct and lashed applications .

Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor

Loose Tube Cable Assemblies

High fiber count Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor Loose Tube Cable assemblies provide a safe and proven method of utilizing preterminated connector technology for outside plant applications . These assemblies help control cost by eliminating labor- intensive field termination and provide the same factory terminated reliability the industry has trusted for many years . Cable assemblies are available in Indoor/Outdoor Loose

Tube, suitable for use in both indoor and outdoor applications . Each unit is manufactured to exceed all TIA and Telecordia requirements .

Features

• Fiber counts from 6 to 144 fibers

• Available with ST, SC, FC, and LC connectors single-mode

• Pigtail assemblies, standard configuration (nonstandard configurations available)

• ST, SC, FC and LC connectors available in both single-mode and multimode

• Pre-installed pulling eye kits available

• 1 meter standard breakout length

• 2 .4mm standard furcation for

SC, FC, and ST

• 1 .6mm standard furcation for LC

• UV resistant outer jacket

• Gel-filled loose buffer tubes (RL),

Gel-filled Loose Tube (LT)

• Meets Telcordia GR-20-CORE

Cable Components

binder binder rip cord rip cord

Temperature Range

PARAMETER

Operating

Storage

Installation

VALUE

-40°C to +70°C

-40°C to +75°C

0°C to +70°C

Loose Tube

Loose Tube stranded design cables feature fiber counts up to 432, compliance with EIA/TIA and REA/RUS

PE-90, and are S-Z stranded for easy mid-span access .

Cable Components

polyethylene jacket polyester tape optical fiber

FRP central member rip cord water-blocking system gel-filled loose buffer tube

Temperature Range

PARAMETER

Operating

Storage

Installation

VALUE

-40°C to +70°C

-40°C to +75°C

-30°C to +70°C

NOTE: Refer to page on Connector Specifications .

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00090, Revision 2, 11.22.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

110

Loose Tube & Riser Rated Indoor/

Outdoor Loose Tube Cable Assemblies

Dimensions

Ordering Information

ASC ASC

Connector End A

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

Connector End B

Single-mode

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

UST = Ultra ST

ULC = Ultra LC

XXX = No connector

LT 024

Cable Type

LT = Loose Tube

RL = Riser Rated Indoor/Outdoor

Loose Tube

Fiber Count

006 = 6

012 = 12

024 = 24

036 = 36

048 = 48

072 = 72

096 = 96

144 = 144

Lengths Available

Cable lengths are dependent on fiber cable type and count . Consult customer service for maximum lengths available .

Q

Fiber Type

Q = Single-mode

X = Single-mode

ITU-T G .657A BIF

0010 NN

Cable Length (meters)

XXXX (specify length)

0010 = 10 meters

Leg Diameter

N = 900µm End A / XXX End B

NN = 900µm End A and B

F = Furcated End A / XXX End B

FF = Furcated Ends A and B

FN = Furcated Ends A / 900µm End B

NF = 900µm End A / Furcated Ends B

111

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00090, Revision 2, 11.22.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for MDU Applications

Used in MDU applications, the Future Access Single-Fiber HFOC (Hardened Fiber Optic

Connector) Drop Cable provides a quick and easy installation from the pre-installed

HFOC terminal residing on a pole, pedestal or hand-hole to a far end termination .

With environmentally-sealed SC/APC connectors, the Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable is factory terminated using dielectric or toneable flat cables in customer specified lengths, single or doubled-ended . The single-fiber drop cable saves time and money with faster deployments in the optical FTTx network .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Connector Type

Max . Insertion Loss

Min . Return Loss

VALUE

SC/APC

<0 .35 dB

-65 dB

Features

• Environmentally sealed SC/APC connectors equipped with protective cap

• Factory termination – single or doubleended

• Faster deployment, saving time and money

• Cable available in dielectric or toneable flat drop and in varying lengths

• Tested to Telcordia GR-3120 requirement

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Single-ended Dielectric

Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Single-ended Toneable

Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Double-ended Dielectric

Single-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – Double-ended Toneable

NOTE: XXXX is the length in feet .

Application

AFL NO.

CS002823-XXXXFT

CS008995-XXXXFT

CS008994-XXXXFT

CS008993-XXXXFT

FutureAccess is a registered trademark of Fujikura Ltd .

112

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00126, Revision 1, 4.5.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for the

MDU Splice and Distribution Enclosure

The Future Access 4-Fiber HFOC (Hardened Fiber Optic Connector) Drop Cable is used in MDU application where FTTP services are to be provisioned using indoor single family unit (SFU) ONTs . The use of the 4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable allows quick and easy installation from the pre-installed HFOC terminal usually residing on a pole, pedestal or hand-hole run to the side of the MDU building . Used in conjunction with the LightLink™ LL-500-DS MDU Splice and Distribution Enclosure, the output of the

4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable is spliced inside the LL-500-DS to (4) 2 mm pigtails which than terminate to SC-APC adapters . The output fibers will be standard MDU drop cables running to each individual dwelling unit inside the building . This enclosure is mounted on the outside of an MDU building allowing splicing and distribution for up to 12 SFU dwellings in 4-fiber increments .

Features

• Four environmentally sealed SC/APC connectors

• Each connector marked for fiber identification and equipped with protective cap

• Fully sealed transition fan-out into individual 48” long single fiber HFOC tethers

• Tested to Telcordia GR-3120 and GR-771 requirements

• Available in dielectric or toneable flat drop cable

• Available in 200 or 500 foot lengths

Specifications

PARAMETER

Connector Type

Max . Insertion Loss

Min . Return Loss

VALUE

SC/APC

<0 .35 dB

-65 dB

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 200 Feet Dielectric

4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 500 Feet Dielectric

4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 200 Feet Toneable

4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable – 500 Feet Toneable

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

LL-500-DS Enclosure

LL-500-DS Expansion Kit (allows additional 4-fiber splices and terminations)

AFL NO.

CS004232-0200FT

CS004232-0500FT

CS004233-0200FT

CS004233-0500FT

AFL NO.

FC000570

FC000574

113

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00166, Revision 2, 11.3.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Future Access™

4-Fiber HFOC Drop Cable for the

MDU Splice and Distribution Enclosure

Application

114

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00166, Revision 2, 11.3.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Connectors and Accessories

Features

• No Epoxy, No Polish

• Low Insertion Loss

• Fiber Can Be Reinserted up to Three Times

• 3 .0 mm, 2 .0 mm and 900 μm

Cordage Compatibility

• VFI Accessory to Confirm

Proper Installation

Applications

• Premise/Enterprise Networks

• LAN/WAN Connections

• Patch Panels

• Equipment Termination

• FTTx Applications

• Field Repair/Replacement

• Equipment Test Leads

FASTConnect

®

Field-Installable Connectors

FASTConnect are factory pre-polished, field-installable connectors that completely eliminate the need for hand polishing in the field . Proven mechanical splice technology ensuring precision fiber alignment, a factory pre-cleaved fiber stub and a proprietary index-matching gel combine to offer an immediate low loss termination to either single-mode or multimode optical fibers . FAST Connectors are compatible with

250 µm and 900 µm optical fibers, as well as 900 µm, 2 mm and 3 mm cordage .

All primary fiber types are supported, and each connector is color coded per industry standard requirements to aide in identification during and after installation .

A factory-installed wedge clip (included with each connector) is removed and discarded upon completion of the termination . Incorporated into this device is an innovative, translucent wedge enabling the use of a common VFI to provide a "pass/fail" signal once physical contact is achieved .

Specifications

PARAMETER

Insertion Loss:

Return Loss at Room Temperature:

Single-mode - UPC

Single-mode - APC

Multimode - PC

Single-mode - UPC

Single-mode - APC-AU*

Single-mode - APC-AA**

Multimode

Operating Temperature

*Angle/Flat Cleaves

**Angle/Angle Cleaves

TIA/EIA-568-C .3 Compliant

TIA/EIA-604 (FOCIS) Compliant

VALUE

Average: 0 .2 dB, Maximum: 0 .5 dB

Average: 0 .3 dB, Maximum: 0 .6 dB

Average: 0 .1 dB, Maximum: 0 .5 dB

Average: -55 dB, Maximum: -45 dB

Average: -55 dB, Maximum: -50 dB

Average: -65 dB, Maximum: -60 dB

Average: -25 dB, Maximum: -20 dB

-40°C to +75°C

Ordering Information

FIBER TYPE

HOUSING

COLOR

CABLE

SIZE

FASTCONNECT SC

Multimode 62 .5/125 µm, OM1

Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2

Beige

Black

Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua

Single-mode, UPC Blue

Single-mode, APC-AU

Single-mode, APC-AA

Green

Green

FASTCONNECT ST

Multimode 62 .5/125 µm, OM1

Single-mode, UPC

FASTCONNECT LC

Beige

Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2 Black

Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua

Blue

Multimode 62 .5/125 µm, OM1

Multimode 50/125 µm, OM2

Beige

Black

Multimode 50/125 µm, OM3/OM4 compatible Aqua

Single-mode, UPC Blue

900 µm

900 µm

900 µm

AFL NO.

PACKAGE OF 6 PACKAGE OF 100

FAST-SC-MM62 .5-6 FAST-SC-MM62 .5-100

FAST-SC-MM50-6 FAST-SC-MM50-100

FAST-SC-MM50L-6 FAST-SC-MM50L-100

FAST-SC-SM-6 FAST-SC-SM-100

FAST-SC-SMAU-6 FAST-SC-SMAU-100

FAST-SC-SMAA-6 FAST-SC-SMAA-100*

FAST-ST-MM62 .5-6 FAST-ST-MM62 .5-100

FAST-ST-MM50-6 FAST-ST-MM50-100

FAST-ST-MM50L-6 FAST-ST-MM50L-100

FAST-ST-SM-6 FAST-ST-SM-100

FAST-LC-MM62 .5-6 FAST-LC-MM62 .5-100

FAST-LC-MM50-6 FAST-LC-MM50-100

FAST-LC-MM50L-6 FAST-LC-MM50L-100

FAST-LC-SM-6 FAST-LC-SM-100

* Requires FAST APC Tool Kit for installation

U.S. Patents: 5,963,699 / 5,984,532 / 6,179,482 / 7,003,208 / 7,258,496

© 2005 AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00052, Revision 10, 3.18.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

115

FASTConnect

®

Field-Installable Connectors

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

BOOT KITS FOR 2 MM AND 3 MM CORDAGE COLOR

2 mm Boot Kit, SC/LC/ST

3 mm Boot Kit, SC/LC/ST

DUPLEX CLIPS

Black

Black

LC Duplex Clip (LC only) Transparent

CABLE SIZE

2 mm

3 mm

AFL NO.

PACK OF 6

FAST-BOOT-2MM-6

FAST-BOOT-3MM-6

CS010437-06

TOOL KITS

FAST UPC Tool Kit

FAST UPC Tool Kit

FAST APC Tool Kit

VISUAL FAULT IDENTIFIERS

AFL NOYES ® VFI 2

AFL NOYES HiLite

1 .25 mm Universal Adapter (LC Connectors)

For all UPC style connectors and SC/ APC-AU (CT-30A Cleaver)

For all UPC style connectors and SC/APC-AU (CT-06A Cleaver)

For SC/APC-AA connectors (CT-11A Cleaver)

Testing

1

>POM<

2

Before Fiber Insertion

1

>POM<

2

After Fiber Insertion

AFL NO.

PACK OF 100

FAST-BOOT-2MM-100

FAST-BOOT-3MM-100

CS010437-100

AFL NO.

CS001201

CS010975

CS012290

AFL NO.

VFI2-00-0900

VFI3-00-0900

2900-50-0010MR

116

© 2005 AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00052, Revision 10, 3.18.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

CON

NECTORS

Fiber Optic Cable

Tool Kit Contents

CT-30A Cleaver

FASTConnect

®

Universal Tool Kit

The FASTConnect Universal Tool Kits provide all the necessary installation tools required for fiber preparation of 250 μm or 900 μm fibers, or 900 μm, 2 mm or 3 mm cordage for AFL’s pre-polished FASTConnect . Featuring either the CT-30A, CT-06A or CT-11A fiber cleaver, the FASTConnect Universal Tool Kit contains all the industry standard termination tools required for fiber preparation . Additionally, the carrying case has adequate storage for extra FASTConnect for on-site convenience .

Applications

• Premise environments

• LAN Fiber to the Desk environments

• Patch panel/wiring closets

• FTTx applications

• Quick repair/replacement areas

Features

• Industry standard fiber preparation tools

• Compact design, flexible yet rugged case

• Complete instructions provided

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

FASTConnect High Precision UPC/PC Tool Kit with CT-30A Cleaver

FASTConnect High Precision UPC/PC Tool Kit with CT-06A Cleaver

FASTConnect APC (Angle/Angle Connector) Tool Kit with CT-11A Cleaver

AFL NO.

CS001201

CS010975

CS012290

Tool Kits include: Cleaver, FAST SC Assembly Tool, FAST LC Assembly Tool, 3 mm Cable Clamp, 2 mm Cable

Clamp, 0 .25/0 .9 mm Cable Clamp, Fiber Stripper, Kevlar Scissors, Fiber Preperation Fluid, Lint-free Cloth Wipes,

Marker Pen, Installation Instructions, Strip Length Template and a Carrying Case .

CT-06A Cleaver

CT-11A Cleaver

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

117

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00053, Revision 8, 3.13.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FUSEConnect

®

Field-Installable Connectors

FuseConnect Connectors (SC, FC, LC, ST)

FuseConnect in Fusion Splicer

FUSEConnect

®

Fusion-Spliced,

Field-Installable Connectors

AFL’s FUSEConnect fusion-spliced, field installable connectors are uniquely designed and feature only four to five components. The factory pre-polished ferrule eliminates the need for polishing, adhesives, and crimping in the field, which minimizes the potential for operator error and expensive connector scrap.

FUSEConnect utilizes a fusion splicer to terminate the connector in the field, addressing return loss concerns present in analog optical networks. This advanced process yields true APC performance for SC/APC and LC/APC configurations, and is compliant to

GR-326-CORE. FUSEConnect is compatible with Fujikura fusion splicers and most other fiber holder-based fusion splicing platforms.

Features

• Field installable

• No adhesives, crimping or polishing

• True APC performance

• MM compliant to TIA/EIA568C.3

• Compatible with most fusion splicers

Applications

• Connectorization in:

- RF-overlay FTTP networks

- Cable TV backbone networks

- Outside plant

- FTTD

- MDU FTTP Cabling

• Central office connector replacement

• Data center installation

Specifications

PARAMETER

Connector Type

Cable Type

Polish

Insertion Loss

VALUE

SC, LC, FC, ST

900 µm, 2 mm, 3 mm

APC, UPC, PC

SM: 0.15 dB (average), 0.3 dB (maximum) / MM: 0.10 dB (average), 0.3 dB (maximum)

Return Loss SM: ≤ -65 dB (APC), ≤ -55 dB (UPC) / MM: ≤ -35 dB (PC)

Operating Temperature -40°C to +75°C

Ordering Information

CONN.

TYPE

SC

LC

FC

ST

BOOT

TYPE

UPC SM

(Blue)

APC SM

(Green)

AFL NO.*

PC 62.5 µm MM

(Beige)

PC 50 µm MM

(Black)

PC 50 µm LOMMF

(AQUA) **

900 µm FUSE-SC9SMU-6 FUSE-SC9SMA-6 FUSE-SC9M62-6 FUSE-SC9M50-6 FUSE-SC9M50L-6

3 mm FUSE-SC3SMU-6 FUSE-SC3SMA-6 FUSE-SC3M62-6 FUSE-SC3M50-6 FUSE-SC3M50L-6

900 µm FUSE-LC9SMU-6 FUSE-LC9SMA-6 FUSE-LC9M62-6 FUSE-LC9M50-6 FUSE-LC9M50L-6

2 mm FUSE-LC2SMU-6 FUSE-LC2SMA-6 FUSE-LC2M62-6 FUSE-LC2M50-6 FUSE-LC2M50L-6

900 µm FUSE-FC9SMU-6 —

2 mm FUSE-FC2SMU-6 —

3 mm FUSE-FC3SMU-6 —

900 µm FUSE-ST9SMU-6 —

2 mm FUSE-ST2SMU-6 —

3 mm FUSE-ST3SMU-6 —

FUSE-FC9M62-6 FUSE-FC9M50-6 FUSE-FC9M50L-6

FUSE-FC2M62-6 FUSE-FC2M50-6 FUSE-FC2M50L-6

FUSE-FC3M62-6 FUSE-FC3M50-6 FUSE-FC3M50L-6

FUSE-ST9M62-6 FUSE-ST9M50-6 FUSE-ST9M50L-6

FUSE-ST2M62-6 FUSE-ST2M50-6 FUSE-ST2M50L-6

FUSE-ST3M62-6 FUSE-ST3M50-6 FUSE-ST3M50L-6

*

AFL NO. is for one pack of 6 pieces

**

Laser Optimized MM Fiber (LOMMF) compatible with OM3 and OM4 fibers

FuseConnect Kits—ST (blue), SC (green), LC (blue)

© 2007, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00056, Revision 6, 11.20.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

118

FUSEConnect

®

MPO Field-Installable Connectors

CON

NECTORS

Fiber Optic Cable

FUSEConnect MPO Connectors, Cable

FUSEConnect MPO Connectors, Ribbon

FUSEConnect

®

MPO Fusion-Spliced,

Field-Terminated Connectors

AFL’s FUSEConnect MPO fusion-spliced, field-terminated connectors are uniquely designed and feature just six components. With a factory pre-polished ferrule, its innovative field-termination process eliminates polishing, adhesives and crimping in the field minimizing the potential for operator error and expensive connector scrap.

Designed to Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard (FOCIS), Type MPO, FOCIS-5,

TIA-604-5-C, AFL’s FuseConnect MPO performs as an equivalent to the standard factory terminated MPO/MTP

®

assemblies. Designed to utilize either ribbon or loose tube cable, this connector helps to minimize the complexity involved in the termination of a multi-fiber connection, allowing for a reliable and repeatable termination in field applications.

FUSEConnect MPO is part of the FUSEConnect series splice-on connector which includes the SC, LC, ST and FC that require a fusion splicer and accessories for installations.

The AFL FUSEConnect MPO Termination Kit specifically provides all the necessary accessories required for field termination of the FUSEConnect MPO.

Features

• Field installable splice-on connector

• Only six components

• No adhesives, crimping or polishing

• TIA-568-C.3, IEC-61754-7, and

TIA/EIA-604-5 FOCIS 5 Compliant

• Field MPO polarity customization

• Include 3.0 mm round and optical fiber ribbon flat boots in each pack

Specifications

PARAMETER

Insertion Loss

Return Loss

Single-mode (OS1)

62.5/125 (OM1)

50/125 (OM2)

50/125 LO (OM3)

Single-mode (OS1)

62.5/125 (OM1)

50/125 (OM2)

50/125 LO (OM3)

Operating Temperature

Applications

• Connectorization in:

- RF-overlay FTTP networks

- Cable TV backbone networks

- Outside plant

- MDU FTTP Cabling

• Connector restoration in the field

• Data center installation

• Patch cord customization in the field

VALUE

Average: 0.25 dB; Max: 0.75 dB

Average: 0.10 dB; Max: 0.35 dB

Average: 0.10 dB; Max: 0.35 dB

Average: 0.10 dB; Max: 0.35 dB

> 65 dB

> 30 dB

> 30 dB

> 30 dB

-40°C to +75°C continued on next page

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

119

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00059, Revision 1, 8.11.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

CON

NECTORS

Fiber Optic Cable

FUSEConnect

®

MPO Fusion-Spliced,

Field-Terminated Connectors

Ordering Information

AFL NO.* CONNECTOR TYPE

FUSEMPO-SMA-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins)

FUSEMPO-SMA-3-F-6 MPO, Female (No Guide Pins)

FUSEMPO-MM6-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins)

FUSEMPO-MM6-3-F-6 MPO, Female (no guide pins)

FUSEMPO-MM5-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins)

FUSEMPO-MM5-3-F-6 MPO, Female (no guide pins)

FUSEMPO-MM5L-3-M-6 MPO, Male (guide pins)

FUSEMPO-MM5L-3-F-6 MPO, Female (no guide pins)

*Pack of 6 pieces

Ordering Information – Accessories

DESCRIPTION

TOOL KIT

FuseConnect MPO Tool Kit

ACCESSORIES

FuseConnect Ribbonize Tool

FuseConnect Stripping Tool (3.0 mm, 2.8 mm, 2.0 mm, and 1.6 mm)

FuseConnect MPO Assembly Tool

FIBER TYPE

Single-mode (OS1)

Single-mode (OS1)

Multimode 62.5 µm (OM1)

Multimode 62.5 µm (OM1)

Multimode 50 µm (OM2)

Multimode 50 µm (OM2)

Multimode 50 µm 10Gig (OM3)

Multimode 50 µm 10Gig (OM3)

AFL NO.

FUSEMPO-TL-KT

FUSE-RB-TL

FUSE-ST-TL

FUSE-AS-TL

POLISH

APC

APC

PC

PC

PC

PC

PC

PC

CABLE SIZE

ROUND FLAT

3.0 mm 250 µm

3.0 mm

3.0 mm

3.0 mm

3.0 mm

250 µm

250 µm

250 µm

250 µm

3.0 mm

3.0 mm

3.0 mm

250 µm

250 µm

250 µm

HOUSING COLOR

Green

Green

Beige

Beige

Black

Black

Aqua

Aqua

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

120

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00059, Revision 1, 8.11.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FUSEConnect Tool Kit Contents

FUSEConnect Accessory Kit

Cord Splitter Tool

FUSEConnect

®

Tool Kit and Accessories

The FUSEConnect tool kit provides all the necessary installation tools required for fiber preparation of 900 μm fiber, 2 mm or 3 mm cordage for AFL’s FUSEConnect Fusion

Spliced Field Installable Connectors except for a fusion splicer and precision cleaver.

Included in the kit are standard fiber preparation tools and cleaning supplies as well as a FUSEConnect accessory kit and cord splitter tool, which can be bought separately from the tool kit. The cord splitter tool is uniquely designed to open the cordage of

2 mm and 3 mm cable allowing the termination of the ST and FC type connectors on simplex cordage.

Applications

• Premise environments

• LAN Fiber to the Desk environments

• Patch panel/wiring closets

• FTTx applications

• Quick repair/replacement areas

Features

• Industry standard fiber preparation tools

• Compact design, flexible yet rugged case

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

FUSEConnect Tool Kit (includes items below)

Tool Case

Fiber Stripper

Kevlar Scissors

Lint-Free Wipes

Fiber Preparation Fluid

Permanent Marker

Cord Splitter Tool

FUSEConnect Accessory Kit

FUSEConnect Accessory Kit (includes items below)

Utility Storage Box

Clamp for holding 3 mm Simplex Cordage

Clamp for holding 2 mm Simplex Cordage

250 μm / 900 μm Fiber Clamp

3 mm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder

2 mm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder

900 μm FUSEConnect Fiber Holder

CLAMP-S70D Sheath Clamp

CLAMP-S60D Sheath Clamp (Left side)

Cord Splitter Tool

AFL NO.

FUSE-TL-KT

CS001202

CS001205

C095257

FM000413

FPF1-00-0900

C015830

FUSE-ST-TL

FUSE-AC-KT

FUSE-AC-KT

CS012351

S014704

S014705

CS004442

S014695

S014696

S014697

S015862

S014752

FUSE-ST-TL

121

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00145, Revision 2, 6.5.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

SpliceConnect with Tool Kit

AFL’s SpliceConnect is a mechanical splice that provides an inexpensive, quick alternative to mating fibers. Using V-groove technology, this splice maintains physical contact between the fibers. An assembly tool is used to ensure the fibers are mated correctly, resulting in <0.1 dB insertion loss (typical for single-mode). The SpliceConnect secures both fiber and coating independently with the U-shaped sleeve, enhancing the strength against fiber twist.

Features

• Quick splicing time

• Minimal tools

• 250 µm and/or 900 µm fiber capabilities

• Both fiber and coating are secured independently

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

SpliceConnect Mechanical Splices (Bag of 6)

SpliceConnect Mechanical Splice Tool Kit

Kit Includes:

SpliceConnect Mechanical Splicing Tool

Fiber Holder, 250 µm x2

Fiber Holder, 900 µm x2

Manual

Carrying

Template, Strip/Cleave Length

SpliceConnect Mechanical Splicing Tool

Fiber Holder, 250 µm

Fiber Holder, 900 µm

Applications

• Restoration

• Premise environments

• Fiber-to-the-Subscriber (FTTx) applications

AFL NO.

CS004154

CS004162

CS004155

CS004442

CS004443

CS004159

CS004161

CS004573

CS004155

CS004442

CS004443

Dimensions and Structure

4 mm

Clamping

Clamping Force from U-Shaped Crimp

4 mm

40 mm

Fiber

Fiber

Index Mating Gel

V-groove Plate

122

© 2007, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00104, Revision 3, 3.19.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• SC, FC, ST, and LC connector styles

(Ultra & Angled Polish)

• Long-term reliability

• Low ripple, wavelength independent attenuation

• Certified to >125 mW continuous power handling capability with no performance degradation

• Polarization insensitive

• Telcordia approved

Application

• Broadband Network

• Fiber in the Loop

• Local Area Networks (LAN)

• Long Haul Telecommunications

(CLEC, CAPS)

• Network Testing

• Passive Optical Networks

• Telco

Buildout Attenuators

Buildout attenuators provide superior performance for all single-mode in-line attenuation requirements. Standard attenuation values are 5, 10, 15, and 20 dB, available in SC, FC, ST, and LC connector styles. Using no air gap, filters, or light path discontinuities, attenuation is achieved by controlled absorption of light energy.

This results in a polarization insensitive device with high power handling capability, environmentally stable, and exceptionally responsive, across a wide bandpass range.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Standard Attenuation Values

Attenuation Tolerance

Vibration resistance

Operating Temperature Range:

Storage Temperature Range:

VALUE

5, 10, 15 and 20 dB

Standard at 10%

<0.1X attenuation value

-40°C to +75°C

-40°C to +85°C

Ordering Information

OFA

Connector

SCA = SC/APC

SCU = SC/UPC

LCA = LC/APC

LCU = LC/UPC

STU = ST/UPC

FCA = FC/APC

FCU = FC/UPC

BO

24DB

25DB

26DB

27DB

28DB

29DB

30DB

16DB

17DB

18DB

19DB

20DB

21DB

22DB

23DB

08DB

09DB

10DB

11DB

12DB

13DB

14DB

15DB

01DB

02DB

03DB

04DB

05DB

06DB

07DB

123

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00044, Revision 3, 12.03.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Couplers and WDM Modules

Features

• Dual window wideband operation

• Low insertion loss over entire bandwidth and temperature (typical IL change <±0.1 dB)

• Ultra-low PDL and temperature sensitivity

• High directivity

• Compact design

• Environmentally stable, over 10 years of proven field reliability

• Standard operating temperature range

-4O°C to +85°C

• Fully tested to Telcordia 1209 and

1221 criteria

Applications

• Telecommunications

• CATV

• LAN

• Monitoring of Networks

Wideband Couplers

The dual window Wideband Couplers (WBC) split or couple optical power in two wavelength regions while maintaining a very broad operating bandwidth. Split and coupling ratios are available from 5% to 50%. WBCs are widely considered one of the most cost-effective solutions to optical power management. The WBC is an all-fiber device, based on AFL’s fused biconic technology, and is designed and manufactured to meet military and Telcordia ® requirements.

Specifications

STANDARD AND PREMIUM GRADES

PARAMETER

Operating Wavelength

Return Loss

Directivity

Package Dimension

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

VALUE

1310 nm + 50 and 1550 nm + 50

55 dB

55 dB

3.2 mm (dia.) x 55 mm (L)

-40° to +85°C

-40° to +85°C

Ordering Information

SINGLE-MODE PREMIUM GRADE SPECIFICATIONS (MAX. INSERTION LOSS AND MAX. PDL)

RATIO

50/50

55/45

60/40

65/35

67/33

70/30

75/25

80/20

85/15

90/10

95/5

SPECIFICATIONS (DB)

PRIMARY/SECONDARY PORT PDL (DB)

3.6/3.6

0.15

3.2/4.1

2.7/4.7

2.3/5.3

2.2/5.7

0.15

0.14

0.14

0.14

2.0/6.0

1.8/6.8

1.3/7.8

1.0/9.2

0.8/11.2

0.5/14.4

0.13

0.13

0.10

0.10

0.10

0.10

AFL NO.

C198364-P

C198358-P

C198353-P

C198349-P

C198904-P

C198346-P

C198340-P

C198335-P

C198331-P

C198328-P

C198322-P

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

124

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00110, Revision 2, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Ruggedized Wideband Couplers

Enhancing AFL’s wideband coupler offering are two package styles for ruggedized versions of these reliable, standardized couplers – 3 mm and 900 µm furcated pigtail options and a variety of connector styles are offered in both single-mode and multimode applications. All AFL couplers conform to stringent environmental and mechanical standards to provide high reliablity in a variety of customer applications.

Features

• Dual window wideband operation

• Low insertion loss

• Low PDL

• High Directivity

• Long term field application

• Environmentally stable over range of

-40°C to +85°C

Applications

• Telecommunications

• CATV

• LAN

• Fiber in the Loop

• Network monitoring

Ordering Information

T

0102

Package Type

T = 900 µm Diameter Leads

3 = 3 mm Diameter Leads

Output Leads

0102 = 1 x 2

50

Split Ratio

50 = 50/50%

45 = 45/55%

40 = 40/60%

35 = 35/65%

30 = 30/70%

25 = 25/75%

20 = 20/80%

15 = 15/85%

10 = 10/90%

5 = 5/95%

S

Configuration

S = Single-mode

M = Multimode

ASC 01

Input Connector

Options

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

Input Pigtail

Length (M)

(Examples)

01 = 1 meter

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

SST = Super ST

ULC = Ultra LC

000 = Non-connectorized

02 = 2 meters

ASC 01

Output Connector/

Adapter

ASC = Angle SC

AFC = Angle FC

Output Pigtail

Length (M)

(Examples)

01 = 1 meter

USC = Ultra SC

UFC = Ultra FC

SST = Super ST

ULC = Ultra LC

000 = Non-connectorized

02 = 2 meters

125

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00100, Revision 1, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Low insertion loss

• Ultra-wide bandwidth

• Wide operating temperature

• Low PDL

• Highly stable and reliable

• Epoxy-free optical path

Applications

• Telecommunications

• CATV

• Fiber Optic Sensors and Instruments

• Subscriber Loops

• Military Systems, Fiber Optic Gyros

• FTTH

Wavelength Division Multiplexer Couplers

The WDM separates or combines wavelengths in the 1310 and 1550 nm bands over an ultra-wide bandwidth (+ 20 nm) and temperature range while maintaining excellent stability and optical performance. The device, which is fabricated using an advanced fused biconical taper technology, is designed to meet Telcordia ® 1209 and 1221 requirements.

Specifications (Single-Mode Premium)

PARAMETER

Model Number

Configuration

Wavelength

Directivity

Operating Temperature

Typical Temperature Stability

Typical Polarization Stability (passband)

Isolation

VALUE

S004794

1 x 2

1310 / 1550 nm

<-65 dB

-40º to +85ºC

<0.1 dB

<0.1 dB

20 dB

*Isolation of 32 dB and higher not available in 63 mm L or 69 mm L x 3 mm OD

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

126

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00109, Revision 1, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Low insertion loss

• Compact design

• Stable optical performance

• Dual Window (1310 & 1550 nm)

• Low insertion loss

• Low back reflection

• High output uniformity

• Telecordia

®

GR-1029 and

GR-1221 qualified

Applications

• Telecommunications Networks

• Datacom

• LAN & CATV Networks

• FTTH, FTTB, & FTTC

Planar Couplers

The Planar Coupler provides the uniform division of an optical signal by having one input port and multiple output ports. Compact packaging and stable optical parameters allow these couplers to be integrated into Telecommunications, Local Area Network

(LAN), and Cable Television (CATV) networks.

Specifications

PARAMETER

AFL NO.

Operating Wavelength (Grade)

Optical Split Ratio

Maximum Insertion Loss (dB)

Typical Insertion Loss (dB)

Maximum Uniformity (dB)

Typical Uniformity (dB)

PDL (dB)

VALUE

CM000034

1260-1360 nm and 1480-1580 nm (Standard)

1 x 4 1 x 8 1 x 16

7.5

7.3

1.0

0.8

<0.3

CM000033

11.0

10.8

1.0

0.8

<0.3

Return Loss (dB)

Directivity (dB)

Fiber Type

Input/Output Fiber Length

>55

>55

Operating Temperature -40° to +85°C

Package Dimensions (LxWxH) (mm) 40 x 4 x 4

>55

>55

SMF28e 250 µm equivalent

1 meter 1.5 meters

40 x 4 x 4

C198299

14.2

13.9

1.5

1.3

<0.4

>55

>55

1.5 meters

40 x 4 x 4

CS001470

1 x 32

17.8

17.5

2.0

1.8

<0.4

>55

>55

1.5 meters

50 x 6.5 x 4

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

127

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00097, Revision 1, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Applications

• CATV

• Telco

• Wide Area Networks

• Fiber Monitoring Systems

• Military systems

Optical Coupler Modules

The optical coupler module offers management of optical power and wavelength, packaged in the LGX ® design. Each module is comprised of Telcordia ® -compliant

PLC or concatenated fused biconic components. Once assembled and terminated, the module is fully tested for environmental, mechanical, and optical integrity.

Features

• Telcordia GR-1209 & GR-1221 compliant

• Telcordia GR-326 compliant connectors and adapters

• Telcordia GR-20 compliant singlemode optical fiber

Specifications

• Optical bandpass: 1310 ± 40 nm /

1550 ± 40 nm

• RoHS compliant

• Packaged individually / tamper-proof seal

PARAMETER

Return Loss (Minimum dB)

Directivity

Operating Temperature/ Relative Humidity

Storage Temperature/ Relative Humidity

VALUE

Single-mode

Ultra

> -45

> -55

-40 to +85°C / 90%

-40 to +85°C / 90%

Angled

> -50

Ordering Information

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

I/O PORTS

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

1 x 2

ALC

ALC

ALC

ALC

ALC

ALC

ASC

ASC

ULC

ULC

ULC

ULC

ULC

ULC

USC

USC

ASC

ASC

ASC

ASC

I/O CONN

USC

USC

USC

USC

CM000175

CM000176

CM000315

CM000325

CM000323

CM000321

CM000319

CM000317

CM000310

CM000324

CM000322

CM000320

CM000318

CM000316

AFL NO.

CM000165

CM000166

CM000167

CM000168

CM000169

CM000170

CM000171

CM000172

CM000173

CM000174

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

OUTPUT PORT

COUPLING RATIO (PORT)

20

10

5

50

40

30

20

10

5

10

5

50

40

30

40

30

20

10

5

50

01

50

40

30

20

80

90

95

50

60

70

80

90

95

90

95

50

60

70

60

70

80

90

95

50

02

50

60

70

80

INSERTION LOSS

(IL) PORT 01

3.3

4.3

5.5

7.3

10.3

13.3

10.3

13.3

3.3

4.3

5.5

7.3

10.3

13.3

10.3

13.3

3.3

4.3

5.5

7.3

TYP

3.3

4.3

5.5

7.3

4.0

5.2

6.4

8.3

11.5

14.6

11.5

14.6

4.0

5.2

6.4

8.3

11.5

14.6

11.5

14.6

4.0

5.2

6.4

8.3

MAX

4.0

5.2

6.4

8.3

INSERTION LOSS

(IL) PORT 02

3.3

2.5

1.5

1.3

0.8

0.5

0.8

0.5

3.3

2.5

1.5

1.3

0.8

0.5

0.8

0.5

3.3

2.5

1.5

1.3

TYP

3.3

2.5

1.5

1.3

4.0

3.3

2.4

1.8

1.1

0.8

1.1

0.8

4.0

3.3

2.4

1.8

1.1

0.8

1.1

0.8

4.0

3.3

2.4

1.8

MAX

4.0

3.3

2.4

1.8

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00091, Revision 5, 9.10.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

128

Optical Coupler Modules

Ordering Information

(cont.)

OUTPUT PORT

COUPLING RATIO (PORT)

I/O PORTS I/O CONN AFL NO.

1 x 3 USC

01

CM000177 33.0

1 x 3

1 x 3

1 x 3

ASC

ULC

ALC

CM000178 33.0

CM000326 33.0

CM000311 33.0

02

33.0

33.0

33.0

33.0

03

33.0

33.0

33.0

33.0

I/O PORTS I/O CONN AFL NO.

1 x 4

1 x 4

USC

ASC

CM000179

CM000180

1 x 4

1 x 4

ULC

ALC

CM000327

CM000312

OUTPUT PORT

COUPLING RATIO (PORT)

01

25.0

25.0

25.0

25.0

02

25.0

25.0

25.0

25.0

03

25.0

25.0

25.0

25.0

04

25.0

25.0

25.0

25.0

INSERTION LOSS

PORT 01

TYP

5.1

5.1

5.1

5.1

MAX

6.2

6.2

6.2

6.2

PORT 02

TYP

5.1

5.1

5.1

5.1

MAX

6.2

6.2

6.2

6.2

PORT 03

TYP

5.1

5.1

5.1

5.1

MAX

6.2

6.2

6.2

6.2

INSERTION LOSS

PORT 01 PORT 02

TYP

6.3

6.3

6.3

6.3

MAX

7.7

7.7

7.7

7.7

TYP

6.3

6.3

6.3

6.3

PORT 03

MAX TYP

7.7

7.7

6.3

6.3

7.7

7.7

6.3

6.3

PORT 04

MAX TYP

7.7

7.7

6.3

6.3

7.7

7.7

6.3

6.3

MAX

7.7

7.7

7.7

7.7

I/O

PORTS

1 x 8

1 x 8

1 x 8

1 x 8

I/O

CONN AFL NO.

USC CM000181

ASC

ULC

ALC

CM000182

CM000346

CM000347

OUTPUT PORT

COUPLING RATIO (PORT)

INSERTION LOSS

PORT 01 PORT 02 PORT 03 PORT 04

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

11.4

9.3

9.3

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

11.4

11.4

I/O

PORTS

1 x 8

1 x 8

1 x 8

1 x 8

I/O

CONN AFL NO.

USC

ASC

ULC

ALC

CM000181

CM000182

CM000346

CM000347

OUTPUT PORT

COUPLING RATIO (PORT)

INSERTION LOSS

PORT 05 PORT 06 PORT 07 PORT 08

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX TYP MAX

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

11.4

9.3

9.3

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

12.5

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

9.3

11.4

11.4

11.4

Insertion loss (IL) includes connector loss and Polarization Dependent Loss (PDL) across operating temperature over the Optical Bandpass.

*** Additional split ratios available upon request.

129

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00091, Revision 5, 9.10.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

Optical Splitter Shelf

The LightLink LanSystem

Optical Splitter Shelf provides a convenient in-rack solution to combine/split optical signals in a passive optical network. With 1x16, 1x32 and

2x32 options available, the splitter shelf also features a Planar Lightwave Circuit (PLC) allowing a signal to be split into either 16 or 32 channels in a 1U rack-mountable housing. The 2x32 option provides a filter WDM concatenated to a PLC, which allows

1310/1490/1550 nm signal management evenly across 32 channels.

Features

• Telcordia

®

GR-63 NEBS tested housing

• Aluminum Material per ASTMB209

• Universal Mounting Bracket WECO, EIA

• 19" and 23" Rack Mountable

• Rugged construction, ensuring environmental, mechanical and optical integrity

• WDM and PLC fully compliant to

Telcordia GR-1209 and GR-1221

• Low Excess loss

• Low Polarization Dependent Loss

Applications

• PON-FTTx Networks

• CATV links

• DWDM & CWDM systems

• Wide area networks

• Outside plant requirements

Specifications

PARAMETER 1x16 1x32 2x32

Insertion Loss 13.5 ~ 14.3 dB 17.5 - 18.5 dB 17.5 - 19 dB

Uniformity

PDL

Return Loss

Directivity

1.5 dB Typical 1.8 dB Typical 1.8 dB Typical

≤ 0.3 dB

≥ 55 dB

≥ 55 dB

<0.45 dB

≥ 55 dB

≥ 55 dB

<0.45 dB

≥ 40 dB

≥ 50 dB

Fiber Type SMF-28e SMF-28e SMF-28e

Operating Temp -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +70°C

Storage Temp -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C -40°C to +85°C

Operating

Bandwidth

1260 ~ 1650 1260 ~ 1650 1550 nm Band - Port 1 (Pass) 1550 - 1560 nm

1310 + 1490 nm - Port 2 (Reflect) 1260-1360 nm &

1480-1500 nm

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

1x16 Optical Splitter Shelf, ASC inputs/outputs, 1U, textured White

1x32 Optical Splitter Shelf, ASC inputs/outputs, 1U, textured White

2x32 Optical Splitter Shelf, ASC inputs/outputs, 1U, textured White

AFL NO.

FM001000

FM000775

FM000622

130

© 2006, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00094, Revision 4, 10.10.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Optical FTTx Coupler Module

AFL’s Optical FTTx Coupler Module is designed to satisfy requirements utilizing 1550 nm bandwidths in FTTx applications and is specified for FTTx video install-ations. The module features a compact footprint with adapter ports consisting of SC/APC adapter outputs.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Performance

Wavelength

Insertion Loss

PDL

PMD

Return Loss

Directivity

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Relative Humidity

Optical Power

VALUE

1540-1560 nm

1550 < 3.9 dB

<0.2 dB

< 0.05 ps

> 55 dB

> 55 dB

-40 to +75°C

-40 to +85 °C

0 to 90%

500 mW

PACKAGING

Packaging Size

Fiber Type

Connector Type

Standard Single Width LGX ® Rack Module

Low-Water-Peak Non-Dispersion Shifted SMF-28e

All ports – SC/APC, Green

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Optical FTTx Coupler Module

AFL NO.

CM000072

Dimensions

29.00 mm

1.14"

84.60 mm

3.33"

171.00 mm

6.73"

155.60 mm

6.13"

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

131

© 2004, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00092, Revision 2, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Optical FTTx WDM Module

The Optical FTTx WDM Module is designed to satisfy requirements utilizing 1310, 1490 and 1550 nm bandwidths in FTTx applications. The module features a compact footprint with adapter ports consisting of SC (UPC or APC) outputs.

Specifications

PARAMETER

1550 Band – Port 1 (Pass)

1310 + 1490 Band – Port 2 (Reflect)

Insertion Loss

Isolation

PDL

PMD

Return Loss

Directivity

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Relative Humidity

Optical Power

PACKAGING

Packaging Size

Fiber Type

Connector Type

VALUE

1550-1560 nm

1260-1360 & 1480-1500 nm

1550 < 1.2 dB

1310 + 1490 < 1.2 dB

1550 > 25 dB

1310 + 1490 > 20 dB

<0.2 dB

< 0.2 ps

> 50 dB

> 50 dB

-40 to +75°C

-40 to +85°C

0 to 90%

500 mW

Standard Single Width LGX

®

Rack Module

Low-Water-Peak Non-Dispersion Shifted SMF-28e

Port 3 (Common) – SC/APC

Port 1 (Data) – SC/UPC

Port 2 (Video) – SC/APC

Ordering Information

AFL NO.

CM000043

DESCRIPTION

Optical FTTx WDM Module

Dimensions

29.00 mm

1.14"

84.60 mm

3.33"

171.00 mm

6.73"

155.60 mm

6.13"

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

132

© 2004, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00093, Revision 2, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Flexible packaging options

• Low Excess Loss

• Low PDL

• Monitoring / Tap ports available

• RoHS compliant

Applications

• PON - FTTx Networks

• Access Networks

• CATV Links

RFoG WDM Module

The RFOG WDM module is designed to satisfy wavelength management requirements where 1310, 1490, 1550, 1590 / 1610 nm wavelengths are used in passive optical network applications. This unit is available in traditional LGX

®

module packaging with virtually all connector options supported. Also available is a high density platform delivering unsurpassed ports per rack unit for applications requiring the most efficient use of available rack space.

Specifications

PARAMETER UNIT

Wavelength Range

Insertion Loss

Band Isolation

1310 Band

1490 Band

1550 Band

1590/1610 Band

1310+1490 Port

1550 Port

1590/1610 Port nm dB

1310/1490 Port @ 1550 dB

1310/1490 Port @

1590/1610

1550 Port @ 1310/1490

Wavelength Thermal Stability

Directivity

PDL

PMD

Return Loss

Optical Power Handling

1550 Port @ 1590

1590/1610 Port @

1310/1490/1550 nm/°C dB dB ps dB mW

40

40

30

15

35

SPECIFICATION

MIN

1270

1480

1540

-

1584.5

MAX

1350

1.2

1.4

1.5

1500

1570

1620

50

0.002

0.15

0.10

45

300

Environmental Specifications

PARAMETER

Operation Temperature

Operation Humidity

Storage Temperature

Storage Humidity

UNIT

°C

%RH

°C

%RH

SPECIFICATION

-5 ~ +70

5 ~ 95 not condensed

-40 ~ +85

0 ~ 95 not condensed

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

FILTER WDM,1310+1490/1550+1590/1610,SC/APC

AFL NO.

CM000150

DUAL FILTER WDM,1310+1490/1550+1590/1610,LC/APC CM000151

* Additional configuration available upon request. Contact AFL Customer Service.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00099, Revision 1, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

133

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LGX

®

FTTx Splitter Modules

The PON / FTTx splitters provide a convenient in-rack solution to combine or split optical signals in an optical network. Based on PLC technology, these modules offer the network operator high port-to-port uniformity and low insertion loss, as well as a wide operating wavelength range to accommodate future growth needs with new and emerging optical technologies. These products are available in LGX compatible modules.

Features

• Low excess loss

• Low polarization dependent loss

• Flexible LGX packaging options

(* see ordering information below for product size information)

• Telcordia ® GR-1209 or GR-1221 compliant

• SC/APC Connectors

Applications

• PON - FTTx Networks

• Access Networks

• CATV Links

• Wide Area Networks

Performance Specifications

PARAMETER

Insertion Loss (dB) *

Uniformity (dB) *

,

**

PDL (dB) *

,

**

Return Loss (dB)

Directivity (dB)

Operating Temperature (°C)

Storage Temperature (°C)

Package

1X4

<7.4

<0.5

LGX, 1 Slot

1X8

<10.5

<0.8

LGX, 2 Slot

1X16

<13.9

<1.1

<0.3

>55

>55

-40 to +85

-40 to +85

LGX, 3 Slot

1X32

<17.2

<1.5

LGX, 3 Slot

*Operating wavelength range (1260-1650 nm) guaranteed by design. Test report provided at 1310 and 1550 nm.

** Value does not include connector loss.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

1x4 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Single slot LGX, Black, SC/APC

1x8 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Dual slot LGX, Black, SC/APC

1x16 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Triple slot LGX, Black, SC/APC

1x32 Optical Splitter Module, 1260~1650 nm, Triple slot LGX, Black, SC/APC

AFL NO.

CM000474

CM000475

CM000476

CM000477

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00083, Revision 0, 3.15.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LGX

®

FTTx WDM Modules

The FTTx WDM Modules are designed to satisfy 1310, 1490 and 1550 nm wavelength management requirements in FTTx passive optical networks. Based on proven thin-film filter technology, these modules offer low overall insertions loss, high wavelength thermal stability and high band isolation, all of which add to network reliability. These products are available in LGX compatible modules of scaling density to meet varying density objectives.

Features

• Low excess loss

• Low polarization dependent loss

• Flexible LGX packaging options

(* see ordering information below for product size and density information)

• Telcordia ® GR-1209 or GR-1221 compliant

• SC/APC Connectors

Applications

• PON - FTTx Networks

• Access Networks

• CATV Links

• Wide Area Networks

Performance Specifications

PARAMETER UNIT

Wavelength Range

Insertion Loss

Band Isolation

Wavelength Thermal Stability

Directivity

PDL

PMD

Return Loss

Optical Power Level

Operation Temperature

Operation Humidity

Storage Temperature

Storage Humidity

1310 Band

1490 Band nm nm

1550 Band

1310+1490 Port nm dB

1550 Port dB

1310/1490 Port @ 1550 dB

1550 @ 1310/1490 Port dB nm/°C dB dB ps dB mW

°C

%RH

°C

%RH

1260

1480

SPECIFICATION

MINIMUM MAXIMUM

1550

1360

1500

1560

1.2

1.4

40

30

0.002

50

0.15

0.1

45

300

-5 to 70

5 to 90

40 to 85

0 to 95

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION AFL NO.

PON WDM Module, 1X, 1310/1490+1550, Single slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000478

PON WDM Module, 2X, 1310/1490+1550, Single slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000479

PON WDM Module, 4X, 1310/1490+1550, Dual slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000480

PON WDM Module, 6X, 1310/1490+1550, Triple slot LGX, Black, SC/APC CM000481

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00084, Revision 1, 5.26.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Double-width LGX 118 package shown

Dense WDM (DWDM) Modules

AFL’s Dense WDM modules (DWDM) are designed using proven thin-film filter technology featuring low insertion loss, high isolation, and superior environmental stability. DWDM modules are available in 2, 4, 8, and 16 channel configurations, with 100 GHz and 200

GHz spaced central wavelength options on the ITU-T Grid in the C-Band (1528 nm-1568 nm) and L-Band (1568 nm-1610 nm). All DWDM modules are factory assembled in a thin cassette package or a rugged LGX ® cassette with most common industry standard connector options to meet varying system requirements.

Features

• Telcordia

®

qualified components

• 100 GHz & 200 GHz ITU-T channel spacing

• 2, 4, 8 and 16 channel configurations

• Most industry standard connectors

• Low insertion loss

• High isolation

• Epoxy-free optical path

Applications

• CATV Systems

• Sensor Systems

• 10G Ethernet Systems

• Metro Optical Networks

• Metro Access Networks

Specifications

PARAMETER

Ports

Center Wavelength

Passband @ 0.5 dB

Passband

UNIT

nm nm nm

VALUE

100 GHZ DWDM

2 4

1531-1561 (CH. 20-58)

>0.25

±0.11

Passband Flatness

Insertion Loss (Typ.)

Insertion Loss (Max.) dB dB dB

<0.5

1.4

1.8

Adjacent Channel Isolation dB

Non-Adjacent Channel Isolation dB

>25

>45

Wavelength Thermal Stability nm/°C <0.001

1.6

2.0

IL Thermal Stability

Return Loss

PMD

PDL

Directivity

Operation Temperature

Storage Temperature

LGX 118 Package

Thin Cassette Package

8

2.6

3.2

16

3.8

4.5

200 GHZ DWDM

2 4

1530-1560 (CH. 21-59)

>0.6

±0.25

<0.5

1.4

1.8

>25

>45

<0.002

1.6

2.0

8

2.6

3.2

16

3.8

4.5

db/°C <0.005

dB >45 ps dB dB

°C

°C mm

<0.10

<0.10

>50

-5 to +65

<0.005

<0.10

<0.20

<0.007

<0.10

<0.20

<0.007

<0.15

<0.25

<0.005

>45

<0.10

<0.10

>50

-5 to +65

<0.005

<0.10

<0.20

<0.007

<0.10

<0.20

<0.007

<0.15

<0.25

-40 to +85

Single-width Single-width Double-width Triple-width

-40 to +85

Single-width Single-width Double-width Triple-width

88.9x50.8x8.3

120x80x13 130x87x13 150x115x13 88.9x50.8x8.3 120x80x13 130x87x13 150x115x13

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

136

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00050, Revision 1, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Dense WDM (DWDM) Modules

Ordering Information

DWDM

04

Channel Count

02 = 2 Channel

04 = 4 Channel

08 = 8 Channel

16 = 16 Channel

5

Package/Pigtail

1 = Thin Cassette,

1 Meter Pigtail

3 = Thin Cassette,

3 Meter Pigtail

5 = Thin Cassette,

5 Meter Pigtail

L = LGX 118

1

Spacing

1 = 100 GHz

2 = 200 GHz

20

47

48

49

50

43

44

45

46

39

40

41

42

35

36

37

38

Start Channel

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

31

32

33

34

27

28

29

30

55

56

57

58

51

52

53

54

24

48

49

50

51

44

45

46

47

40

41

42

43

36

37

38

39

End Channel

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

32

33

34

35

28

29

30

31

56

57

58

59

52

53

54

55

ASC

Connectors

ASC = SC/APC

USC = SC/UPC

ALC = LC/APC

ULC = LC/UPC

X = No connectors

ISP

137

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00050, Revision 1, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Double-width LGX 118 package shown

Features

• Telcordia

®

qualified components

• 20 nm channel spacing

• 2, 4, 8, and 16 channel configurations

• Most industry standard connectors

• Low insertion loss

• High isolation

• Custom configurations upon request

Applications

• CATV Systems

• Sensor Systems

• 10G Ethernet Systems

• Metro Optical Networks

• Metro Access Networks

Coarse WDM Modules (CWDM)

AFL’s Coarse WDM modules are designed using proven thin-film filter technology providing high isolation, 20nm channel separation and a high level of thermal stability.

CWDM modules are available in 2, 4, 8, and 16 channel configurations and are factory assembled in a thin cassette or rugged LGX ® cassette with industry standard connector options to meet varying system requirements. An optional 1310 nm Mux/Demux Upgrade

Port is available to allow seamless integration of legacy voice, video, and data services.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Ports

Center Wavelength

Passband @ 0.5 dB

Passband

Passband Flatness

Insertion Loss (Typ.)

UNIT VALUE

nm nm nm dB dB

2

1271-1611

> 14

± 6.5

< 0.5

1.4

Insertion Loss (Max.)

Adjacent Channel Isolation dB dB

1.8

> 30

Non-Adjacent Channel Isolation dB > 45

Wavelength Thermal Stability nm/°C < 0.002

4

1.6

2.0

8

1.8

2.5

16

4.3

5.0

IL Thermal Stability

Return Loss

PMD

PDL

Directivity

Operation Temperature

Storage Temperature

LGX 118 Package

Thin Cassette Package

Options mm

1310 Channel Wavelength

1310 Channel Isolation nm dB

1310 Channel Insertion Loss dB dB

°C

°C db/°C < 0.005

dB ps dB

> 45

< 0.10

< 0.10

> 50

-5 to +65

-40 to +85

Single-width

< 0.005

< 0.10

< 0.15

< 0.007

< 0.15

< 0.20

< 0.008

< 0.15

< 0.25

Single-width Double-width Triple-width

88.9 x 50.8 x 8.3 120 x 80 x 13 130 x 87 x 13 150 x 115 x 13

2% Tap, 1310 Upgrade

1260-1360

40 minimum

1.3 maximum

* Includes Connectors

Ordering Information

CWDM

04

Channel Count

02 = 2 Channel

04 = 4 Channel

08 = 8 Channel

16 = 16 Channel

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

5

Package/Pigtail

1 = Thin Cassette,

1 Meter Pigtail

3 = Thin Cassette,

3 Meter Pigtail

5 = Thin Cassette,

5 Meter Pigtail

L = LGX 118

1271

Start Wavelength (nm)

1431

1451

1471

1491

1511

1531

1551

1571

1591

1271

1291

1311

1331

1351

1371

1391

1411

1331

End Wavelength (nm)

1451

1471

1491

1511

1531

1551

1571

1591

1611

1291

1311

1331

1351

1371

1391

1411

1431

B

Options

U = 1310 Upgrade Port

T = 2% Tap Port

X = No Option

B = 1310 Upgrade Port

and 2% Tap Port

ASC

Connectors

ASC = SC/APC

USC = SC/UPC

ALC = LC/APC

ULC = LC/UPC

X = No connectors

ISP

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00049, Revision 2, 5.24.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

138

Fiber Management

1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel

LightLink LANSystem

Specifications

• Designed around Telcordia

®

GR-63NEBS

• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209

• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white

• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility

• Standard density: up to 18-fiber

• High density: up to 36-fiber

• LGX 118 compatible

• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward

• 1RU Patch and Splice Panel holds up to three splice tray kits

LightLink LANSystem

1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel

The AFL 1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 36 fibers is desired.

The panel design is based on a 1 rack unit height and is provisioned with three LGX

®

118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM

®

optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.

Standard 1RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.

Standard 1RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and splice trays.

Features

• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments

• Most common connector styles and types available

• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames

• Modular design

• Slide-out tray with relief cut-outs for simplified connector access

• Optional splice tray kit for on site conversion to patch and splice panel

• Optional front door key lock for heightened protection of internal components

Dimensions

DEPTH (A)

IN INCHES

13.51

WIDTH (B)

IN INCHES

17.00

HEIGHT (C)

IN INCHES

1.75

Applications

• Telecommunications closets

• Data Centers

• Customer Premise

• LAN / WAN Networks

• Central Offices / Headends

• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals

• FTTH / FTTB Networks

RACK

UNITS

1

CAPACITY

18 / 36

UNLOADED

WEIGHT

4 lbs.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00069, Revision 5, 3.5.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

139

LightLink LANSystem

1RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel

Ordering Information

Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired.

When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.

Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).

AFL NO.

FM001344

Color

B

Loading

Charactor

S

Cable Stub

Length (M)

0010

W = White

B = Black

E = Empty

H = Half-loaded with adapters

L = Loaded with adapters and

pigtails (Patch and Splice

only)

S = Preterminated with tight

buffered CPC cable stub

(Riser) (Patch only)

R = Preterminated with OSP

loose tube cable stub

(Patch only)

0002 = 2 meters

0004 = 4 meters etc.

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 12 PSC adapters (2 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Ordering Information

CONFIGURATION

CON012P—1 RU PATCH PANELS—12 FIBERS—LGX118

EMPTY

12 PSC adapters (2 Six Packs)

12 UST adapters (2 Six Packs)

12 PST adapters (2 Six Packs)

6 UDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs)

6 PDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs)

12 ASC adapters (2 Six Packs)

12 UFC adapters (2 Six Packs)

AFL NO.

FM001038

FM001344

FM001346

FM001347

FM001353

FM001354

FM001352

FM001349

12 USC (ZR) adapters (2 Six Packs)

12 AFC adapters (2 Six Packs)

CON024HD—1 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118

FM001351

FM001350

24 UST adapters (2 Twelve Packs)

24 PST adapters (2 Twelve Packs)

12 PDL (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs)

12 USF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs)

12 ASF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs)

FM001355

FM001356

FM001348

FM001357

FM001358

CNS012P—1U PATCH AND SPLICE PANELS—12 FIBERS—LGX118

EMPTY

12 PSC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray

12 UST adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray

12 PST adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray

6 UDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs), Splice Tray

FM001328

FM001323

FM001329

FM001325

FM001334

6 PDL (dup) adapters (2 Three Packs), Splice Tray

12 ASC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray

12 UFC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray

FM001335

FM001333

FM001330

12 USC (ZR) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray

12 AFC adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray

FM001332

FM001331

CNS024HD—1 RU HIGH-DENSITY PATCH & SPLICE PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118

24 UST adapters (2 Twelve Packs), Splice Tray

24 PST adapters (2 Twelve Packs), Splice Tray

12 USF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray

12 ASF (dup) adapters (2 Six Packs), Splice Tray

FM001336

FM001337

FM001338

FM001339

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel Standard Density

(1 splice tray)

Splice Tray Kit: Single Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel High Density

(2 splice trays)

Ribbon Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel Standard

Density (1 splice tray)

Ribbon Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 1RU Patch Panel High Density

(2 splice trays)

Kit, Lock, for CON/CNS Panels

AFL NO.

FM002826-1

FM002826-2

FM002826-1R

FM002826-2R

FM001318

Connector/Adapter Key

TYPE

ASC

ASF

PSC

PSF

USC (PB)

USC (ZR)

USF

PST

UST

AFC

PFC

UFC

ADL

PDL

PLC

UDL (ZR)

UDL (PB)

ULC

DESCRIPTION

SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

Notes:

1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.

2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00069, Revision 5, 3.5.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

140

2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel

Specifications

• Designed around Telcordia

®

GR-63NEBS

• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209

• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white

• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility

• Standard density: up to 36 fiber

• High density: up to 72 fiber

• LGX 118 compatible

• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward

• 2RU Patch and Splice Panel holds up to four splice tray kits

LightLink LANSystem

2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel

The AFL 2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 72 fibers is desired.

The panel design is based on a 2 rack unit height and is provisioned with three

LGX

®

118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates,

XFM optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.

Standard 2RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.

Standard 2RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and splice trays.

Features

• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments

• Most common connector styles and types available

• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames

• Modular design

• Slide-out tray with relief cut-outs for simplified connector access

• Optional splice tray kit for on site conversion to patch and splice panel

• Optional front door key lock for heightened protection of internal components

Applications

• Telecommunications closets

• Data Centers

• Customer Premise

• LAN / WAN Networks

• Central Offices / Headends

• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals

• FTTH / FTTB Networks

Dimensions

DEPTH (A)

IN INCHES

13.51

WIDTH (B)

IN INCHES

17.00

HEIGHT(C)

IN INCHES

3.50

RACK

UNITS

2

* 72 fiber capacity not available in Patch and Splice configuration.

CAPACITY

36 / 72*

UNLOADED

WEIGHT

5 lbs.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

141

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00070, Revision 5, 3.5.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink LANSystem

2RU Fiber Termination Patch/Splice Panel

Ordering Information

Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired.

When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.

Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).

AFL NO.

FM001411

Color

B

Loading

Charactor

S

Cable Stub

Length (M)

0010

W = White

B = Black

E = Empty

H = Half-loaded with adapters

L = Loaded with adapters and

pigtails (Patch and Splice

only)

S = Preterminated with tight

buffered CPC cable stub

(Riser) (Patch only)

R = Preterminated with OSP

loose tube cable stub

(Patch only)

0002 = 2 meters

0004 = 4 meters etc.

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 24 PSC adapters (4 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Ordering Information

CONFIGURATION

CON024P—2 RU PATCH PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118

EMPTY

24 PSC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Beige)

24 UST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX

24 PST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX

12 UDL (dup) adapters (4 Three Packs) 118 LGX (Blue)

12 PDL (dup) adapters (4 Three Packs) 118 LGX (Beige)

24 ASC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Green)

24 UFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX

24 USC (ZR) adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX (Blue)

24 AFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX

CNS024P—2U PATCH AND SPLICE PANELS—24 FIBERS—LGX118

EMPTY

24 PSC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray

24 UST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray

FM001414

FM001411

FM001412

24 PST adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray

12 UDL (dup) adapters (4 three Packs)118 LGX , Splice tray

12 PDL (dup) adapters (4 three Packs)118 LGX , Splice tray

24 ASC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray

24 UFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray

24 USC (ZR) adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray

24 AFC adapters (4 Six Packs) 118 LGX, Splice tray

FM001413

FM001419

FM001420

FM001418

FM001415

FM001417

FM001416

AFL NO.

FM001029

FM001433

FM001434

FM001435

FM001441

FM001442

FM001439

FM001436

FM001438

FM001437

Notes:

1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.

2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

Accessories

DESCRIPTION AFL NO.

Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (1 splice tray) FM002827-1

Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (2 splice trays) FM002827-2

Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (3 splice trays) FM002827-3

Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04 (4 splice trays) FM002827-4

Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon

(1 splice tray)

FM002827-1R

FM002827-2R Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon

(2 splice trays)

Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon

(3 splice trays)

Splice Tray Kit: Mass Fusion, 12 fiber, 2RU, WME02, WME04, Ribbon

(4 splice trays)

FM002827-3R

FM002827-4R

Kit, Lock, for CON / CNS Panels FM001318

Connector/Adapter Key

TYPE

ASC

ASF

UST

AFC

PFC

UFC

ADL

PDL

PSC

PSF

USC (PB)

USC (ZR)

USF

PST

PLC

UDL (ZR)

UDL (PB)

ULC

DESCRIPTION

SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00070, Revision 5, 3.5.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

142

3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel

Specifications

• Telcordia

®

GR-63 NEBS Tested

• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209

• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white

• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility

• Standard density: up to 48-fiber

• High density: up to 96-fiber

• LGX 118 compatible

• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward

LightLink LANSystem

3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel

The AFL 3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 96 fibers is desired. The panel design is based on a 3 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with nine

LGX ® 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM ® optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.

Standard 3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.

Features

• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments

• Most common connector styles and types available

• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames

• LGX compatible master plate (118 mm)

• Modular design

• Provides maximum protection of optical components

Applications

• Telecommunications closets

• Data Centers

• Customer Premise

• LAN / WAN Networks

• Central Offices / Headends

• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals

• FTTH / FTTB Networks

Dimensions

DEPTH (A)

IN INCHES

11.00

WIDTH (B)

IN INCHES

17.00

HEIGHT (C)

IN INCHES

5.25

RACK

UNITS

3

FIBER

CAPACITY

48/96

UNLOADED

WEIGHT

8.4 lbs.

MATERIAL

GAUGE

2.03 mm

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

143

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00077, Revision 5, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink LANSystem

3RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel

Ordering Information

Select the seven digit AFL part number you need, specify black or white, and choose the loading character desired.

AFL NO.

C211291

When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.

Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).

Color

B

W = White

B = Black

Loading

Charactor

S

Cable Stub

Length (M)

0010

E = Empty

H = Half-loaded with adapters

S = Preterminated with tight

buffered CPC cable stub

(Riser) (Patch only)

R = Preterminated with OSP

loose tube cable stub

(Patch only)

0002 = 2 meters

0004 = 4 meters etc.

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 48 PSC adapters (8 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Configuration Part Numbers

All cable clamps offered separately so that customers may choose the correct clamp for their application.

CONFIGURATION

CON048P—3 RU PATCH PANELS—48 FIBERS—LGX118

EMPTY

48 USC (PB) adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 PSC adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 UST adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 PST adapters (8 Six Packs)

24 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)

24 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)

48 ASC adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 UFC adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 USC (ZR) adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 AFC adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 ULC adapters (8 Six Packs)

AFL NO.

C211291

C211300

C211309

C211336

C211345

FM000181

FM000182

C213928

C213916

C213923

C213919

C213934

24 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)

24 USF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)

24 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs)

FM000183

FM000184

FM000185

48 MTRJ adapters (8 Six Packs) FM000186

CON096HD—3 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS—96 FIBERS—LGX118

96 UST adapters (8 Twelve Packs)

96 PST adapters (8 Twelve Packs)

48 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)

FM000187

FM000188

C211349

48 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 USF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)

48 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs)

C211313

C211360

FM000189

FM000190

Notes:

1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.

2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

Connector/Adapter Key

TYPE

ASC

PFC

UFC

ADL

PDL

PLC

UDL (ZR)

UDL (PB)

ULC

ASF

PSC

PSF

USC (PB)

USC (ZR)

USF

PST

UST

AFC

DESCRIPTION

SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00077, Revision 5, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

144

4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel

Specifications

• Telcordia ® GR-63 NEBS Tested

• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209

• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white

• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility

• Standard density: up to 72-fiber

• High density: up to 144-fiber

• LGX 118 compatible

• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward

LightLink LANSystem

4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel

The AFL 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired.

The panel design is based on a 4 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with 12 LGX ® 118 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM

®

optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.

Standard 4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly.

Features

• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments

• Most common connector styles and types available

• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames

• LGX compatible master plate and footprint (118 mm)

• Modular design

• Provides maximum protection of optical components

Applications

• Telecommunications closets

• Data Centers

• Customer Premise

• LAN / WAN Networks

• Central Offices / Headends

• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals

• FTTH / FTTB Networks

Dimensions

DEPTH (A)

IN INCHES

11.00

WIDTH (B)

IN INCHES

17.00

HEIGHT (C)

IN INCHES

7.00

RACK

UNITS

4

FIBER

CAPACITY

72/96/144

UNLOADED

WEIGHT

9 lbs.

MATERIAL

GAUGE

2.03 mm

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

145

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00071, Revision 6, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink LANSystem

4RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel

Ordering Information

Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired.

When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.

Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).

AFL NO.

C211381

Color

B

W = White

B = Black

Loading

Charactor

S

Cable Stub

Length (M)

0010

E = Empty

H = Half-loaded with adapters

S = Preterminated with tight

buffered CPC cable stub

(Riser) (Patch only)

R = Preterminated with OSP

loose tube cable stub

(Patch only)

0002 = 2 meters

0004 = 4 meters etc.

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 72 PSC adapters (12 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Ordering Information

CONFIGURATION

CON072P—4 RU PATCH PANELS—72 FIBERS—LGX118

EMPTY

72 USC (PB) adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 PSC adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 UST adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 PST adapters (12 Six Packs)

36 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)

36 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)

72 ASC adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 UFC adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 AFC adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 ULC adapters (12 Six Packs)

36 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)

36 USF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)

36 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)

72 MTRJ adapters (12 Six Packs)

AFL NO.

C211372

C211381

C211390

C211417

C211426

FM000191

FM000192

C213955

C213941

C213952

C213946

C213959

FM000193

FM000136

FM000194

FM000195

CON096P—4 RU PATCH PANELS—96 FIBERS—LGX118

EMPTY

96 USC (PB) adapters (12 Eight Packs)

96 PSC adapters (12 Eight Packs)

96 UST adapters (12 Eight Packs)

96 PST adapters (12 Eight Packs)

96 ASC adapters (12 Eight Packs)

96 UFC adapters (12 Eight Packs)

96 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Eight Packs)

96 AFC adapters (12 Eight Packs)

96 MTRJ adapters (12 Eight Packs)

FM000344

FM000202

FM000203

C213964

FM000204

C213982

C213970

C213977

C213973

FM000205

Notes:

1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.

2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

CONFIGURATION AFL NO.

CON144HD—4 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS—144 FIBERS—LGX118

EMPTY

72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 ADL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

FM000344

C211432

FM000345

72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 USC (PB) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

C211396

C211439

FM000196

FM000197

FM000198

FM000199

FM000200

FM000133

FM000201

Connector/Adapter Key

TYPE

ASC

ASF

AFC

PFC

UFC

ADL

PDL

PLC

PSC

PSF

USC (PB)

USC (ZR)

USF

PST

UST

UDL (ZR)

UDL (PB)

ULC

DESCRIPTION

SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00071, Revision 6, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

146

5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel

Specifications

• Telcordia

®

GR-63 NEBS Tested

• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209

• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white

• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility

• Standard density: up to 144-fiber

• High density: up to 288-fiber

• LGX 170 compatible

• Standard cable stub location is right rear exiting upward

LightLink LANSystem

5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel

The AFL 5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 288 fibers is desired.

The panel design is based on a 5 rack unit height with a master plate that is provisioned with twelve LGX

®

170 compatible mounting positions that can accommodate adapter plates, XFM

®

optical cassettes, passive optical modules or any combination therein.

Standard 5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates, or stubbed with a factory installed circular premise cable (CPC) or loose tube cable assembly. High density panels utilize two

144 fiber stubs for 288 terminations.

Features

• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise,and co-location environments

• Most common connector styles and types available

• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames

• LGX compatible master plate (170 mm)

• Modular design

• Provides maximum protection of optical components

Applications

• Telecommunications closets

• Data Centers

• Customer Premise

• LAN / WAN Networks

• Central Offices / Headends

• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals

• FTTH / FTTB Networks

Dimensions

DEPTH (A)

IN INCHES

11.00

WIDTH (B)

IN INCHES

17.00

HEIGHT (C)

IN INCHES

8.75

RACK

UNITS

5

FIBER

CAPACITY

144/288

UNLOADED

WEIGHT

9 lbs.

MATERIAL

GAUGE

2.03 mm

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

147

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00080, Revision 6, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink LANSystem

5RU Fiber Termination Patch Panel

Ordering Information

Select the seven digit AFL panel part number, specify the color, and choose the loading character desired.

When ordering stubbed (S), enter the cable stub length required in meters.

Note: Standard stub is Circular Premise Cable (CPC).

AFL NO.

C211462

Color

B

W = White

B = Black

Loading

Charactor

S

Cable Stub

Length (M)

0010

E = Empty

H = Half-loaded with adapters

S = Preterminated with tight

buffered CPC cable stub

(Riser) (Patch only)

R = Preterminated with OSP

loose tube cable stub

(Patch only)

0002 = 2 meters

0004 = 4 meters etc.

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with 144 PSC adapters (12 six packs), connectors and a cable stub 10 meters in length.

Ordering Information

CONFIGURATION AFL NO.

CON144P—5 RU PATCH PANELS—144 FIBERS—LGX170

EMPTY C211453

144 USC (PB) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 PSC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

C211462

C211471

C211498

144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

C211507

FM000206

FM000207

C214009

C213995

C214006

72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)

144 MTRJ adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

FM000208

FM000209

FM000210

FM000211

CON288HD—5 RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS (USES TWO 144 STUBS)—LGX170

144 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 ADL (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 USF (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

144 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Twelve Packs)

C211511

FM000346

C211522

C211475

FM000212

FM000213

Notes:

1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.

2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

Connector/Adapter Key

TYPE

ASC

ASF

AFC

PFC

UFC

ADL

PDL

PLC

PSC

PSF

USC (PB)

USC (ZR)

USF

PST

UST

UDL (ZR)

UDL (PB)

ULC

DESCRIPTION

SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00080, Revision 6, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

148

6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel

LightLink LANSystem

6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel

The AFL 6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 96 fibers is desired. The two panel design is based on a 6-rack unit height comprised of a 3RU Termination Patch Panel and a 3RU

Optical Splice Shelf. The 3RU Termination Patch Panel is provisioned with nine LGX ® 118 compatible mounting positions. The 3RU Optical Splice Shelf utilizes two STF-48 telescoping splice drawers.

Standard 6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays.

Specifications

• Designed around Telcordia

®

GR-63NEBS

• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209

• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white

• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility

• Standard density: up to 48-fiber

• High density: up to 96-fiber

• Fiber storage capacity—one meter per spliced fiber (3 mm jacket)

• Uses two STF-48 telescoping splice drawers

• Two panel package—3U patch, 3U splice

• Nine LGX 118 mm positions

Features

• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise and co-location environments

• Most common connector styles and types available

• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames

• LGX-compatible master plate (118 mm)

• Modular design

• Compact and versatile method of organizing splicing and connectivity

• Provides maximum protection of optical components

Applications

• Telecommunications closets

• Data Centers

• Customer Premise

• LAN / WAN Networks

• Central Offices / Headends

• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals

• FTTH / FTTB Networks

Dimensions

DEPTH (A)

IN INCHES

11.00

WIDTH (B)

IN INCHES

17.00

HEIGHT (C)

IN INCHES

10.5

RACK

UNITS

6

FIBER

CAPACITY

48/96

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

149

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00073, Revision 5, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink LANSystem

6RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel

Ordering Information

Select the seven-digit AFL panel part number, specify the color and choose the loading character desired.

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with, master plate, adapter plates, 48 USC adapters (8 Six packs), splice drawer (48 and up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.

AFL NO.

C211543

Color

B

Loading

Charactor

S

W = White

B = Black

E = Empty

H = Half-loaded with adapters

L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails

Empty - Includes master plate, mounting hardware, cable clamp.

Unloaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), hardware, cable clamp.

Loaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.

Configuration Part Numbers

CONFIGURATION AFL NO.

CNS048P—6U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS

(1 EA. 3U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)

—LGX118

EMPTY

48 USC (PB) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)

48 PSC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)

C211534

C211543

C211552

48 UST adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)

48 PST adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)

C211579

C211588

24 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000234

24 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000235

48 ASC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210928

48 UFC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210913

48 USC (ZR) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)

AFC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)

C210922

C210917

ULC adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C210931

24 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000236

24 USF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000237

24 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Three Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000238

48 MTRJ adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000239

CNS096HD—6U HIGH DENSITY PATCH & SPLICE PANELS—LGX118

96 UST adapters (8 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawer 2-48 position)

96 PST adapters (8 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position)

FM000240

FM000241

48 UDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211594

48 PSF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211558

48 PDL (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) C211601

48 USF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000242

48 ASF (dup) adapters (8 Six Packs) Splice Drawer (2-48 position) FM000243

Notes:

1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.

2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

STF-48 Telescoping Splice Drawer

Connector/Adapter Key

TYPE

ASC

ASF

PSC

PSF

USC (PB)

USC (ZR)

USF

PST

UST

AFC

PFC

UFC

ADL

PDL

PLC

UDL (ZR)

UDL (PB)

ULC

DESCRIPTION

SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM

LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

AFL NO.

911442-00-00

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00073, Revision 5, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

150

7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel

Specifications

• Designed around Telcordia

®

GR-63NEBS

• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209

• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white

• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility

• Standard density: up to 72-fiber

• High density: up to 144-fiber

• Fiber storage capacity—one meter per spliced fiber (3 mm jacket)

• Uses three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers

• Two panel package—4U patch and

4U splice

• 12 LGX 118 mm positions

LightLink LANSystem

7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel

The AFL 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired.The two panel design is based on a 7 rack unit height comprised of a 4RU Termination Patch

Panel and a 3RU Optical Splice Shelf.The 4RU Termination Patch Panel includes a master plate that is provisioned with 12 LGX ® 118 compatible mounting positions.The 3RU

Optical Splice Shelf utilizes three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers.

Standard 7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays.

Features

• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments

• Most common connector styles and types available

• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames

• LGX-compatible master plate (118 mm)

• Modular design

• Compact and versatile method of organizing splicing and connectivity

Dimensions

DEPTH (A)

IN INCHES

11.00

WIDTH (B)

IN INCHES

17.00

HEIGHT (C)

IN INCHES

12.25

• Provides maximum protection of optical components

Applications

• Telecommunications closets

• Data Centers

• Customer Premise

• LAN / WAN Networks

• Central Offices / Headends

• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals

• FTTH / FTTB Networks

RACK UNITS

7

FIBER CAPAC-

ITY

72/144

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

151

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00074, Revision 6, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink LANSystem

7RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel

Ordering Information

Select the seven-digit AFL number, specify the color and choose the loading character desired.

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with master plate, adapter plates,

48 USC adapters (8 Six packs), splice drawer (48 and up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.

AFL NO.

C211624

Color

B

Loading

Charactor

L

W = White

B = Black

E = Empty

H = Half-loaded with adapters

L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails

Empty - Includes master plate, mounting hardware, cable clamp.

Unloaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), hardware, cable clamp.

Loaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.

Ordering Information

CONFIGURATION AFL NO.

CNS072P—7U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS

(1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)

—LGX118

EMPTY C211615

72 USC (PB) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211624

72 PSC adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211633

72 UST adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position)

72 PST adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position)

C211660

C211669

36 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000244

36 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000245

72 ASC adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210958

72 UFC adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210946

72 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210953

72 AFC adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210949

72 ULC adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C210964

36 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000246

36 USF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000247

36 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Three Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000248

72 MTRJ adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000249

CONFIGURATION AFL NO.

CNS144HD—7RU HIGH DENSITY PATCH PANELS

(1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)

—LGX118

72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211673

72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211637

72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211684

72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000250

72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000251

144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000252

144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000253

144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000254

144 USC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000255

144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs)Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000256

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

STF-48 Telescoping Splice Drawer

AFL NO.

911442-00-00

CNS096P—7U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS

(1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)

—LGX118

EMPTY

96 UST adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position)

96 UFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position)

C210967

C210971

C210976

96 AFC adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210982

96 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210985

96 ASC adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) C210989

96 MTRJ adapters (12 Eight Packs) Splice Drawers (2-48 position) FM000257

Notes:

1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.

2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

Connector/Adapter Key

TYPE

ASC

ASF

DESCRIPTION

SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

PSC

PSF

SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM

USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

PST ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

UST

AFC

PFC

ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

UFC

ADL

PDL

FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

PLC LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM

ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00074, Revision 6, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

152

8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel

Specifications

• Designed around Telcordia ® GR-63NEBS

• Aluminum construction per ASTMB209

• Durable textured powder coat finish available in black or white

• Universal 19/23" EIA/TIA rack compatibility

• Standard density: up to 144-fiber

• Fiber storage capacity—one meter per spliced fiber (3 mm jacket)

• Uses three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers

• Two panel package Standard Density:

5U patch and 3U splice

• 12 LGX 170 mm positions

LightLink LANSystem

8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel

The AFL 8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel is designed for use as a rack mount interconnect point where termination and connectivity of up to 144 fibers is desired. The standard density, two panel design is based on an 8 rack unit height comprised of a 5RU

Termination Patch Panel and a 3RU Optical Splice Shelf. The 5RU Termination Patch Panel includes a master plate that is provisioned with twelve LGX

®

170 compatible mounting positions. The 3RU Optical Splice Shelf utilizes three STF-48 telescoping splice drawers.

Standard 8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panels are available empty for complete field configuration, half loaded with adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays, or loaded with pigtails, adapter plates and STF-48 telescoping splice trays.

Features

• Fits comfortably into new and existing interconnect, cross-connect, customer premise, and co-location environments

• Most common connector styles and types available

• Compatible with industry standard equipment frames

• LGX compatible master plate (170 mm)

• Modular design

• Compact and versatile method of organizing splicing and connectivity

Dimensions

PANEL VERSION

Standard

DEPTH (A)

IN INCHES

11.00

WIDTH (B)

IN INCHES

17.00

• Provides maximum protection of optical components

Applications

• Telecommunications closets

• Data Centers

• Customer Premise

• LAN / WAN Networks

• Central Offices / Headends

• Hubs / Cabinets / Remote Terminals

• FTTH / FTTB Networks

HEIGHT (C)

IN INCHES

14.00

RACK

UNITS

8

FIBER CAPACITY

144

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

153

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00076, Revision 5, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink LANSystem

8RU Fiber Patch and Splice Panel

Ordering Information

Select the seven-digit AFL number, specify the color and choose the loading character desired.

Example: Order number for a panel Black in color, loaded with, master plate, adapter plates, 144 USC adapters (12 Twelve packs), splice drawer

(48 and up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.

AFL NO.

C211705

Color

B

Loading

Charactor

L

W = White

B = Black

E = Empty

H = Half-loaded with adapters

L = Loaded with adapters and pigtails

Empty - Includes master plate, mounting hardware, cable clamp.

Unloaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), hardware, cable clamp.

Loaded - Includes master plate, adapter plates, adapters, splice drawer (48 & up), pigtails with connectors, hardware, cable clamp.

Configuration Part Numbers

CONFIGURATION AFL NO.

CNS144P—8U PATCH & SPLICE PANELS

(1 EA. 4U PATCH, 3U SPLICE)

—LGX170

EMPTY C211696

144 USC (PB) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211705

144 PSC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211714

144 UST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211741

144 PST adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211750

72 UDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000258

72 PDL (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000259

144 ASC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211021

144 UFC adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) C211007

144 USC (ZR) adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000260

72 PSF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000261

72 USF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000262

72 ASF (dup) adapters (12 Six Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000263

144 MTRJ adapters (12 Twelve Packs) Splice Drawers (3-48 position) FM000264

Notes:

1) All MM cable is 62.5 μm unless otherwise specified.

2) When ordering Empty Termination Patch/Splice Panel, accessories are available for field configuration.

Accessories

DESCRIPTION

STF-48 Telescoping Splice Drawer

Connector/Adapter Key

TYPE

ASC

ASF

PSC

PSF

DESCRIPTION

SC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

SC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

SC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

USC (PB) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, SM

USC (ZR) SC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

USF SC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

PST

UST

AFC

ST—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

ST—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

FC—Angle Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

PFC

UFC

ADL

FC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

FC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

LC—Angle Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

PDL

PLC

LC—Physical Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, MM

LC—Physical Polish, Simplex, PB sleeve, MM

UDL (ZR) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, ZR sleeve, SM

UDL (PB) LC—Ultra Polish, Duplex, PB sleeve, SM

ULC LC—Ultra Polish, Simplex, ZR sleeve, SM

AFL NO.

911442-00-00

154

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00076, Revision 5, 5.27.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Poli-MOD

®

Patch and Splice Module

12-Fiber SC/UPC Configuration

Poli-MOD

®

Patch and Splice Module

AFL's new Poli-MOD is an innovative patch and splice module, which offers an inventive and effective means to accommodate up to 24 fiber interconnections in an industry-standard, single-slot LGX ® 118 footprint. The new Poli-MOD offers a unique and robust way to secure cable without the need for time-wasting, tie-wrap alternatives.

Additionally, the module leverages a creative snap-in splice sleeve cradle to securely manage both single and ribbon fiber arrangements. These features provide the capacity to outfit a standard 4RU rack-mount panel with up to 288-fiber interconnections.

The Poli-MOD is also offered in an arrangement that supports the low loss budget requirements of Distributed Antenna System (DAS) networks. This is accomplished through the elimination of an interconnection point while providing a robust splicing environment for rack and wall-mount panel applications.

Features

• 24-fiber interconnection capacity

• LGX 118 compatibility (single-slot module)

• Effective and time-saving cable mounting mechanism (no tie-wraps necessary)

• Inventive splice sleeve cradle

• Available in SC, LC, ST and FC connector arrangements

• Organized fiber routing

• Fixed solution, no moving parts

• Multi-directional cable entry access

• DIN rail mountable (with DIN Mount Kit)

DAS Poli-MOD

Applications

• Telecommunications Closets

• Data Centers

• Customer Premise

• Local Area Networks

• Wide Area Networks

• Central Offices

• Hub Sites

• Cabinets

• Remote Terminals

• Distributed Antenna Systems (DAS)

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

155

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00089, Revision 3, 5.18.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Poli-MOD

®

Patch and Splice Module

Ordering Information

Example: PM-L-12-ASC-0-S-01

PM L 12 ASC

Configuration

E = Empty (Splicing Only)

H = Half Loaded

(Adapter Plate only)

L = Loaded

(Adapter Plate & Pigtails)

D = DAS Poli-MOD

1

Fiber/Connector Count

06 = 6 Fibers/Connectors

12 = 12 Fibers/Connectors

24 = 24 Fibers/Connectors 2

XX = Empty

1. DAS Poli-MOD requires specialty packaging and is packaged as "1 Poli-MOD per box" ONLY.

2. 24 Fibers/Connectors are only available in a LC Duplex configuration.

3. Angle and Ultra-Polished connector types are only available with single-mode fiber configurations.

Connector Type 3

ASC = Angle-Polished SC

USC = Ultra-Polished SC

PSC = Multimode SC

ALC = Angle-Polished LC

ULC = Ultra-Polished LC

PLC = Multimode LC

UST = Ultra-Polished ST

PST = Multimode ST

AFC = Angle-Polished FC

UFC = Ultra-Polished FC

PFC = Multimode FC

XXX = Empty

Connector Color Codes

CONNECTOR

APC (Angled Polish Connector)

UPC (Ultra Polish Connector)

PC-OM1

PC-OM2

PC-OM3 / PC-OM4

COLOR

Green

Blue

Beige

Black

Aqua

0

Fiber Type

0 = Single-mode

(G.657.A1 BIF)

1 = 62.5 μm (OM1)

2 = 50 μm (OM2)

3 = 50 μm (OM3)

4 = 50 μm (OM4)

X = Empty

S

Fiber Arrangement

S = Single/Standard

R = Ribbon

3 = 3 mm, 3 meter DAS

X = No Fiber

(Half Loaded or Empty)

01

Packaging

01 = 1 Poli-MOD per box*

06 = 6 Poli-MODs per box

12 = 12 Poli-MODs per box

Poli-MOD Kits/Accessories

DESCRIPTION

Poli-MOD Cable Mounting Clip Kit

Poli-MOD Spiral Wrap Kit

Fusion Splice Sleeve, FP-03, 40 mm

Adapter Bracket for Mounting Single Poli-MOD

Corning CCH and PCH 145 mm Adapter Bracket

DIN Mount Kit, LGX ® 118

AFL NO.

FM003053

FM003280

S000206

FM000948-B

FM001636

FM003394

Dimensions

6.07 in. (154 mm)

1.14 in.

(29 mm)

4.14 in.

(105 mm)

5.12 in.

(130 mm)

156

© 2013, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00089, Revision 3, 5.18.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels

Pigtail Assemblies for Patch and Splice Panels

AFL’s pigtail assemblies help eliminate labor-intensive field termination, yet guarantee reliable performance. Featuring a unified construction allowing for easy fiber identification and rapid installation, these assemblies are built to exceed all TIA and Telcordia requirements.

Splicer Connector Specifications

PARAMETER

Cable Type

Insertion Loss

Return Loss

Operating Temperature (900 µm Fiber Coating)

PVC

Nylon

TPEE

VALUE

250 µm, 900 µm

< 0.15 dB

> 40 dB

-40ºC to 75ºC

0ºC to 75ºC

-25ºC to 75ºC

Ordering Information

POLISH

FIBER

TYPE

CONNECTOR INTERFACE AFL NO.

SC

CPC PIGTAIL KITS, 3 METER, 12-FIBER

ST

APC

UPC

PC

PC

PC

SMF C152906-0003 —

LC

CS007719-0003

SMF C165943-0003 C152671-0003 C223369-0003

62.5 µm C165463-0003 C223366-0003 C223373-0003

50 µm CS007672-0003 CS007674-0003 CS007676-0003

50 µm LO CS007673-0003 CS007675-0003 CS007677-0003

PC

PC

PC

900 µm TIGHT-BUFFERED PIGTAIL KITS, 3 METER, 12-FIBER

APC

UPC

SMF

SMF

C223312-0003

C223492-0003

— CS003981-0003

CS003979-0003 CS001037-0003

62.5 µm

50 µm

CS000386-0003

CS001373-0003

50 µm LO CS003056-0003

CS002150-0003 CS002067-0003

CS002136-0003 CS002081-0003

CS003980-0003 CS003058-0003

Jumper Specifications

PARAMETER

Insertion Loss

SM

MM

Return Loss

SM

MM

Cable Bend Radius

Standard

Bend Insensitive

Durability

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature max max max max min min

VALUE

LC

0.3

0.5

-55.0 dB

-20.0 dB

<30 mm

<15 mm

200 cycles

-40ºC to +85ºC

-40ºC to +85ºC

SC

0.3

0.5

-55.0 dB

ST

0.5

0.5

-55.0 dB

FC

0.3

0.5

-55.0 dB

LC-APC

0.3

-65.0 dB

SC-APC

0.5

-65.0 dB

MT

0.75

0.6

-55.0 dB

-20.0 dB

500 cycles

157

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00096, Revision 4, 4.21.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

XFM

®

MPO Optical Cassettes

AL

PA

TC

H & SPLICE EN

CLO

SU

IC

Fiber Optic Cable

Applications

• Data centers

• LAN, WAN and SAN

• Interoffice cross-connects

• Campus environments

Xpress Fiber Management

®

(XFM)

MPO Optical Cassettes

AFL’s Xpress Fiber Management Optical Cassette product line is a family of preterminated fanout modules that streamline the deployment of optical network infrastructure.

The primary function of these products is to break out multi-fiber ribbon connectors to simplex or duplex style connectors for connection to adjacent network elements.

The Xpress Fiber Management Optical Cassette solution features low-loss MPO style trunk cable assemblies. These cassettes are available in the industry standard LGX ® footprint as well as a selection of Corning Cable Systems ™ footprints to support embedded base installations. All modules feature a durable powder coat finish, and are compatible with all 1U-4U LANSystem platforms. All modules are clearly labeled with a silk-screened "A" and "B" positioning reference to ensure proper polarity is maintained in the network, referenced to the polarity convention being deployed.

Features

• 12- and 24- port configurations

• ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3 compliant

• Single-slot LGX packages

• Compatible with LANSystem and WME hardware

• Available in black with rear

MPO connection(s)

• SMF, 62.5 µm MMF and

50 µm MMF supported

• SC- and LC-MPO standard configurations

• ST- and FC-MPO configurations available on special order

Optical Performance Data

PARAMETER

Max IL (dB)

Typical IL (dB)

Reflectance (dB)

LC - MPO

1.15

0.6

-55

Single-mode Fiber (OS1)

LCAPC - MPO

1.15

0.6

-65

Notes:

1. Single-mode IL test wavelengths 1310 nm and 155 0nm

2. Multimode IL test wavelengths 850 nm and 1300 nm

3. Single-mode RL test wavelengths 1310 nm and 1550 nm

4. Multimode RL test wavelengths 850 nm and 1300 nm

SC - MPO

1.3

0.6

-55

SCAPC - MPO

1.3

0.6

-65

ST - MPO

1.3

0.6

-55

Technical Specifications:

1. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.3

2. Telcordia ® GR-326-CORE compliant single fiber connectors

3. Telcordia GR-1435-CORE compliant multi-fiber connectors

Ordering Information

FIBER COUNT,

CONNECTOR

OPTION

12F, LC

24F, LC

12F, SC

12F, ST

SINGLE-MODE

UPC - MPO

(MALE, APC)

APC - MPO

(Male, APC)

FM000090-B FM001477-B

FM000691-B FM001653-B

FM000087-B FM001465-B

FM000093-B N/A

MULTIMODE

50 µm LOMMF OM4

PC - MPO

(Male, PC)

FM000273-B

62.5 µm OM1

PC - MPO

(Male, PC)

FM000092-B

FM000692-B FM000663-B

FM000272-B

FM000274-B

FM000089-B

FM000095-B

Multimode Fiber

(OM1, OM2 and 50 µm Laser Optimized)

LC - MPO SC - MPO ST - MPO

1.15

0.6

-30

1.3

0.6

-30

1.3

0.6

-30

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2003, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00117, Revision 5, 6.4.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

158

AL

PA

TC

H & SPLICE EN

CLO

SU

IC

Fiber Optic Cable

Xpress Fiber Management

®

(XFM)

MPO Optical Cassettes

Ordering Information – Accessories

DESCRIPTION

145 mm Adapter Bracket

AFL NO.

FM001636

NOTE: Allows standard LGX modules, such as AFL’s Poli-Mod Interconnect Module and the XFM Optical Cassette, to be mounted into existing Corning Cable Systems

CCH series and PCH series racks and wall mount products.

Dimensions

128.0

28.9

104.6

130.0

ADAPTERS SHOWN

FOR REFERENCE ONLY

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

159

© 2003, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00117, Revision 5, 6.4.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM

CWDM 4-Channel Mini Module

CWDM 8-Channel Mini Module

Thin Film Filter (TFF) Compact Series CWDM

AFL’s TFF compact series CWDM modules deliver reliable performance and flexibility in every network application – from cellular backhaul and metro Ethernet to access and security. With its reduced package size, this new outside plant CWDM module has added flexibility, making deployment options more convenient.

This CWDM series is based on proven Thin Film Filter technology, offering low insertion loss and high thermal stability over the entire outside plant operating temperature range. Numerous configurations are available to meet unique needs and support new or existing network architectures. Typical options include a variety of configurations

(mux, demux, and balanced), upgrade ports (1310, C-Band, and others), test / monitoring ports and multiple termination options.

Features

• Low insertion loss

• Compact size

• High thermal stability

• Telcordia GR-1221-CORE compliant

• RoHS 6/6 compliant

Applications

• CWDM systems

• Metro ethernet / access networks

• Cellular backhaul networks

Specifications

PARAMETER

Operating Wavelength

Channel Spacing

Center Wavelength

Pass Band

1310 Upgrade Port Pass Band

1310 Upgrade Port Insertion Loss

CWDM Channel Insertion Loss

CWDM Adjacent Channel Isolation

CWDM Non-adjacent Channel

Isolation

PDL

PMD

Return Loss

Directivity

Maximum Input Power

Package Size

Operating Temperature

UNIT

nm nm nm nm nm dB dB dB dB dB ps dB dB mW

Mm

°C

WITHOUT UPGRADE

PORT WITH 1310 NM UPGRADE PORT

4 Channel 8 Channel 4 Channel 8 Channel

≤ 2.0

≤ 0.1

≤ 2.5

20

Customer specified

± 6.5

1270~1350

1.0

60 (l) x 35 (w) x 6 (d)

* Actual optical specifications will vary based on product configuration

1. Higher and lower channel counts available

1471~1611

≥ 30

≥ 45

≤ 0.2

≤ 2.6

≤ 0.25

≤ 3.4

≥ 45

≥ 50

≤ 300

70 (l) x 45 (w) x 9 (d)

-40 ~ +85

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

160

© 2010, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00048, Revision 1, 10.30.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Interchangeable Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Splice Closures and Fiber Enclosures

LG-410

LL-4848

LG-500

Optical Splice

Trays

LL-2448-485

LG-600

LL-2448

LL-400s

LL-400b

© 2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00133, Revision 0, 8.5.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Aerial Weathertight Splice Closures

LightGuard

®

(LG) Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures

LightGuard

®

Aerial Weathertight

Fiber Optic Splice Closures

The AFL family of Aerial Weathertight Splice Closures is designed to provide a cost-effective solution for your aerial splicing needs.

Quality engineering reduces the installation time, training and complexity associated with fiber splicing in the field. The closures have all been designed to be installed without the need for special tools, heat, adhesives, drills or any powered equipment.

Durable and easy to install, these closures will improve productivity, reduce labor expenses and last the life of the plant.

Features member tie downs provide for cable additions without disturbing those previously installed grommet design provides for a weathertight and insect seal and require only a common can wrench for installation

®

GR-771 aerial weathertight closure requirements

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass,

Mechanical

Splice Tray Capacity - Single, Mass

Cable Ports

Cable Entrance

Cable Sizes (O.D.)

LG-410-U-0

72, 288, 36

3, 2

4-8

In-line, Butt

4 @ 0.3-0.8"

LG-420-U-0

12, 48, 12 n/a, n/a

4-6

In-line (taut sheath)

4 @ 0.3-0.8"

LG-500-U-0

96, 288, 36

3, 2

4-8

In-line, Butt

4 @ 0.3-0.83"

Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits

4 @ 0.3-0.65"

4 @ 0.3-0.5"

Up to 6 with Dual Grommet Kits

2 @ 0.3-0.77"

2 @ 0.3-0.65"

2 @ 0.3-0.5"

CLOSURE TEST

1, 2

Cable Retention (100 lbs.)

Impact Resistance (0-40 °C)

Chemical Resistance

Cable Flexing

Dust (Weather Tightness)

Driving Rain

Rodent Test

Dimensions

(L x W x D) in. (cm)

Weight lbs. (kg)

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00

(91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)

8.5 (3.86)

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00

(91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)

8.5 (3.86)

Note 1: Tested to Telcordia GR-771-Core and Aerial Strand requirements

Note 2: Not all Telcordia tests are listed due to space constraints; All closures are designed and tested to appropriate aerial test requirements

Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits

4 @ 0.3-0.65"

4 @ 0.3-0.5"

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

27.00 x 8.25 x 4.00

(68.58 x 20.96 x 10.16)

6.4 (2.90)

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LG-600-U-0

288, 1152, 96

12, 8

6-12 (6 per end)

In-line, Butt

6 @ 0.4-1.04"

Up to 12 with Dual Grommet

Kits

6 @ 0.4-0.87"

6 @ 0.5"

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

Passed

27.00 x 11.25 x 7.50

(68.58 x 28.58 x 19.05)

18 (8.16)

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00065, Revision 5, 2.3.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

162

LG-410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Features cable ports (expandable to eight cable entrances) mass or mechanical splicing system and requires only a common can wrench for installation rating required by Telcordia to meet Telcordia ® aerial and

UV resistance requirements

LightGuard

®

410 Aerial Weathertight

Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The AFL LightGuard (LG) 410 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for small to medium count fiber splicing (< 72 single or 288 mass) in aerial applications and provides additional fiber bundle storage with its extended length design and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)

Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight - lbs. (kg)

VALUE

72, 288, 36

3, 2

In-line, Butt

4-8

4 @ 0.3-0.8"

Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits

4 @ 0.3-0.65"

4 @ 0.3-0.5"

36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)

8.5 (3.86)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Aerial Weathertight Universal Fiber Optic Splice Closure, up to 72 Single fusion splices, 4 cable ports expandable to 8. Equipped w/ 4 self sealing ports, (2) grounding terminals and standard length aerial hangars.

Does not include splice trays or cable grounding kits.

Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers

Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single fused fibers

(maximum of 3 trays in LG-410)

Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single fusion or 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 Fibers (maximum of 2 trays in LG-410)

Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers

(maximum of 2 trays in LG-410)

Single Fusion Splice Tray Stores 48 Single Fused Fibers

6-Port Grommet Kit

Dual Grommet Cable Expansion Kit - Includes (2) LG-400 Dual

Grommets and Cable Hardware

Dual Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Grommets for the

LG-400 Series Closures

Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port)

Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures

Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG

Extended Aerial Hanger Kit

Adjustable Aerial Hanger Bracket Kit

MODEL NO.

LG-410-U-0

LG-400/500

LL-2400

LL-2448

LL-4800

LG-400-S

AFL NO.

FC000022

911499-00-00

91710-06

911289-00-02

91711-07

LL-2448-48S FA000045

LG-400/500

LG-400/LG-500

Dual Grommet Kit

FC000573

911386-00-01

LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00

911496-00-00

CGH-4 FC000024

LG-400/500 911497-00-00

LG-400/500/600 FC000572

* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00135, Revision 4, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

163

LG-420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Features

• Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports (expandable to six cable entrances)

• Taut Sheath splice module accommodates up to twelve fusion splices and supports storage of up to twelve optical connector adapters

• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation

• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia

• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia

®

aerial and UV resistance requirements

• Protective channel allowing taut fibers or bundles to pass through the closure

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

LightGuard

®

420 Aerial Weathertight

Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The AFL LightGuard (LG) 420 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed to allow for Taut Sheath (no slack) splicing in aerial applications such as repairing cable sheath and fibers or providing mid-span access. A common can wrench is only required for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)

Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight - lbs. (kg)

VALUE

12, 48, 12 n/a, n/a

In-line (taut sheath)

4-8

4 @ 0.3-0.8"

Up to 6 with Dual Grommet Kits

2 @ 0.3-0.8"

2 @ 0.3-0.65"

2 @ 0.3-0.5"

36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)

8.5 (3.86)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Aerial Weathertight Universal Taut Sheath Splice Closure -

Includes: (2) 6 fiber single fusion splice organizers, (2) grounding terminals and 4 individual self sealing ports. Expandable to 8 cable ports.

Does not include cable grounding kits.

Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers

Dual Grommet Cable Expansion Kit - Includes (2) LG-400 Dual

Grommets and Cable Hardware

Dual Grommet Kit - Includes (10) Dual Port Grommets

Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port)

Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures

Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG

Extended Aerial Hanger Kit

Adjustable Aerial Hanger Bracket Kit

MODEL NO.

LG-420-U-0

LG-400/500

AFL NO.

FC000023

911499-00-00

LG-400/LG-500

Dual Grommet Kit

911386-00-01

LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00

LG-400-S 911496-00-00

CGH-4

LG-400/500

FC000024

911497-00-00

LG-400/500/600 FC000572

* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

164

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00136, Revision 5, 1.5.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LG-420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure

(FC000099 Model)

Features

• Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports:

- 2 express ports

- 2 multi-drop ports

• Up to 16 connections with use of

LGX

®

118 duplex adapters

• Special multi-drop grommet and cable retention

• Special lock-out interior enclosure

• (2) 8-pack adapter plates

• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation

• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia

• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia

®

aerial and UV resistance requirements

• Protective channel allowing taut fibers or bundles to pass through the closure

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

LightGuard

®

420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight

Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The AFL LightGuard (LG) 420 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to allow for Taut Sheath (no slack) splicing in aerial applications such as FTTx access networks. The LG-420 FTTx provides access for 1 to 16 subscriber drops and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)

Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight - lbs. (kg)

VALUE

Up to 32

1, n/a

In-line (taut sheath)

2 - express 2 - multi-drop

0.3-0.77" express

0.22-0.38" drop

36.00 x 8.00 x 4.00 (91.44 x 20.32 x 10.16)

8.5 (3.86)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure for FTTx applications–

Includes: splice tray to accommodate up to 32 single fusion splices,

(2) Blank adapter bulkheads (SC style), (2) Grounding terminals and 4 individual self-sealing ports. With an LGX118 footprint can connect up to 16 subscribers. Special interior lock out protrective closure. Does not include cable grounding kits.

Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure with Grounding Kit for FTTx applications – Includes: splice tray to accommodate up to

32 single fusion splices, (2) Blank adapter bulkheads (SC style), (2)

Grounding terminals and 4 individual self-sealing ports. With an

LGX118 footprint can connect up to 16 subscribers. Special interior lock out protrective closure.

Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers

Dual Grommet Cable Expansion Kit - Includes (2) LG-400 Dual

Grommets and Cable Hardware

Dual Grommet Kit - Includes (10) Dual Port Grommets

Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port)

Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures

Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG

Extended Aerial Hanger Kit

Adjustable Bracket

MODEL NO.

LG-420-U-FTTx

LG-420-FTTx

LG-400/LG-500

LG-400/LG-500

Dual Grommet Kit

911386-00-01

LG-400-Dual-Kit 911495-00-00

LG-400-S 911496-00-00

CGH-4

LG-400/LG-500

LG-400/LG-500

AFL NO.

FC000099

FC000206

911499-00-00

FC000024

911497-00-00

FC000572

* See Accessory Specifications.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00137, Revision 5, 12.4.14

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

165

LG-500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Features

• Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports

• Splice trays available for single, mass or mechanical splicing

• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation

• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia

• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia

®

aerial and UV resistance requirements

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

LightGuard

®

500 Aerial Weathertight

Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The AFL LightGuard (LG) 500 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for small to medium count fiber splicing (< 96 single, 288 using LL-2448-48S splice tray or 288 mass) in aerial applications. Compact in design for congested aerial construction. and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)

Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight - lbs. (kg)

VALUE

96, 288, 36

3, 2

In-line, Butt

4-8

4 @ 0.3-0.77"

Up to 8 with Dual Grommet Kits

4 @ 0.3-0.65"

4 @ 0.3-0.5"

27.00 x 8.25 x 4.00 (65.58 x 20.96 x 10.16)

6.4 (2.90)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION MODEL NO.

Aerial Weathertight Universal Compact Splice Closure - Includes:

(4) cable retention kits, (2) grounding terminals, (4) self sealing ports and standard aerial hangars. Does not include splice trays or cable grounding kits.

Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 single fused fibers

(maximum of 3 trays in LG-500)

Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single Fusion, 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers or 12 Mechanical (maximum of 2 trays in LG-500)

Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers

(maximum of 2 trays in LG-500)

Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 Mass fusion sleeves/144 fibers

(maximum of 2 trays in LG-500)

Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 48 Single Fused Fibers

Dual Grommet Kit - Includes: (2) small grommets and hardware

Dual Grommet Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Port Grommets

Closure Extension Kit - Used to join multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers

Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG

Extended Aerial Hanger Kit

Adjustable Aerial Hanger Kit Bracket Kit (included with closure)

LG-500 6-Port Drop Cable Kit

LG-500-U-0

LL-2400

LL-2448

LL-4800

LL-4848

LL-2448-48S

Dual Grommet Kit

LG-400-Dual-Kit

LG-400/500

CGH-4

LG-400/500

LG-400/500/600

6-Port Drop Kit

* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

AFL NO.

FC000026

91710-06

911289-00-02

91711-07

911437-00-02

FA000045

911386-00-01

911495-00-00

911499-00-00

FC000024

911497-00-00

FC000572

FC000573

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

166

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00138, Revision 4, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LG-500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures

Features

• Four individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports:

- 2 express ports

- 2 multi-drop ports

• Up to 12 connections with use of LGX

®

118 duplex adapters

• Special multi-drop grommet and cable retention

• Special lock-out interior enclosure

• (2) 6-pack adapter plates

• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system

• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia

• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia aerial and

UV resistance requirements

• Protective channel allowing taut fibers or bundles to pass through the closure

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS)-listed

LightGuard

®

500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight

Fiber Optic Splice Closures

The AFL LightGuard (LG) 500 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to allow for fiber splicing in aerial applications such as FTTx access networks.

The LG-500 FTTx provides cable entry and connectivity for one to 12 subscriber drops.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)

Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight - lbs. (kg)

VALUE

Up to 32

1, N/A

In-line

2 express

2 multi-drop

0.3-0.77" express

0.22-0.38" drop

27.00 x 8.3 x 4.00 (68.6 x 21 x 10.2)

6.4 (2.9)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure includes splice tray accommodating up to 32 single fusion splices, (2) blank SC-style adapter bulkheads, (2) grounding terminals and (4) individual self-sealing ports. Connects up to 12 subscribers with an LGX

®

118 footprint. Special interior lock out protective closure. Does not include cable grounding kits.

Closure extension kit joins multiple closures for extended sheath openings required to repair cable sheath and damaged fibers

Dual grommet cable expansion kit includes (2) LG-400 dual grommets and cable hardware

Cable grounding harness includes (4) harness 8" #6 AWG

Extended aerial hanger kit

Adjustable bracket

LG-500 6-port drop cable kit

MODEL NO.

AFL NO.

LG-500-U-FTTx FC000899

LG-400/LG-500 911499-00-00

LG-400/LG-500

Dual Grommet Kit

CGH-4

911386-00-01

FC000024

LG-400/LG-500 911497-00-00

LG-400/LG-500 FC000572

6-Port Drop Kit FC000573

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

167

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00139, Revision 2, 12.13.13

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Features

• Six individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports (expandable to twelve cable entrances)

• Splice trays available for single, mass or mechanical splicing

• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation

• Integrated grounding clamp through aerial hangers

• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia

• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia

®

aerial and UV resistance requirements

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

LightGuard

®

600 Aerial Weathertight

Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The AFL LightGuard (LG) 600 Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for high count fiber splicing (< 288 single or 1152 mass) in aerial applications where a cost-effective high cable entry closure is desired and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical

VALUE

288, 1152, 96

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 12, 8, 8

Cable Entrance Configuration In-line, Butt

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)

4-8

6 @ 0.4-0.87"

Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight - lbs. (kg)

Up to 12 with Dual Grommet Kits

6 @ 0.4-0.87"

6 @ 0.5"

27.00 x 11.25 x 7.50 (68.58 x 28.58 x 19.05)

18 (8.16)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Aerial Weathertight Universal High Capacity Splice Closure -

Includes: (4) cable retention kits, (2) gounding terminals, (6) self sealing ports and standard length aerial hangars. Does not include splice trays or cable grounding kits.

Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single fused fibers

(maximum of 12 trays in LG-600)

Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 Single Fusion or 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers (maximum of 8 trays in LG-600)

Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion Sleeves/48 fibers)

(maximum of 8 trays in LG-600)

Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 Mass fusion sleeves /144 fibers

(maximum of 6 trays in LG-300)

Single Fusion Splice Tray to Accommodate 48 Splices

Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1)

CSM retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer

Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) LG-600 Grommets

Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG

Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit

Adjustable Aerial Hanger Bracket Kit

SC 6-Pack Adapter Bracket

Multi-drop Cable Entry Kit - Allows six cable entries 0.23-0.48"

* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

MODEL NO.

LG-600-U-0

LL-2400

LL-2448

LL-4800

LL-4848

LL-2448-48S

LG-600-DCEK

LG-600-S-Kit

CGH-4

LG-600

LG-400/500/600

LG-600

MDG-600

AFL NO.

FC000029

91710-06

911289-00-02

91711-07

911437-00-02

FA000045

911406-00-00

91918-00

FC000024

91990-00

FC000572

FM001212

FC000352

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

168

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00140, Revision 4, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LG-600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Closure

Features

• Six individual, self-sizing grommeted cable ports; 2 express ports, 4 drop ports

• Up to 24 FTTx drops

• Up to 12 adapters using the

LG-600 expansion kit and SC 6-pack adapter brackets

• Special multi-drop grommets and cable retention

• Integrated aerial splicing work tray

• Splice trays available for single or mass splicing

• Patented tongue-in-groove cover seal system and requires only a common can wrench for installation

• Integrated grounding clamp through aerial hangers

• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia

• Engineered thermoplastic to meet Telcordia

®

aerial and UV resistance requirements

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

* See Accessory and Splice Tray Specifications.

LightGuard

®

600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight

Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The AFL LightGuard (LG) 600 FTTx Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closure is designed for express slack loop fiber access splicing in aerial applications where up to

24 customer fiber drops are required. Installation only requires a common can wrench.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) - Single, Mass

Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight - lbs. (kg)

VALUE

24, 48

(see FTTx Expansion Kit description in table below)

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) - Single, Mass, Mechanical 2, 2, 2

Cable Entrance Configuration In-line, Butt

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. – Min. O.D.)

6

2 @ 0.4-0.87"

24 @ 0.23-0.48"

27.00 x 11.25 x 7.50 (68.58 x 28.58 x 19.05)

18 (8.16)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Aerial Weathertight Universal High Capacity FTTx Splice Closure -

Includes: (6) cable retention kits, (2) grounding terminals, (6) self sealing ports and standard length aerial hangars. Does not include splice trays or cable grounding kits.

Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 Single fused fibers

Universal Splice Tray - Stores 12 Single Fusion or 4 Mass fusion sleeves/48 fibers

Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 4 Mass fusion Sleeves/48 fibers)

Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1) CSM retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer

Single Port Grommet Kit - 2 Grommets and LSM Hardware

Single Cable Entry Grommet Kit

Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG

Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit

Multi-drop Cable Entry Kit - Allows six cable entries 0.23-0.48"

FTTx Expansion Kit - Includes: Stacker Module (1) LG-600 SC-6-Pack

Bracket. Allows use of standard splice trays LL2400, 2448, 2448-48S, and 4848 plus 5 trays up to 120 single, 288 mass.

MODEL NO.

LG-600-FTTx

LL-2450

LL-1248

SEG-600-1

SEG-600

CGH-4

LG-600

MDG-600

LG-600-FTTx

AFL NO.

FC000291

91957-00

911221-00-00

LL-4850 91958-00

LG-600-DCEK 911406-00-00

FC000623

FC000356

FC000024

91990-00

FC000352

FC000620

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00141, Revision 4, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

169

LightGuard

®

Aerial Splice Closure Accessories

Dual-port Grommet Kit

Dual- and Multi-port Grommet Kits for LG-400/LG-500/LG-600

For use with the LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Closure. Remove the single-port grommet set from the closure and replace with the multi-port grommet set when drops are required.

Retention hardware included.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Dual-port Grommet Kit for LG-400/LG-500

Diameter for large port is 0.375" - 0.65"; small port, 0.27" - 0.5"

Dual Grommet Expansion Kit - Includes: (2) Dual Grommets, (1) CSM retention clamp, cable retention clamp and cable spacer

Dual Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) Dual Grommets for the

LG-400 Series Closures. Diameter for large port is 0.375" - 0.65"; small port, 0.27" - 0.5"

Grommet Replacement Kit, Kit - Includes: (10) Standard (single port)

Grommets for the LG-400 Series Closures. Diameter from 0.3" - 0.82"

Grommet Replacement Kit - Includes: (10) LG-600 Grommets

Diameter from 0.5" - 1.0"

Multi-port Grommet Kit for LG-400/LG-500. Diameter up to 0.365"

Multi-port Grommet Kit for LG-600. Diameter from 0.67" to 0.475"

AFL NO.

911386-00-01

911406-00-00

911495-00-00

911496-00-00

91918-00

FC000573

FC000352

Multi-port Grommet Kit

Single-port Grommet Kit for LG-600 FTTx

For use with the LG-600 Aerial Weathertight Closure. Remove the multi-port grommet set from the closure and replace with the single-port grommet set when installing a branch cable. Hardware included.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Single-port Grommet Kit for LG-600 FTTx

Single Cable Entry Grommet Kit LG-600 Hardware

AFL NO.

FC000623

FC000356

Adjustable Aerial Hanger Brackets

For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500,

LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx). This pair of hanger brackets is shipped from the factory with all weathertight closures. Purchase separately for closures installed over existing utilities.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Adjustable Aerial Hanger Brackets

AFL NO.

911497-00-00

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00119, Revision 2, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

170

LightGuard

®

Aerial Splice Closure Accessories

(cont.)

SC 6-Pack Bracket for LG-600

Installs at each end of the stacker module in the LG-600. Allows up to (12) SC connectors or (24) LC connectors (using duplex connectors) to be installed in the closure. Snaps in place or use self-tapping screws to secure.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

SC 6-Pack Bracket Kit for LG-600

SC 6-Pack Adapter Bracket

AFL NO.

FM001294

FM001212

Expansion Kit for LG-600 FTTx

Expansion kit includes a Stacker Tray Module and one LG-600 SC-6-Pack Bracket to allow for up to six SC connections or 12 LC duplex connections. An additional bracket may be used to increase connectivity to 12 SC or 24 LC connections using duplex adapters.

Allows increasing splices with LL-2400, LL-2448 and LL-2448-48S splice trays.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Expansion Kit for LG-600 FTTx

AFL NO.

FC000620

Cable Grounding Harness

For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500,

LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx).

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Cable Grounding Harness - Includes: (4) Harness 8" #6 AWG

AFL NO.

FC000024

Aerial Hanger Kits

For use with all Aerial Weathertight Closures (LG-410, LG-420, LG-420 FTTx, LG-500,

LG-600 and LG-600 FTTx).

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Extended Aerial Hanger Kit

Extended Offset Aerial Hanger Kit

AFL NO.

911497-00-00

91990-00

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00119, Revision 2, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

171

LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays

AFL’s LightLink series of Fiber Optic Splice Trays offers a variety of unique and flexible splice and storage possibilities. They are available in industry standard config urations (single, mass).

Features

• In-line or butt splice capability (see model descriptions)

• Pre-formed radiuses maintain bend requirements

• Interlocking base and cover provides tray stability without the use of a bolt

• Extended finger guides easily store and route loose fiber or ribbon

Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION

Single Fuse: 32

Mass Fuse: N/A

6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H)

MODEL NO.

LL-2425

AFL NO.

FC000053

LG-55-U

Max trays: 1

Single: 32

Mass: N/A

LG-150-U

N/A

LG-250-U

N/A

LG-350-U

N/A

Single Fuse: 12

Mass Fuse: N/A

7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

LL-2450 91957-00 N/A

Max Trays: 4

Sinlge: 48

Mass: N/A

N/A N/A

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)

7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

LL-4850 91958-00 N/A

Max Trays: 4

Single: N/A

Mass: 32 (384 fiber)

N/A N/A

Single Fuse: 12

Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)

7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

LL-1248 911221-00-00 N/A

Max Trays: 4

Single: 48

Mass: 48 (384 fiber)

N/A N/A

Single Fuse: 24

Mass Fuse: N/A

12.542" (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H)

LL-2400 91710-06 N/A N/A

Max Trays: 5

Single: 120

Mass: N/A

Max Trays: 13

Single: 312

Mass: N/A

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays

(cont.)

Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION

Single Fuse: 60

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H)

MODEL NO. AFL NO.

LL-7644 FA000044

LG-250-U

N/A

LG-350-U

Max Trays: 6

Single: 360

Mass: 72 (864 fiber)

LG-350-AC

N/A

LG-350XL-U

N/A

Single Fuse: 24

Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

LL-2448 911289-00-02 Max Trays: 3

Single: 72

Mass: 12 (144 fiber)

Mechanical: 36

Max Trays: 8

Single: 192

Mass: 32 (384 fiber)

Mechanical: 96

N/A

Single Fuse: 48

Mass Fuse: N/A

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

LL-2448-48S FA000045

Max Trays: 3

Single: 144

Mass: N/A

Max Trays: 8

Single: 384

Mass: N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

LL-4848 911437-00-02 Max Trays: 3

Single: N/A

Mass: 36 (432 fiber)

Max Trays: 8

Single: N/A

Mass: 96 (1152 fiber)

N/A

Single Fuse: 96

Mass Fuse: 24 (288 fiber)

15.950" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)

LL-4896 911676-00-02 N/A

Max Trays: 5

Single: 480

Mass: 120 (1440 fiber)

N/A

N/A

Max Trays: 9

Single: 864

Mass: 216 (2592 fiber)

Single Fuse: 60

Mass Fuse: N/A

12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H)

LL-7060 FA000042 N/A

Max Trays: 6

Single: 360

Mass: N/A

N/A N/A

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays

(cont.)

Ordering Information – Splice Trays for LG-350 and LG-350XL-U Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) x 0.485" (H)

MODEL NO.

LL-7144

AFL NO.

FA000043

LG-350-U

Max Trays: 6

Single: 360

Mass: 72 (864 fiber)

LG-350-AC

N/A

LG-350XL-U

N/A

Single Fuse: 36

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)

LL-4808L-R FA000037

N/A Max Trays: 4

Single: 144

Mass: 48 (576 fiber)

N/A

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)

Single Fuse: 36

Mass Fuse: N/A

8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)

LL-4808 R

LL-4808 L

FA000020

FA000021

N/A

N/A

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 24 (288 fiber)

15.950" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)

LL-4896 R FA000022

Max Trays: 5

Single: N/A

Mass: 120 (1440 fiber)

N/A

Single Fuse: 96

Mass Fuse: N/A

15.950" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)

LL-4896 L FA000023

Max Trays: 5

Single: 480

Mass: N/A

N/A

Max Trays: 4

Single: N/A

Mass: 48 (576 fiber)

N/A

Max Trays: 4

Single: 144

Mass: N/A

N/A

Max Trays: 9

Single: N/A

Mass: 216 (2592 fiber)

Max Trays: 9

Single: 864

Mass: N/A

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays

(cont.)

Ordering Information – Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION

Single Fuse: 24

Mass Fuse: N/A

12.542" (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H)

MODEL NO. AFL NO.

LL-2400 91710-06

LG-410-U

Max Trays: 4

Single: 96

Mass: N/A

LG-420-U FTTx

N/A

LG-500-U

Max Trays: 4

Single: 96

Mass: N/A

LG-500-U FTTx

N/A

Single Fuse: 32

Mass Fuse: N/A

6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H)

LL-2425 FC000053 N/A

Max Trays: 1

Single: 32

Mass: N/A

N/A

Max Trays: 1

Single: 32

Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: 24

Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

LL-2448 911289-00-02 Max Trays: 3

Single: 72

Mass: 12 (144 fiber)

Mechanical: 36

N/A

Single Fuse: 12

Mass Fuse: N/A

7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

LL-2450 91957-00 N/A N/A

Max Trays: 3

Single: 72

Mass: 12 (144 fiber)

Mechanical: 36

N/A

N/A N/A

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

LL-4848 911437-00-02 Max Trays: 3

Single: N/A

Mass: 36 (432 fiber)

N/A

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)

7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

LL-4850 91958-00 N/A N/A

Max Trays: 3

Single: N/A

Mass: 36 (432 fiber)

N/A

N/A N/A

Single Fuse: 12

Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)

7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

LL-1248 911221-00-00 N/A N/A N/A N/A

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays

(cont.)

Ordering Information – Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION

Single Fuse: 24

Mass Fuse: N/A

12.542" (L) x 4.042" (W) x 0.390" (H)

MODEL NO.

AFL NO.

LL-2400 91710-06

LG-500-U-FTTx-ISO LG-600-U

N/A

Max Trays: 12

Single: 288

Mass: N/A

LG-600

FTTx

Max Trays: 2

Single: 48

Mass: N/A

LG-600-U-FTTx-ISO

N/A

Single Fuse: 32

Mass Fuse: N/A

6.300" (L) x 2.730" (W) x 0.829" (H)

LL-2425 FC000053 N/A N/A N/A N/A

Single Fuse: 24

Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

LL-2448

Single Fuse: 12

Mass Fuse: N/A

7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

LL-2450

911289-00-02 N/A

91957-00

Max Trays: 1

Single: 12

Mass: N/A

Max Trays: 8

Single: 192

Mass: 32 (384 fiber)

Mechanical: 12

N/A

N/A N/A

N/A

Max Trays: 2

Single: 24

Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

LL-4848

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 8 (96 fiber)

7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

LL-4850

911437-00-02 N/A

91958-00

Max Trays: 1

Single: N/A

Mass: 8 (96 fiber)

Max Trays: 8

Single: N/A

Mass: 96 (1152 fiber)

N/A

N/A N/A

N/A

Max Trays: 2

Single: N/A

Mass: 16 (192 fiber)

Single Fuse: 12

Mass Fuse: 8 (96)

7.139" (L) x 4.294" (W) x 0.370" (H)

LL-1248 911221-00-00 Max Trays: 1

Single: 12

Mass: 8 (96 fiber)

N/A N/A

Max Trays: 2

Single: 24

Mass: 16 (192 fiber)

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays

(cont.)

Ordering information – Splice Trays for Aerial Weathertight Fiber Optic Splice Closures

DESCRIPTION

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

MODEL NO.

LL-4800

AFL NO.

91711-07

LG-410-U

Max Trays: 3

Single: N/A

Mass: 12 (144 fiber)

LG-500-U

Max Trays: 3

Single: N/A

Mass: 12 (144 fiber)

LG-600-U

Max Trays: 8

Single: N/A

Mass: 32 (384 fiber)

Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Enclosures

DESCRIPTION

Single Fuse: 24

Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)

Mechanical : 12

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

MODEL NO.

LL-2448

AFL NO.

LL-400B WITH

INTERCONNECT

911289-00-02 Max Trays: 4

Single: 96

Mass: 16 (192 fiber)

Mechanical: 48

LL-400B WITHOUT

INTERCONNECT

Max Trays: 6

Single: 144

Mass: 24 (288 fiber)

Mechanical: 72

LL-400SX WITH

2 LGX ® PLATES

Max Trays: 3

Single: 72

Mass: 12 (144 fiber)

Mechanical: 36

LL-400SX WITHOUT

LGX PLATES

Max Trays: 9

Single: 216

Mass: 36 (432 fiber)

Mechanical: 108

Single Fuse: 48

Mass Fuse: N/A

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

LL-2448-48S FA000045

Max Trays: 4

Single: 192

Mass: N/A

Max Trays: 6

Single: 288

Mass: N/A

Max Trays: 3

Single: 144

Mass: N/A

Max Trays: 9

Single: 432

Mass: N/A

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531" (H)

LL-4848 911437-00-02 Max Trays: 4

Single: N/A

Mass: 48 (576 fiber)

Max Trays: 6

Single: N/A

Mass: 72 (864 fiber)

Max Trays: 3

Single: N/A

Mass: 36 (432 fiber)

Max Trays: 9

Single: N/A

Mass: 108 (1296 fiber)

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 4 (48 fiber)

12.542" (L) x 4.270" (W) x 0.531 (H)

LL-4800 91711-07

Max Trays: 4

Single: N/A

Mass: 16 (192 fiber)

Max Trays: 6

Single: N/A

Mass: 24 (288 fiber)

Max Trays: 3

Single: N/A

Mass: 12 (144 fiber)

Max Trays: 9

Single: N/A

Mass: 108 (1296 fiber)

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays

(cont.)

Ordering Information—Splice Trays for Fiber Optic Enclosures

DESCRIPTION

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) 0.485" (H)

MODEL NO.

LL-7144

AFL NO.

FA000043

LL-500 WITH

2 LGX PLATES

N/A

LL-500 WITHOUT LGX

PLATES

N/A

LL-580

Max Trays: 2

Single: N/A

Mass: 24 (288 fiber)

Single Fuse: 60

Mass Fuse: 12 (144)

12.000" (L) x 5.125" (W) 0.485" (H)

LL-7644 FA000044 N/A N/A

Max Trays: 2

Single: 120

Mass: 24 (288 fiber)

Single Fuse: 36

Mass Fuse: N/A

8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)

LL-4808 L FA000021

Max Trays: 3

Single: 108

Mass: N/A

Max Trays: 7

Single: 252

Mass: N/A

N/A

Single Fuse: N/A

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)

LL-4808 R FA000020

Max Trays: 3

Single: N/A

Mass: 36 (432 fiber)

Max Trays: 7

Single: N/A

Mass: 84 (1008 fiber)

N/A

Single Fuse: 36

Mass Fuse: 12 (144 fiber)

8.125" (L) x 4.875" (W) x 0.485" (H)

LL-4808L-R FA000037

Max Trays: 3

Single: 108

Mass: 36 (432 fiber)

Max Trays: 7

Single: 252

Mass: 84 (1008 fiber)

Max Trays: 2

Single: 72

Mass: 24 (288 fiber)

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightLink Fiber Optic Splice Trays

(cont.)

Ordering Information – Splice Tray for Splicing Cabinets and Shelves

DESCRIPTION

Telescoping Splice Tray - Stores up to 48 single fusion sleeves or

12 mass fusion sleeves (144 fibers). For use in the following products:

LL-300, LL-288/576, LL-720/1440, OTSS-SYS1, OSS-SYS2 and OSS-SYS1.

MODEL NO.

STF-48

FTTx Splice Tray - Stores up to 2 single fusion sleeves.

For use in the following products:

ONT-760XL, ONT-3000 and CG-1500

Bare Fiber Splice Tray - Stores up 24 single fusion fibers without sleeves. For use in the following products:

Any product that accepts the LL-2400 splice tray

Ordering Information—Splice Tray Accessories

DESCRIPTION

40 mm Fiber Protection Fusion Splice Sleeves, Telcordia ® compliant (50 pcs. per bag)

60 mm Fiber Protection Fusion Splice Sleeves, Telcordia

®

compliant (50 pcs. per bag)

Single Fusion Splice Chip - 6 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit)

Single Fusion Splice Chip - 12 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit)

Single Fusion Splice Chip - 24 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit)

Mass Fusion Splice Chip - 4 splices per chip. (10 pcs. per kit)

AFL NO.

S000206

S000065

FA000034

FC000657

91745-02

FA000088

Mechanical Fusion Splice Tape (10 pcs. per kit)

Core Tube Cable Fiber Router for routing fiber up to 8 directions. For all central core tube sizes.

FA000089

FC000008

Loose Tube or Ribbon Router for routing fiber up to 6 directions. For all Loose Tube and up to 12 fiber Ribbon. FC000070

Dimensions

LL-2448 and LL-4848 Splice Trays

LL-1248, LL-2450 and LL-4850 Splice Trays

LL-2400 Splice Tray

AFL NO.

911442-00-00

DM000445

C184190

LL-4896 Splice Tray LL-2425 Splice Tray OEE Splice Tray

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00147, Revision 7, 4.9.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Tamper-Proof Packaging

• Fits in all AFL enclosures

• No additional trays required

• Color-coded transportation tubing

• Telcordia GR-1209 and

1221-CORE Compliant

LightLink Splitter Trays

The LightLink Splitter Trays are a packaged system that include factory-preinstalled

PLC splitters and splicing trays which easily fit within AFL’s LG Series Closures,

LL Series Wall Mount Cabinets and pedestals. These AFL splitter trays feature 1x4,

1x8, 1x16 or 1x32 planar technology with optical characteristics that include low insertion loss, high uniformity, and excellent environmental stability. The products are

Telcordia

®

GR-1209 and GR-1221-CORE compliant ensuring longevity and durability in an Outside Plant application.

The splitter couplers are factory-preinstalled and secured within the AFL splice trays.

The trays are tamper-proof to prevent unwanted entry. With the lengthy transition tubing preinstalled, the device fibers are routed into the splice trays (included as part of the package) to help complete installations in a timely manner. No additional trays are required reducing material costs.

Optical Specifications

PARAMETER

Wavelength Range

Max. Insertion Loss

Max. Uniformity

VALUE

1 X 4 1 X 8 1 X 16 1 X 32

1260 - 1650 nm 1260 - 1650 nm 1260 - 1650 nm 1260 - 1650 nm

7.5

10.7

14.0

17.4

1.0

1.0

1.2

1.7

PDL (dB) Max.

Return Loss

0.3

50.0

Operating Temperature (°C) -40 to 85

0.3

50.0

-40 to 85

0.3

50.0

-40 to 85

0.3

50.0

-40 to 85

This tray has capacity for up to 24 single fusion splices and are stackable with each other and other similar AFL splice trays.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

LightLink Splitter

LightLink Splitter

LightLink Splitter

LightLink Splitter

LightLink Splitter

AFL NO.

CM000799

FC000571

FC000539

FC000538

FC000537

SIZE

Tray PKG 1x2

Tray PKG 1x4

Tray PKG 1x8

Tray PKG 1x16

Tray PKG 1x32

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

180

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00148, Revision 4, 3.7.13

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Fiber Optic Splice Closures

LightGuard

®

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures

LightGuard

®

Sealed Fiber Optic

Splice Closures

AFL LightGuard Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures are designed to simplify splice management and maintenance. Intuitive engineering design reduces the installation time and complexity associated with fiber splicing in the field. No heat, adhesives, drills or powered equipment for installation or re-entry are required, just simply use a common 216 can wrench to access and install cable. LightGuard closures are durable, easy-to-install and will increase productivity, reduce labor expenses, and last the life of your plant.

Features

• Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex

®

or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations

• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity

• Fully kitted with all parts to install cables

• Designed and tested to Telcordia

®

GR-771 requirements

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

Specifications

DESCRIPTION

Splice Capacity (Max.) -

Single, Mass, Mechanical

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) -

Single, Mass, Mechanical

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.)

LG-55-U-0

24, n/a, n/a

1, n/a, n/a

In-line / Butt

2

2 @ 0.60" (splice)

2 @ 0.77" (ground / bond)

LG-150-U-0

48, 144, 24

4, 3, n/a

Butt

5

5 @ 0.62"

LG-250-U-0

96, 288, 36

1

MODEL

LG-350-U-0

384, 1152, 108

2

4, 2, 3 12, 8, 8

Butt

5

5 @ 0.62"

Butt

5

3 @ 0.80"

2 @ 1.00"

Testing

- Cable Retention (100 lbs)

- Water Resistance (waterhead)

- Impact Resistance (0-40 °C)

- Chemical Resistance

- Cable Flexing

Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm)

Passed

20 ft.

Passed

Passed

Passed

14.00 x 4.00

(35.60 x 10.16)

3.0 (1.36)

Passed

20 ft.

Passed

Passed

Passed

18.25 x 8.75

(46.36 x 22.23)

10.5 (4.76)

Passed

20 ft.

Passed

Passed

Passed

19.00 x 8.75

(48.26 x 22.23)

11.5 (5.23) Weight - lbs. (kg)

NOTES: 1. For the LG-250-U-0; 36 mechanical splices only using the LL-2448 splice tray.

2. For the LG-350-U-0; 108 mechanical splices only using the LL-2448 splice tray.

Passed

20 ft.

Passed

Passed

Passed

28.00 x 10.00

(71.12 x 25.40)

14 (6.35)

350-AC

144, 288, 36

4, 3

LG-350XL-U-0

864, 2592, 288

9, 9, n/a

Butt

2 (Express Grommets)

3 (4-Drop Grommets)

2 @ 1.0"

12 @ 0.312" Flat or

0.250" Round

Butt

5 (7 using dual port grommet Express sides)

3 @ 1.25"

2 @ 1.35"

Passed

20 ft.

Passed

Passed

Passed

20 x 10

13 (5.89)

Passed

20 ft.

Passed

Passed

Passed

31.00 x 12.00

(78.74 x 30.48)

25 (11.34)

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00064, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

181

Peel and Seal Grommet Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures

Expandable to support various cable diameters

Ease of installation (no tapes, washers, or glue)

LightGuard

®

Peel and Seal Grommet

Systems for Sealed Fiber Optic Closures

AFL’s cable sealing grommet technology for the LightGuard (LG) Sealed Fiber Optic

Closures improves sealing technology utilitizing MULTICENTRIC ® Grommets that do away with time consuming tasks such as installing washers and messy sealing tapes for cable entry. MULTICENTRIC

®

Grommets are designed to accept a wide range of cable diameters, eliminating the need to stock a variety of diameter-specific grommet kits.

Conversion kits for old LG-100, LG-200, and LG-300 closures allows for “Peel and Seal" grommet technology to be used without changing out the existing closure.

Features

• All Peel and Seal Grommet Systems support loose tube, core tube, dielectric and armored cable designs

• Installation and re-entry using common hand tools

• Accepts a wide range of cable diameters

• Fast and easy to install

• Fits existing AFL LightGuard sealed closures

• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity

• Full conversion kits and dual cable entry port kits

• Designed and tested to Telcordia ® GR-771 & RUS 515 closure requirements

Multiple layers of sealing protection

Single Dual Quad

Ordering information

SEALED CLOSURE FULL CONVERSION KITS (SINGLE AXIS CABLE ENTRY)

DESCRIPTION

3 Port Drop Grommet (LG-150/250)

Dual Express Grommets for LG-350

Quad Express Grommets for LG-350

Single Cable Grommet Kit, Drop Port

4 Port Drop Grommet (LG-350 / LG-350-AC)

LG-350 Express Single Cable Grommet Kit

LG-350 Drop Single Cable Grommet Kit

AFL NO.

FC000655

FC000337

FC000421

FC000628

FC000422

FC000726

FC000727

MULTICENTRIC is a registered trademark of the Mar-Don Corporation.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

182

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00001, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Sealed Splice Closures and Accessories

LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

LightGuard

®

55 Sealed Fiber Optic

Splice Closure

Designed with versatility in mind, the LightGuard (LG) 55 sealed closure from AFL offers a variety of solutions including repair and distribution splicing, grounding for Fiber-inthe-Loop applications, and for use as an isolation gap with armored cables. This closure accepts stranded loose tube, Uniflex

®

or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations and can be utilized in a butt or in-line configuration.

The LG-55 closure incorporates a unique cable clamp design sealing the cable, allowing both of the cover halves to be removed without disturbing the contents. In addition,

AFL’s Peel & Seal Grommet System

is incorporated to ensure a tight fit on various cable diameters, fully sealing the closure and protecting the fiber while eliminating cumbersome tape and washers – making installation fast and easy.

Features

• Accommodates cables to 0.77" O.D. for splicing and grounding / bonding

• Incorporates the Peel & Seal Grommet

System, fully sealing the closure

• Includes removable, integral central splicing module and individual cable retention clamps

• Requires only a common can wrench for installation

Inline Repair Closure (IRC) for repair of flat or round drop cables

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE

Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 24, n/a, n/a

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 1, n/a, n/a

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.)

Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight – lbs. (kg)

In-line / Butt

2 (3 using dual cable entry port kit)

2 @ 0.60" (for in-line splice configuration)

2 @ 0.77" (for in-line ground / bond configuration)

2 @ 0.45" (for butt splice configuration)

14 x 4 (34.30 x 10.16)

3.0 (1.36)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

LG-55 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 24 fusion splice capable and includes (2) cable kits for sealing / retention,

(2) Cable Grounding Kits, (1) Dual Cable Entry Port Kit and a grounding terminal. Splice tray not included.

MODEL NO.

LG-55-U-0

AFL NO.

FC000034-PS

LG-55 In-line Repair Closure LG-55-IRC

LG-55 with Stainless Steel Hardware for Harsh Environments LG-55-U-SS

LG-55 Splice Tray – Stores 24 single fusion splices and includes base, cover, (3) eight-position splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (1) tray in the LG-55.

Dual Cable Entry Port Kit – Allows two cables to enter closure from each cable port. Includes one dual port cable grommet to increase the closure to four ports.

LL-2425

FC000793-PS

FC000711

FC000247

Dual Cable Entry Port Kit FC000337

Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp (one kit required per cable entry)

Cable Grounding Harness Kit – Includes (4) 8" long ground harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor.

CGH-1

CGH-4

FC000003

FC000024

183

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00003, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LG-55-SC Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

LightGuard

®

55-SC

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

AFL’s LightGuard (LG) 55-SC sealed closure retains all the features of the LG-55, but includes a unique patching system that utilizes pre-terminated SC fiber assemblies or field installable connectors such as the FAST

SC.

An innovative solution that can be used to facilitate a link between traffic control cabinets and entrance cables, the LG-55-SC closure allows for rapid restoration and minimal damage to a fiber optic cable should an impact disable the cabinet. A breakable tie wrap secures the pre-connectorized cable to one side of the closure (traffic control cabinet), while the main entrance cable is secured with a more rugged cable clamp, allowing the system to separate during a damaging impact.

Features

• Durable cover assembly that provides protection for all internal components and acts as an interface / anchor to the cable clamps

• Unique cable clamp seal to anchor the cable to the cover assembly

• Movable sheath retention bracket keeps cable bends at a minimum

• Accommodates up to four SC/UPC connectors

• Utilizes AFL’s Peel & Seal Grommet System

, ensuring a tight fit on various cable diameters while eliminating cumbersome tape and washers

• Requires only a common can wrench for installation

Specifications

PARAMETER

Maximum Cable Diameter

Minimum Cable Diameter

Maximum Cable Entry

Overall Dimensions

VALUE

0.65"

0.30"

2 ports (one each end)

14" Length x 4" Diameter

Ordering Information

MODEL NO.

LG-55-SC

Dual Cable Entry Port Kit – Allows two cables to enter closure from each cable port. Includes one dual port cable grommet to increase the closure to four ports.

Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp

(one kit required per cable entry).

Cable Grounding Harness Kit – Includes (4) 8" long ground harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor.

AFL NO.

FC000481-PS

FC000337

FC000003

FC000024

184

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00018, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Features

• Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex

® or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations

• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench

• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity

• Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables

• Designed and tested to Telcordia ®

GR-771 requirements

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

LightGuard

®

150

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The LightGuard (LG) 150 is a sealed dome closure designed for small count fiber splicing

(< 48 single or 192 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-150 is ideal for express or ring applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.)

Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight – lbs. (kg)

VALUE

48, 192, n/a

4, 3, n/a

Butt

5

5 (0.62" - 0.30")

18.25 x 8.75 (46.36 x 22.23)

10.5 (4.76)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

LG-150 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 48 Single or 192 mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / retention and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included.

LL-2450 Splice Tray – Stores (12) single fusion splices, includes base, cover, (2) six position single splice holders and tie-wraps.

Maximum of (4) splice trays in the LG-150.

LL-4850 Splice Tray – Stores (8) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (2) four position ribbon splice holders and tie-wraps.

Maximum of (4) splice trays in the LG-150.

LL-1248 Splice Tray – Stores (12) single fusion splices or

(4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (2) six position single splice holders, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (4) splice trays in the LG-150.

MODEL NO.

LG-150-U-0

LL-2450

LL-4850

LL-1248

AFL NO.

FC000001-PS

91957-00

91958-00

911221-00-00

3-Flat Drop Grommet Kit – For use with standard flat drop cable Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC000655

Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350.

CGH-1 FC000003

CGH-5 FC000040 Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350.

Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with

LG-150/250/350.

Universal Hanger FC000006

Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with

LG-150/250/350.

Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with LG-150/250/350.

Extended Offset Hanger FC000208

PWK FC000592

OPGW Bracket FC000683 OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures

(LG-150 / LG-250 / LG-350) to OPGW Cable. See details in

Accessory section on page 13.

1X6 Fiber Router Kit

O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250.

LLAS-200-12SC Terminal Adapter. Used with LG-150 and

LG-250. See details in Accessory section on page 14.

Router

O-Ring Replacement

LLAS-200-12SC

FC000070

FC000004

FC000068

* See Accessory Specifications.

See Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00029, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

185

LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Features

• Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex

® or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations

• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench

• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity

• Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables

• Designed and tested to Telcordia

®

GR-771 requirements

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

* NOTE: When using LL-2448-48S capacity increases

to 144 single splices. Capacity is cable OD driven.

* See Accessory Specifications.

See Splice Tray Specifications.

LightGuard

®

250

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The LightGuard (LG) 250 is a sealed dome closure designed for medium count fiber splicing (< 96 single or 288 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-250 is ideal for express or ring applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.)

Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight – lbs. (kg)

VALUE

96, 288, 48

4, 2, 4

Butt

5

5 (0.62" - 0.30")

19 x 8.75 (48.26 x 22.23)

11.5 (5.23)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

LG-250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 96 Single or 288 mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / retention and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included.

MODEL NO.

LG-250-U-0

AFL NO.

FC000002-PS

LL-2400 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (4) trays in the LG-250.

LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (3) trays in the LG-250.

LL-4800 Splice Tray – Stores (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (10) trays in the LG-300XL.

LL-4848 Splice Tray – Stores (12) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twelve position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (1) tray in the LG-250.

Single Fusion Splice Tray for 48 Single Fused Fiber*

Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350.

Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350.

LL-2400

LL-2448

LL-4800

LL-4848

LL-2448-48S FA000045

3-Flat Drop Grommet Kit – For use with standard flat drop cable Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC000655

OPGW Cable Bracket Kit

OPGW cable.

for use only when installing closure on OPGW Bracket FC000683

1X6 Fiber Router Kit Router FC000070

CGH-1 FC000003

CGH-5

91710-06

911289-00-02

91711-07

911437-00-02

FC000040

O-Ring Replacement

Universal Hanger

FC000004

FC000006

O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250

Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with

LG-150/250/350

Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with

LG-150/250/350.

Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with LG-150/250/350

Terminal Adapter – Houses 12 SC bulkhead adapters, for use with LG-150/250

Extended Offset Hanger

PWK

LLAS-200-12SC

FC000208

FC000592

FC000068

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00078, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

186

MuxGuard

®

250 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Features

• Factory pre-installed devices

• Factory pre-installed transition tubes with fibers routed to appropriately designated bandwidth splice trays

• Color-coded transition tubes

• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench

• Fully sealed to protect fiber, splices and devices

• Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables

• Designed and tested to Telcordia

®

GR-771 requirements

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

MuxGuard

®

250

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The MuxGuard 250 is a sealed dome closure designed with pre-installed Thin Film Filter

(TFF) Compact Series CWDMs or DWDMs that allow for MUXing and DEMUXing within the same closure. The closure is also equipped with pre-installed splice trays that keep the bandwidth signals separated from each other, thus preventing accidental signal loss during maintenance activities. All fibers from the WDMs are routed to the appropriate splice tray through color-coded transition tubes. The closures are available with

4-channel or 8-channel units. As with other LG Series Sealed Closures, these closures require no tools for re-entry, and each closure may be padlocked as necessary.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.)

Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm)

Weight – lbs. (kg)

VALUE

96

4

Butt

5

5 (0.70" - 0.30")

19 x 8.75 (48.26 x 22.23)

11.5 (5.23)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

MuxGuard 250 Sealed Closure

LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twentyfour position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (3) trays in the LG-250.

MODEL NO.

LG-250-CWDM-8-301 (1471-1611)

LG-250-CWDM-8-301-121-500

LL-2448

1X6 Fiber Router Kit Router

O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250 O-Ring Replacement

Universal Hanger Universal Aerial Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with LG-150/250/350

Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with

LG-150/250/350.

Extended Offset Hanger

Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with

LG-150/250/350

Terminal Adapter – Houses 12 SC bulkhead adapters, for use with LG-150/250

PWK

LLAS-200-12SC

* See Accessory Specifications.

See Splice Tray Specifications.

AFL NO.

FC000800

FC000803

911289-00-02

FC000070

FC000004

FC000006

FC000208

FC000592

FC000068

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

187

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00085, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

LG-350 with LLAS-300-24SC

LightGuard

®

350

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The LightGuard (LG) 350 is a sealed dome closure designed for large count fiber splicing

(< 384 single or 1152 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-350 is ideal for express, ring or long haul applications and requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Features

• Supports stranded loose tube, Uniflex ® or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations

• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench

• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices ensuring longevity

• Fully kitted with all parts to install five cables

• Designed and tested to Telcordia

®

GR-771 requirements

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) Listed

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE

Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 480, 1152, 108

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 12, 8, 8

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports / Cable Sizes (Max. O.D. - Min. O.D.)

Dimensions – (L x D) in. (cm) / Weight - lbs. (kg)

Butt

5 / 7 (using dual cable configuration for Express ports)

2 Express (1.00" - 0.40") 3 Drop (0.80" - 0.30")

28.0" x 10.0" (71.12 x 25.40) / 14 (6.35) continued on next page

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

188

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00103, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightGuard

®

350

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

(cont.)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

LG-350 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 384 single fusion or 1152 mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / retention (single and dual calbe configurations for express ports) and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included.

LL-2400 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder and tiewraps. Maximum of (12) trays in the LG-350.

LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (8) trays in the LG-350.

LL-4800 Splice Tray – Stores (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of

(10) trays in the LG-300XL.

LL-4848 Splice Tray – Stores (12) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twelve position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps.

Maximum of (6) trays in the LG-350.

LL-4896 Splice Tray – Stores (96) single fusion splices or (24) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (16) six position single splice holders, (6) four position ribbon splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (5) trays in the LG-350.

LL-2448-48S Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices. May be installed in the LG-250, LG-350, LG-350-XL, LG-410, LG-500,

LG-600 Splice Closures, the LL-400B and LL-400S Distribution Enclosures and the LL-2400 Pedestal.

LL-7644 Universal Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices or (288) mass fusion splices or a combination of both in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.

LL-7060 Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.

LL-7144 Splice Tray – Stores (288) mass fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.

4-Flat Drop Grommet Kit – For use with standard flat drop cable and round cable up to 0.256" O.D.

Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp. One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350.

Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp. For use with LG-150/250/350.

O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-350.

Universal Aerial Strand Hanger Kit – For use with LG-150/250/350.

Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit – For use with LG-150/250/350.

Pole or Wall Mount Bracket – For use with LG-150/250/350.

OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use only when installing closure on OPGW cable.

1X6 Fiber Router Kit

Terminal Adapter – Houses 24 SC bulkhead adapters, for use with LG-350

Terminal Adapter – Empty plate

MODEL NO.

LG-350-U-0

LL-2400

LL-2448

LL-4800

LL-4848

LL-4896

LL-2448-48S

LL-7644

LL-7060

LL-7144

AFL NO.

FC000009-PS

91710-06

911289-00-02

91711-07

911437-00-02

911676-00-02

FA000045

FA000044

FA000042

FA000043

Flat Drop Grommet Kit FC000422

CGH-1

CGH-5

O-Ring LG-300

FC000003

FC000040

912231-00-00

Universal Hanger FC000006

Extended Offset Hanger FC000208

PWK

PGW Bracket

FC000592

FC000683

Router

LLAS-300-24SC

LLAS-350-96LC

FC000070

FC000069

FC000736

* See Accessory Specifications.

See Splice Tray Specifications.

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

189

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00103, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LG-350-AC Drop Access Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Features

• Less than 20" overall length; ideal for small hand-holes

• Supports standard loose tube, outside plant ribbon and Uniflex

® fiber optic cables in both dielectric and armored configurations

• Installation and re-entry requires only a common can wrench

• Fully sealed to protect fiber and splices, ensuring longevity

• Fully kitted with all parts to install two cables and up to 12 drops

• Designed and tested to Telcordia ®

GR-771 requirements

• Rural Utilities Service (RUS) listed

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard

®

350-AC Drop Access

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

AFL’s LightGuard (LG) 350-AC sealed dome closure is intended for utilization in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required and space may be limited.

Designed for "drop access" applications providing access for up to 12 drops, this closure is also versatile enough to be used for splicing up to 144 single splices in a butt configuration. Ideal for Fiber-to-the-Home installations in small hand-hole applications, the LG-350-AC requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) – single, mass

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – single, mass

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (O.D.)

Dimensions (L x D) – inches (cm)

Weight - lbs. (kg)

VALUE

144, 432

4, 3

Butt

5 Ports (14 cables total using flat-drop grommets)

Express Side – 2 (0.4"–1.0")

Drop Side – 12 (0.31" flat-drop or 0.25" round)

19.8" x 10.0" (50.3 x 25.4)

12 (5.44)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Dome Closure, 144 single fusion capable (with additional trays), 5 cable entry kits for sealing and retention (2-single port for express and 3-quad port for drop), ground terminal, (1) LL-4808L splice tray.

No cable grounding or hanger brackets are included

Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores up to 36 single fused fibers

(maximum of 4 trays in LG-350-AC)

Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores up to 144 mass fused fibers

(maximum of 4 trays in LG-350-AC)

Single Cable Branch Grommet Kit

Cable Grounding Kit - For LG-150/250/350

5 Cable Grounding Kits - For LG-150/250/350

O-Ring Replacement Kit for the LG-350

Universal Aerial Strand Hanger kit - For LG-150/250/350

Extended Offset Strand Hanger Kit - For LG-150/250/350

Pole or Wall MT Bracket for use with LG150/250/350

OPGW Cable Bracket Kit

MODEL NO.

LG-350-AC

LL-4808L

LL-4808R

Branch Grommet Kit

CGH-1

CGH-5

O-Ring LG-300

Universal Hanger

AFL NO.

FC000412

FA000021

FA000020

FC000628

FC000003

FC000040

912231-00-00

FC000006

Extended Offset Hanger FC000208

PWK FC000592

OPGW Bracket FC000683

* Unit available for Mass/Ribbon utilization. Consult customer service for details.

* See Accessory Specifications.

See Splice Tray Specifications.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00118, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

190

LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Features

• Can accommodate up to 7 cables

• Supports stranded loose tube,

Uniflex

®

or ribbon fiber cables in either armored or dielectric configurations

• Flanged O-Ring and T-bolt V-band for increased protection

• Oversized basket allows multiple configurations of slack storage

• Requires only a common can wrench for installation

LightGuard

®

350XL

Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

The LightGuard (LG) 350XL is a sealed dome closure designed for large count fiber splicing

(up to 864 single or 2592 mass) in a butt configuration. Utilized in aerial or underground environments where a sealed closure is required, the LG-350XL requires only a common can wrench for installation.

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUE

Splice Capacity (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 864, 2592, 288

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – Single, Mass, Mechanical 9, 9, 9

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports / Cable Sizes (Max. O.D.)

Butt

5 ports / 7 with Dual Express Grommet

Dimensions - (L x D) in. (cm) / Weight - lbs. (kg)

Express Port

Single 1.18" - 0.40"

Double 0.56" - 0.44"

Drop Port

Single 1.08" - 0.30"

31.0" x 12.0 (78.74 x 30.48) / 25 lbs. (11.3 kg)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

LG-350XL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure – 864 single fusion or 2592 mass fusion capable, includes (5) cable kits for sealing / retention (single and dual cable configurations) and a grounding terminal. Cable Grounding Kits, hanger brackets and splice trays not included

LL-4896 Splice Tray – Stores (96) single fusion splices or (24) 288 mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (16) six position single splice holders, (6) four position ribbon splice holders and tie-wraps. Maximum of (9) trays in the LG-350XL

LL-2400 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder and tie-wraps.

Maximum of (12) trays in the LG-350XL.

LL-2448 Splice Tray – Stores (24) single fusion or (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twenty-four position single splice holder, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (8) trays in the LG-350XL.

LL-4800 Splice Tray – Stores (4) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) four position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (10) trays in the LG-300XL.

LL-4848 Splice Tray – Stores (12) mass fusion splices, includes base, cover, (1) twelve position ribbon splice holder and tie-wraps. Maximum of (10) trays in the LG-350XL.

LL-2448-48S Splice Tray – Stores (48) single fusion splices. May be installed in the

LG-250, LG-350, LG-350-XL, LG-410, LG-500, LG-600 Splice Closures, the LL-400B and LL-400S Distribution Enclosures and the LL-2400 Pedestal.

LL-7060 Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.

LL-7144 Splice Tray – Stores (288) mass fusion splices in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.

LL-7644 Universal Splice Tray – Stores (60) single fusion splices or (288) mass fusion splices or a combination of both in an easy-to-use, deep splice tray. For use with the

LG-350 and LG-350XL Closures.

LG-350XL Dual Axis Express Grommet

Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp.

For use with LG-350XL

O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-300XL

Strand Mount Hanger Bracket – For use with LG-300XL

1X6 Fiber Router Kit

MODEL NO.

LG-300XL-U-0

LL-4896

LL-2400

LL-2448

LL-4800

LL-4848

LL-2448-48S

LL-7060

LL-7144

LL-7644

AFL NO.

FC000010-PS

911676-00-02

91710-06

911289-00-02

91711-07

911437-00-02

FA000045

FA000042

FA000043

FA000044

Dual Axis Exp

Cable Bonding

Kit - 300XL

FC000664

FC000041

O Ring - 300XL FC000016

XL Hangar Bracket 912215-00-00

Router FC000070

* See LL4896 Splice Tray Specifications.

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00134, Revision 7, 11.22.13

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

191

LG-700 Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closure

Telcordia is a registered trademark of Telcordia Technologies, Inc.

LightGuard

®

700 Sealed Fiber Optic

Splice Closure

With a capacity for up to 288 single fusion or 432 mass fusion splices, AFL’s LightGuard

(LG) 700 in-line sealed closure is suitable for use in underground and aerial applications.

The LG-700 hosts a dry, permanent peripheral grommet seal that allows for easy re-entry, eliminating the need for a re-entry kit. The closure is equipped with eight cable entry ports (four at each end of the closure), which allows for additional cables to be installed without disturbing previously installed cables. The 3/8" stainless steel captive bolts require only a standard nut driver or 216 tool for installation or re-entry. The LG-700 features a grounding system that may be used for common or isolated/grounding applications.

Features

• Cable retention clamps provide pullout rating required by Telcordia

®

• Dry, permanent peripheral grommet seal allows for easy re-entry

• Space for large amounts of buffer tubing with tie downs for organization and installation

• Eight cable entry ports; previously installed cables are not disturbed when installing additional cables

• Common or isolated grounding/bonding

• Designed and tested to Telcordia GR-771 requirements

Specifications

PARAMETER

Splice Capacity (Max.) – single, mass

Number of Splice Trays (Max.) – single, mass

Cable Entrance Configuration

Cable Ports

Cable Sizes (O.D.)

Dimensions (L x D) – inches (cm)

Weight - lbs. (kg)

VALUE

288, 432

12, 9

In-line, Butt

8 Ports

4 @ 0.77"

4 @ 1.00"

24.5" x 10.7" x 4.7" (62.2 x 25.4 x 11.9)

8.5 (3.85)

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

LG-700 Bonded Sealed In-line/Butt Closure - Equipped with (3) cable sealing/retention kits, (3) cable bonding kits, (2) single fusion splice trays

Single Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 24 single fused fibers, base, cover,

(1) twenty-four position fusion splice holder, tie-wraps.

Universal Splice Tray - Stores 24 single fused fibers or 4 mass fusion sleeves (48 fibers), base, deep cover, tie-wraps.

Mass Fusion Splice Tray - Stores 12 mass fusion sleeves (144 fibers) Base, deep cover, (1) twelve position mass sleeve holder, tie-wraps.

MODEL NO.

LG-700

LL-2400

LL-2448

LL-4848

AFL NO.

911605-00-00

91710-06

911289-00-02

911437-00-02

192

© 1998, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00128, Revision 6, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LightGuard

®

Sealed Splice Closure Accessories

Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures

Table top closure stand to be used for the LG-150/250/350/350XL closures. Can be clamped or permanently fastened to a table top to hold the closure in place during installation or maintenance. The clamp pivots 180° to allow accessibility to both sides of the frame and all cable entry ports.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Closure Stand for Sealed Dome Closures

AFL NO.

FC001176

Dual Express Grommets for LG-350XL

Used on the express side of the LG-350XL closure for installing additional branches. Use the drop ports for the express cable while the express ports may be used to introduce small branch cables. Minimum cable diameter is 0.380" - 0.560".

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Dual Express Grommets for LG-350XL

AFL NO.

FC000688

Dual Express Grommets

Quad Express Grommets

Dual and Quad Express Grommets for LG-350

Used on the express side of the LG-350 closure for installing additional branches. Use the drop ports for the express cable while the express ports may be used to introduce small branch cables. A 4-drop flat grommet may be used if drops are also required. Cable diameter for dual grommets is 0.26" - 0.44"; for quad, 0.24" - 0.382".

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Dual Express Grommets for LG-350

Quad Express Grommets for LG-350

AFL NO.

FC000337

FC000421

4-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-350/LG-350-AC

Used with the LG-350 and LG-350-AC Sealed Closures. Allows for quick addition of drop cables as required. Simply replace the drop port grommets with this grommet kit and install standard flat drop cable or round cable up to 0.25" in diameter.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

4-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for LG-350/LG-350-AC

AFL NO.

FC000422

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00120, Revision 3, 4.14.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

193

LightGuard

®

Sealed Splice Closure Accessories

(cont.)

Single Cable and 3-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for

LG-150/LG-250

Used with the LG-150 and LG-250 Sealed Closures. Allows for quick addition of drop cables as required. Simply replace the drop port grommets with this grommet kit. Both closures will accept standard flat drop cable or round cable up to 0.250" in diameter.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Single Cable Grommet Kit for the LG-150/LG-250

3-Port Flat Drop Grommet Kit for the LG-150/LG-250

AFL NO.

FC000704

FC000655

Single Cable Grommet Kits for LG-350-AC and LG-350

Used with the LG-350-AC when a branch cable is required with the drop cables. May also be used for with the LG-350 as replacement grommets. Simply remove the flat drop grommet and replace with the single cable grommets.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Single Cable Grommet Kit, Drop Port for LG-350-AC

Express Single Cable Grommet Kit for LG-350

Drop Single Cable Grommet Kit for LG-350

AFL NO.

FC000628

FC000726

FC000727

OPGW Cable Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350

Attaches to the outer grounding studs of the LG-150/LG-250 or LG-350 Sealed

Closures. Stainless steel hose clamps secure the OPGW cable to the bracket preventing twisting or movement.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

OPGW Cable Bracket for the LG-150/LG-250/LG-350 for 2 cables.

OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures

(LG-150/LG-250) to 4 OPGW Cables.

OPGW Cable Bracket Kit for use when installing Sealed Closures (LG-350) to

4 OPGW Cables.

AFL NO.

FC000683

FC000746

FC000747

Pole/Wall Mount Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350

Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC to secure the closures onto poles or walls in a vertical orientation. Slots on the brackets allow for strapping onto steel or cement poles.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Pole/Wall Mount Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350/LG-350-AC

AFL NO.

FC000592

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00120, Revision 3, 4.14.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

194

LightGuard

®

Sealed Splice Closure Accessories

(cont.)

Universal Aerial Bracket and Extended Offset Bracket

Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC for mounting on aerial or messengers.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Universal Aerial Bracket for LG-150/LG-250/LG-350/LG-350-AC

Extended Offset Bracket

AFL NO.

FC000006

FC000208

Enlarged to show detail

Strand Mount Hanger Bracket for LG-350XL

Used with the LG-350XL.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Strand Mount Hanger Bracket – For use with LG-350XL

AFL NO.

912215-00-00

Cable Ground Kits

Used with the LG-150, LG-250 and LG-350.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Cable Grounding Kit – Includes harness and hose clamp.

One kit needed per cable entry. For use with LG-150/250/350.

AFL NO.

FC000003

Cable Grounding Harness Kit – Includes (4) 8" ground harnesses constructed of #6 AWG conductor FC000024

Cable Grounding Kit (pack of 5) – Includes harness and hose clamp.

For use with LG-150/250/350.

FC000040

O-Ring Replacement Kits

Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350XL.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-150/250

O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-300XL

O-Ring Replacement Kit – For use with LG-350.

AFL NO.

FC000004

FC000016

912231-00-00

1x6 Cable Router Kit

Used with the LG-150, LG-250, LG-350 and LG-350-AC.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

1X6 Cable Router Kit

AFL NO.

FC000070

© 2009, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00120, Revision 3, 4.14.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

195

LightLink Terminal Adapters for Sealed Closures

LLAS-200-12SC

LightLink Fiber Optic Terminal Adapters for Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures

The LightLink Access Solution (LLAS) Terminal Adapters provide the interconnect and/or demarcation of optical fibers for Fiber-to-the-Node (FTTN), Fiber-to-the-Home (FTTH),

Fiber-to-the-Premise (FTTP) and Fiber-to-the-Curb (FTTC) applications. The adapter plates are designed to be used in conjunction with AFL Sealed Fiber Optic Splice Closures and convert the standard closure design into an FTTX or demarcation type fiber optic splice closure. The adapter plates provide mounting positions ranging from six to 24 SC-style bulkheads (depending on the model). The interconnection and routing of 900 µm SC pigtails with pre-connectorized SC drop cables is managed through routing rings on the terminal adapter. Three versions are available and are matched to the LG-150, LG-250 and LG-350 series sealed fiber optic splice closures.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Terminal Adapter for LG-150/250 Sealed Splice Closure

Terminal Adapter for LG-350 Sealed Splice Closure

Terminal Adapter – Empty plate

MODEL NO.

LLAS-200-12SC

LLAS-300-24SC

LLAS-350-96-LC

Terminal Adapter – with Installed SCAPC (48) LLAS-350-96-LC

Terminal Adapter – with Installed SCUPC (48) LLAS-350-96-LC

Terminal Adapter – with Installed LCUPC Duplex SC Foot Print (48) LLAS-350-96-LC

Terminal Adapter – with Installed LCAPC Duplex SC Foot Print (48) LLAS-350-96-LC

AFL NO.

FC000068

FC000069

FC000736

FC000737

FC000738

FC000739

FC000765

Blank bulkhead adapter plate and routing rings are included.

SC bulkheads, SC pigtails (900 µm) and SC pre-connectorized drop cable may be ordered separately.

Accessories Ordering

DESCRIPTION

(1) Small Flange SC/UPC Bulkhead adapter (Blue)

(1) Small Flange SC/APC Bulkhead adapter (Green)

(1) Pigtail - SC/UPC Connector with (1) meter 900µm fiber

(1) Pigtail - SC/APC Connector with (1) meter 900µm fiber

AFL NO.

C058475

C147880

C146507-0001

C203278-0001

LLAS-300-24SC

LLAS-200-12SC LLAS-300-24SC

LLAS-350-96LC

196

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00155, Revision 4, 10.8.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

OptiNID

®

500 Optical Demarcation Closure

The OptiNID (OPN) 500 is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. Small form factor for FTTH demarcation applications, the closure is capable of housing up to six bulkhead adapters in one 118 LGX

® compatible adapter plate, and is equipped with an integrated splice tray, which holds up to six single fusion splices. The OPN-500 can be either wall or pole-mounted.

Features

• Weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy

• Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts

• Capacity for one 118 LGX compatible adapter plate

• Provider override for customer lock

• 3/4" NPT conduit fitting, compression cable fittings or grommeted entry ports

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUES

Dielectric Strength Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute

High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress °F (°C) 14 days at 159 (70.55)

Temperature Cycling with Humidity °F (°C) 150 day cycling from 40-140 (4.44-60) with 95% RH

Impact Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5 ft/lbs on all external surfaces

Drop Test °F (°C)

Rain

-40 (-40), 5 ft onto concrete surface four times

24 hours at 10 psi

UV Resistance (Days Exposed)

Salt Fog (Days Exposed)

Flammability

Chemical Resistance

30 Days at 100°F and 95% RH

Material

60 per ASTM-G26-84

60 per ASTM-BLL7-90

UL94-5V

Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to house paint, wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide

UL ® listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy

Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm)

Cable Entrance in. (cm) diameter - Input

Covers

6.3 x 7.8 x 2.0 (15.7 x 19.7 x 5.0)

1 x 3/4” NPT (1.130”), 2 x 1/2” NPT (0.875”)

Standard, molded-in snap finger and "F" termination

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

BASE PRODUCT

1,2

AFL NO.

OptiNID OPN-500, No Adapters DM001021

OptiNID OPN-500, 1 x SC/UPC Adapter DM000550

OptiNID OPN-500, 1 x SC/APC Adapter

OptiNID OPN-500, 6 x SC/UPC Adapters

OptiNID OPN-500, 6 x SC/UPC Adapters, 6 x 1 m 900 μm Pigtails

ACCESSORIES

3

DM000766

DM000871

DM001109

Heyco M3234 Compression Fitting, 18 mm to 11 mm Grip (includes 4) – Left Port Only DM001171

Kit, Six-Position Splice Chip, (includes 10) DM000870

Notes:

1. All standard OPN-500 configurations come equipped with a ¾” NPT fitting, rubber grommet and

Heyco 3231 compression fitting, along with a splice chip for six single fusion splices.

2. Contact AFL customer service for additional configurations.

3. See OptiNID Accessory Page for additional kits.

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00160, Revision 5, 6.7.13

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

197

OptiNID

®

760XL Optical Demarcation Closure

OPN-760XL with optional security cover kit

OPN-760XL with 3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit

OptiNID

®

760XL

Optical Demarcation Closure

The OptiNID (OPN) 760XL is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. It is capable of housing up to 24 bulkhead adapters in two 118

LGX

®

compatible adapter plates and is equipped with a splice tray (LL-2425), which holds up to 24 single fusion splices. The OPN-760XL can be either wall or pole-mounted.

Features

• Capacity for up to two 118 LGX compatible adapter plates

• Rugged weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy

• Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts

• Slip-in grommets allow pre-connectorized cable deployment

• Provider override is provided so that technician can override customer lock

• Security cover option available

Specifications

PARAMETER VALUES

Dielectric Strength Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute

High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress °F (°C) 14 days at 159 (70.55)

Temperature Cycling with Humidity °F (°C)

Impact Test °F (°C)

Drop Test °F (°C)

Rain

UV Resistance (Days Exposed)

Salt Fog (Days Exposed)

Flammability

Chemical Resistance

30 Days at 100 °F and 95% RH Subject to:

150 day cycling from 40-140 (4.44-60) with 95% RH

-40 (-40), 5*/lbs on all external surfaces

-40 (-40), 5* (12.7 cm) onto concrete surface 4 times

24 hours at 10 psi

60 per ASTM-G26-84

60 per ASTM-BLL7-90

UL94-5V

Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to: house paint, wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide

Material

Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm)

Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter—Input

Covers

UL ® listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy

13 x 13 x 3.75 (32.5 x 32.5 x 9.5)

4 x 0.875 (2.2)—3/4" conduit

Standard – molded-in snap finger and 3/8" hex head fastener

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

BASE PRODUCT 1,2

OptiNID OPN-760XL, No Adapters, No Security Cover

OptiNID OPN-760XL, No Adapters, Security Cover

ACCESSORIES

3

3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit (includes 2)

OPN-760XL Security Cover Kit

OPN-760XL Pole Mounting Kit

AFL NO.

DM001000

DM001022

Notes:

1. All standard OPN-760XL configurations come equipped with four slip-in rubber grommets and

a splice tray equipped for 32 single fusion splices.

2. Contact AFL customer service for additional configurations.

3. See OptiNID Accessory Page for additional kits.

DM001174

DM000923

DM000927

3/4" Pipe Fitting Transition Kit

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00161, Revision 5, 3.18.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

198

OptiNID

®

1224 Optical Demarcation Closure

The OptiNID-1224 is an optical demarcation closure designed for use in either indoor or outdoor environments. It is capable of housing up to 36 bulkhead adapters in three 118 LGX

® compatible adapter plates and comes equipped with a splice tray (LL-2425), which holds up to

32 single fusion splices. The OPN-1224 can be either wall or pole-mounted.

Features

• Capacity for up to three 118 LGX compatible adapter plates

• Weather-resistant thermoplastic alloy

• Self-latching, hinged cover design allows easy access without loose parts

• Self-sealing individual entrance ports prevent water and insects from entering

• Provider override is provided so that technician can override customer lock

Specifications

PARAMETER

Dielectric Strength

VALUES

Minimum 2500 Vrms for 1 minute

High Temperature Storage/Mold Stress °F (°C) 14 days at 159 (70.55)

Temperature Cycling with Humidity °F (°C) 150 day cycling from 40-140 (4.44-60) with 95% RH

Impact Test °F (°C) -40 (-40), 5*/lbs on all external surfaces

Drop Test °F (°C)

Rain

UV Resistance (Days Exposed)

Salt Fog (Days Exposed)

Flammability

Chemical Resistance

30 Days at 100°F and 95% RH

Material

Dimensions (H x W x D) in. (cm)

Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter - Output

Cable Entrances in. (cm) diameter - Input

Covers

-40 (-40), 5* (12.7 cm) onto concrete surface 4 times

24 hours at 10 psi

60 per ASTM-G26-84

60 per ASTM-BLL7-90

UL94-5V

Resists chipping and/or cracking when subject to: house paint, wasp spray, sulfuric acid, kerosene and sodium hydroxide

UL ® listed flame retardant thermoplastic alloy

12.25 x 12 x 5.25 (22.80 x 22.80 x 7.60)

5 x 0.625 (1.5)

2 x 0.75 (1.5), 1 x 0.250 (0.6) (ground wire)

Standard - molded-in snap finger and "F" termination

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

OptiNID OPN-1224, Splice Tray, No Adapter Plate Or Adapters

AFL NO.

DM000183

LGX is a registered trademark of Furukawa Electric North America, Inc.

199

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00159, Revision 3, 6.14.13

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Hermetic Fiber Assemblies

Hermetic Fiber Assemblies are designed to meet today’s environmental sealing requirements for optical components used in military, telecommunication and sensing applications. The assembly is designed to integrate hermetic functionality (metalized and non-metalized), mechanical robustness, optical integrity and performance into a single package. Termination options include high-performance connectors, capillaries, lensed fibers and bare fiber endfaces.

Features

• Metalized SM or Polarization Maintaining (PM) fibers

• Kovar ferrule construction for thermal stability and device attachment ease

• Hermetic seals greater than

10-8 cc/sec helium

• Standard and custom designs available

• Guaranteed polarization alignment throughout assembly for PM-based designs

• Rugged construction designed to meet

Telcordia and Military mechanical/environmental requirements

Specifications

METALIZATION PROPERTY

Coating Type

Coating Thickness

Gold

Nickel

Dimensional Tolerances

Metalization Length

Fiber Tip Length (non-metalized 125 µm)

Metalization/250 µm Overcoat Length

Physical Properties

Metal-Glass Adhesion

Hermeticity

Pull Strength (Kovar ferrule-to-fiber)

Solder Compatibility

Operating Temperature

Fiber Types

Applications

• Laser Packages (LDs, Source Lasers, etc.)

• Military Components

• DWDM Components

• Modulators

• Attenuators

• Sensors

• Fiber Optic Gyros

SPECIFICATION AND LIMITS

Nickel/Gold

0.1 to 0.2 µm

4.0 + 1 µm

3.0 to 40.0 + 1.0 mm

0.2 to 20.0 + 1.0 mm

0 to 5 mm

> 1Kg

< 10-9 ATM cc/sec He

> 1Kg

SnPb, InAg, AuSn

-40ºC to + 85ºC

PANDA/PM, SM, MM

200

© 2002 AFL, all rights reserved. PP-2-00060, Revision 2, 1.17.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specialty Fiber Optic Cable

MiniBend

Fiber Optic Component

For Downhole Double-ended Systems and Optical Connectivity

The MiniBend miniature fiber optic component employs a revolutionary technology that will change the way you plan and engineer the fiber management in your oil or gas well.

This patented technology allows for a single strand of multimode or single-mode fiber to be formed at a 180° bend with a 1 mm fiber bend diameter, saving valuable real estate.

Features

• Elegant, low profile solution for achieving downhole fiber optic double-ended system

• Provides low-loss sub-millimeter bends for miniaturizing fiber components and circuits

• No stress with the small bend radii

• Bi-directional

• Mechanically and environmentally robust

• Small and protective package

Dimensions

Applications

• Downhole fiber optic turnaround

• Fiber management systems

• Modulators, splitters, circulators, connectors and polarizers

• Circuit boards and back planes

• Compact test instrumentation and sensors

Specifications

PARAMETER

Item Number

Fiber Coating Type

Operation Wavelength Range

Insertion Loss

Operating Temperature

Storage Temperature

Body Size

Fiber Tail Length

Straight Pull

VALUE

DNS-1574 DNS-1575

50 µm multimode carbon mid-temperature acrylate

50 µm multimode carbon/polyimide

900 to 1340 nm, 1430 to 1600 nm

< 0.2 dB at 1310 nm of wavelength at room temperature

0 to 150°C 0 to 200°C

-60 to 85°C

Outside Diameter = 2.2 mm +/-0.1, Length = 15 mm +/-0.3

> 0.5 m

500 g

DNS-1885 single-mode carbon mid-temperature acrylate

DNS-1890 single-mode carbon/polyimide

1280 to 1340 nm, 1430 to 1600 nm

< 0.3 dB at 1550 nm of wavelength at room temperature

0 to 150°C 0 to 200°C

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

201

© 2004, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00079, Revision 2, 9.16.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specialty Fiber Optic Cable

Applications

• Umbilical Cables

• Downhole Cables for Oil & Gas

• Towed Arrays

• High Temperature Cables

• Hybrid Cables

• Sensor Cable

• OPGW

Stainless Steel Fiber Optic Tubes

As the inventor and owner of the technology for placing optical fibers into stainless steel tubes, AFL offers a range of tube sizes and fiber counts for a variety of applications.

Each tube is flooded with a thixotropic filling compound and hermetically sealed to protect the enclosed fibers from environmental degradation. This product is sometimes referred to as FIST (Fiber in Steel Tube) or FIMT (Fiber in Metal Tube).

Jacket Options

AFL can encapsulate any of our stainless steel tubes with any of the following polymers:

• Hytrel

• Santoprene ™

• Polyethylene

• Polypropylene

• Nylon

• PVDF

Cable Components

Outer Jacket

Fiber

Stainless Steel Tube

Specifications (without jacketing)

11

12

13

14

7

8

9

10

15

16

17

5

6

3

4

1

2

OPTION

NUMBER

8

8

6

8

3

4

MAXIMUM

FIBER COUNT

8

12

16

16

16

24

36

48

60

72

72

OUTSIDE

DIAMETER inches (mm)

0.046 (1.17)

0.052 (1.32)

0.071 (1.80)

0.074 (1.88)

0.078 (1.98)

0.079 (2.01)

0.082 (2.08)

0.092 (2.34)

0.094 (2.39)

0.098 (2.49)

0.106 (2.69)

0.118 (3.00)

0.125 (3.18)

0.134 (3.40)

0.142 (3.61)

0.150 (3.81)

0.156 (3.96)

INSIDE

DIAMETER inches (mm)

0.036 (0.91)

0.042 (1.07)

0.055 (1.40)

0.058 (1.47)

0.062 (1.57)

0.063 (1.60)

0.066 (1.68)

0.076 (1.93)

0.078 (1.98)

0.082 (2.08)

0.090 (2.29)

0.102 (2.59)

0.109 (2.77)

0.119 (3.02)

0.126 (3.20)

0.134 (3.40)

0.140 (3.56)

Available in Stainless Steel 304, 316 and Incoloy 825. Others sizes and materials available on request.

WALL

THICKNESS inches (mm)

0.005 (0.127)

0.005 (0.127)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

0.008 (0.200)

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

202

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00021, Revision 2, 9.20.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Specialty Fiber Optic Cable

Traditional Downhole Cable

Traditional Downhole cable from AFL is designed to perform in the well and withstand elevated temperatures, high pressure and corrosive environments. The cable is customized to the customer’s specifications in order to maximize performance at the best possible price. AFL’s Traditional Downhole cable is targeted to < 150°C offshore and land-based wells where ruggedness is essential.

Features

• Customized to customer specifications

• Up to 150°C

• Up to 20,000 psi operating pressure

• Loose tube design

• Hydrogen scavenging gel

Cable Components

Outer Stainless Steel Tube

Polyprolylene Inner Jacket

Inner Stainless Steel Tube

Fiber

Hydrogen Scavenging Gel

Outer Encapsulation

Options and Specifications

PARAMETER

Inner Stainless Steel Tube Diameter

Outer Tube Diameter

Outer Tube Wall Thickness

Outer Tube Material

Fiber Coating

Gel Types

Diameter

Polymer Options

Operating Temperature

Operating Pressure Limit

VALUE

0.125"

0.250"

0.028", 0.035", 0.049"

Stainless Steel 316L, Incoloy

825

Carbon Polyimide, Silicon/PFA, Pure Silica Core and others

No gel, standard gel, hydrogen scavenging gel

11 mm x 11 mm square, 11 mm round

Polypropylene, PVDF, Nylon, Santoprene ™

-40°C to 150°C

0 to 20,000 psi

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

203

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00084, Revision 2, 9.16.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Small diameter

• Low weight

• Redundant hermetic seal

• Encapsulation options

• Lower cost

• Patent pending

Specialty Fiber Optic Cable

Low Profile Downhole Cable

AFL’s unique offering for shallow, land-based wells provides the best combination of ruggedness and size for the price. AFL will customize the design to meet the customer’s needs in order to maximise their return on investment.

Cable Components

Outer Tube

Inner Tube

Fiber

Hydrogen Scavenging Gel

Inside Tube

Options and Specifications

PARAMETER

Outer Tube Diameter

Tube Wall Thickness

Tube Material

Fiber coating

Gel types

Polymer options

STAINLESS STEEL 316L OPTION

Weight

Tensile

Collapse pressure

Bend radius (dynamic)

INCOLOY

825 OPTION

Weight

Tensile

Collapse pressure

Bend radius (dynamic)

ENCAPSULATION OPTION

Diameter

Weight

Santoprene

Polypropylene

PVDF

Nylon

VALUE

DOUBLE TUBE TRIPLE TUBE

0.125

0.016

Stainless Steel 316L, Incoloy

825

0.125

0.024

Carbon Polyimide, Silicon/PFA, Pure Silica Core and others

No gel, high temperature gel, hydrogen scavenging gel

Polypropylene, PVDF, Nylon, Santoprene

21 lbs / 1,000 ft

760 lbs

30,000 psi

12.6"

22 lbs / 1,000 ft

814 lbs

21,000 psi

12.6"

1/4"

15 lbs / 1,000 ft

14 lbs / 1,000 ft

28 lbs / 1,000 ft

16 lbs / 1,000 ft

28 lbs / 1,000 ft

1,060 lbs

44,000 psi

12.6"

28 lbs / 1,000 ft

1,134 lbs

32,000 psi

12.6"

For specifications or questions regarding these cables please contact Dean Yamasaki 864-433-5390 or email [email protected].

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00078, Revision 3, 3.12.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

204

Specialty Fiber Optic Cable

High Temperature Downhole Cable

AFL’s unique solution for applications > 150°C is a three-layer design with the secondary layer being 0.040" thick aluminum. Research indicates hydrogen permeability through aluminum is 100 times less than stainless steel resulting in an extended life for the optical fiber. The all metal design eliminates concerns with polymers at elevated temperatures and provides for stable, predictable performance.

Features

• Hydrogen resistant

• All metal construction

• Tight tolerances

• 300°C temperatures and beyond

• Loose tube design

• Patent pending

Cable Components

Options and Specifications

PARAMETER

Inner Stainless Steel Tube Diameter

Outer Tube Diameter

Outer Tube Wall Thickness

Outer Tube Material

Weight Stainless Steel 316L

Incoloy

825

Fiber Types

Fiber Coating

Gel Types

Polymer Options

Operating Temperature

Operating Pressure Limit

VALUE

0.094"

0.250"

0.028"

Stainless Steel 316L, Incoloy ™ 825

142 kg/km

144 kg/km

Single-mode, Multimode, Pure Silica Core Single-mode

Polyimide, Carbon Polyimide, Silicon/PFA, Gold, Aluminum, Copper

No gel, high temperature gel, hydrogen scavenging gel

Polypropylene, PVDF, Nylon, Santoprene

-40°C to 300°C, higher upon request

0 to 20,000 psi

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

205

© 2008-2011, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00077, Revision 2, 9.9.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Features

• Hermetic Stainless Steel Tube

• High Strength Wire

• Polyethylene Jacketed

• Hydrogen scavenging gel

• Long lengths

• In-line splice technology

• Proven technology

• Long life expectancy

• Custom Jacket Colors

Specialty Fiber Optic Cable

Fiber Optic Component for Umbilical Cable

AFL’s Fiber Optic Component for Umbilical Cable is designed for subsea umbilical applications. AFL is the technology owner for hermetic stainless steel tubes which are the key building block for subsea cables. AFL provides customized designs to meet the most stringent requirements. AFL’s Fiber Optic Component is suitable for depths of 10,000 feet and beyond.

Cable Components

Outer Jacket

Armor Wires

Stainless Steel Tube

Inner Jacket

Optical Fiber

Options and Specifications

PARAMETER

Number of Fibers

Fiber

Stainless Steel Tube Sizes

Stainless Steel Tube Types

Armor

Fiber Colors

Unit Weight

Overall Diameter

VALUE

Up to 96

Single-mode, Multimode, 100 or 200 kpsi proof test

1.8 mm to 3.8 mm

304 or 316L Stainless Steel

16 x 1.02 mm (0.040") wires, a range of tensile specifications are available

EIA 598 or customer specification

150 to 300 kg/km

6 mm to 16 mm

Storage Temperature Range

Operating Temperature Range

Breaking Load

-40 to +85°C

-40 to +85°C

Up to 25 kN (dependant on armor selection)

Bend Radius (design dependent) 120 mm to 320 mm

Cable Marking To customer specification

For specifications or questions regarding these cables please contact Dean Yamasaki 864-433-5390 or email [email protected].

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00073, Revision 3, 3.12.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

206

BU Series Braided Armored Breakout Cable

Fiber Optic Cable

Temperature Range

Operating: - 46ºC to + 85ºC

Installation: - 20ºC to + 85ºC

Storage: -57°C to 85°C

Braided Armored Deployable

Tight Buffered Cable

AFL Armored Deployable Tight Buffered Cables are ideal for use in installations where extreme environmental conditions are present. With the addition of a wire braid embedded within the jacketing system, these cables are highly resistant to damage caused by repetitive impacts, high flex, crush, and abrasion as well as other harsh conditions. By utilizing AFL's tight buffered fiber technology field, termination is simplified.

Features

• Cut resistant polyurethane outer jacket

• Highly flexible construction allows for multiple deployments

• Performance in wide temperature range

• High impact and crush resistance

• Durable in high traffic areas

• Water and UV resistant

• Multiple jacket colors available

• Capable of supporting all Multi-Gigabit

Ethernet Protocols

Applications

• Field deployment in abusive environments

• High traffic areas

• Security and sensing applications

• High Flex Applications

• Installations in industrial environments

• Temporary installation of critical communications lines where quick retrieval and re-use is necessary

Cable Components

Tight Buffered Fiber

Bronze Braiding

Aramid Yarn

Inner TPU Jacket

Outer TPU Jacket

Ordering Information

NOMINAL

DIAMETER

AFL NO.

XU00130180#-BB

XU00258180#-BB

FIBER

COUNT

1

2

INCHES

0.26

.374

XU00458180#-BB

XU00661180#-BB

XU01270180#-BB

4

6

12

.374

.386

.421

Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice

MM

6.6

9.5

9.5

9.8

10.7

Replace asterisk () in AFL number with number corresponding below.

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link

600

6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link ™

9 = Single-mode

300

K = SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

* Other fiber types available.

NOMINAL

WEIGHT

LBS/1,000 FT KG/KM

42.4

82.5

82.5

64

124

124

85.5

104.7

128

156

250 (1112)

325 (1450)

325 (1450)

325 (1450)

394 (1750)

TENSION

INSTALLATION

LBS (N)

LONG TERM

66 (290)

66 (290)

66 (290)

66 (290)

79 (350)

MINIMUM

BEND RADIUS

INCHES (CM)

2.6 (6.6)

3.7 (9.5)

3.7 (9.5)

3.8 (9.8)

4.2 (10.7)

Replace pound sign (#) in AFL number with number corresponding below.

G = 500 µm Coated Optical Fiber

H = 250 µm Coated Optical Fiber

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

207

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00119, Revision 0, 1.8.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Tactical Cable

Fiber Optic Cable

Tactical Tight Buffered Cable

AFL Tactical Tight Buffered Cables are ideal for use in installations where extreme environmental conditions are present. Designed to be deployed and retrieved in the field, AFL’s Tactical Tight Buffered Cables are highly resistant to damage caused by repeated impacts or harsh conditions.

Features

Cut resistant, Flame Retardant

Polyurethane outer jacket

Highly flexible construction allows for multiple deployments

All aramid strength members

Performance in wide temperature range

High impact and crush resistance

Durable in high traffic areas

MIL-PRF-46291 qualified fiber available (-RH designation)

Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA

568-B3, Telecordia GR-409-CORE,

ANSI/ICEA S-83-596 and

ANSI/ICEA S-104-696

Two- and four-fiber cables designed to meet MIL-PRF-85045

Temperature Range

Operating: -56ºC to +85ºC

Installation: -20ºC to +85ºC

Applications

Field deployment in abusive environments

Temporary installation of critical communications lines where quick retrieval and re-use is necessary

Cable Components

Specifications

CHARACTERISTIC

Tensile and elongation

Operating tensile strength

Low-temp flexibility

Cyclic flexing

Crush resistance

Impact

Temperature cycling

Temperature/humidity cycling

Life aging

Freezing water immersion

Polyurethane outer jacket aramid strength member

250 µm or 500 µm optical fiber

900 µm Elastomeric Tight Buffer

High Traffic areas

Security and Sensing applications

Broadcast deployments

Installations in harsh environments

TEST PROCEDURE

EIA/TIA-455-33

EIA/TIA-455-33

EIA/TIA-455-37

EIA/TIA-455-104

EIA/TIA-455-41

EIA/TIA-455-25

EIA/TIA-455-3

EIA/TIA-455-5 Method B

EIA/TIA-455-4

EIA/TIA-455-98

PERFORMANCE

2000

2000 N/cm

200

-46°C to 85°C

Ordering Information

AFL NO.

XU00130180G

XU00258180G

XU00458180G

FIBER

COUNT

1

2

4

NOMINAL DIA.

INCHES

NOMINAL WT.

MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD

LBS (N)

MINIMUM BEND RADIUS

INCHES (CM)

(MM) LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION LONG TERM INSTALLATION LONG TERM

0.12

0.23

0.23

Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice

(2.9)

(5.8)

(5.8)

5.4

21.5

21.5

(8)

(32)

(32)

250 (1112)

375 (1668)

375 (1668)

75 (334)

150 (667)

150 (667)

1.5 (3.8)

3.25 (8.3)

3.25 (8.3)

1.25 (3.2)

2.25 (5.7)

2.25 (5.7)

Replace asterisk (

) in AFL number with number corresponding below.

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link

600

6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link

300

9 = Single-mode

K = SM Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

Fiber Notes/Options

G = Elastomer over 500 µm

– RH = Indicates Radiation Hardened Fiber

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2007, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00066, Revision 2.5 9.20.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

208

Fiber Optic Cable

Non-Armored Security Cable

Acting as the backbone for most of today’s fiber based systems, stranded fiber optic cables play a critical role in the high speed network. AFL’s Non-Armored Security fiber optic cables are designed to provide high fiber counts with the flexibility and versatility required for today’s most demanding installations. Our cables feature fiber counts up to 288, compliance with EIA/TIA and REA/RUS PE-90, and are S-Z stranded for easy mid-span access. Industry standard designs combined with innovative technologies, such as a dry core product, yield a world class cable that will support today’s and tomorrow’s technological needs.

Cable Components

Product Applications

• Security Sensing

• Long Haul Networking

• Building Interconnections (Campus

LAN)

• Trunking Lines Direct to

Telecommunications Closet

• Local Loop

• Distance Learning

• Distribution

• Intrabuilding Backbones

Temperature Range

Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . .-40ºC to +70ºC

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .-40ºC to +75ºC

Installation . . . . . . . . . . . .-30ºC to +70ºC

Mechanical Data

MAXIMUM LENGTHS*

FIBER

COUNT

6 - 60

72 - 96

108 -120

132 - 144

216

288

FEET

24,600

17,700

14,100

SINGLE-MODE

METERS

7,500

5,400

4,300

11,500

9,500

8,500

3,500

2,900

2,600

* Longer lengths may be available upon request.

Optical Information

FIBER TYPE

(6) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link™ 300

(8) 62.5/125 GIGA-Link™ 1000

(5) 50/125 GIGA-Link™ 600

(7) 50/125 GIGA-Link™ 2000

(9) Single-mode

MAXIMUM ATTENUATION

(dB/km)

850 nm 1300 nm 1550 nm

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

N/A

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

0.4

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.3

Gigabit Ethernet Minimum Link Distances are based on “bandwidth”/modal dispersion constraints.

Actual link distances may be constrained by attenuation, depending on specific loss budget.

OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN. BANDWIDTH

(MHz•km)

850 nm 1300 nm

200

350

500

500

N/A

600

600

500

800

N/A

FEET

24,600

17,700

14,100

11,500

9,500

8,500

MULTIMODE

METERS

7,500

5,400

4,300

3,500

2,900

2,600

GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN. LINK

DISTANCE (METERS)

850 nm 1300 nm

300

500

600

750

N/A

550

1000

600

2000

N/A

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00080, Revision 1, 1.18.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Fiber Optic Cable

Non-Armored Security Cable

Ordering Information

PART

NUMBER

FIBER

COUNT

NUMBER OF

TUBES/FIBERS

L

E

006C5T21N1

6

LE012C5T21N1

12

LE018C5T21N1 18

LE024C5T21N1

24

LE030C5T21N1

30

LE036C5T21N1 36

1w/6 (4 fillers)

1w/12 (4 fillers)

1w/12,1w/6 (3 fillers)

2w/12 (3 fillers)

2w/12,1w/6 (2 fillers)

3w/12 (2 fillers)

LE048C5T21N1

48

LE060C5T21N1

60

LE072C6T21N1 72

4w/12 (1 filler)

5w/12 (no fillers)

LE084C8T21N1 84

LE096C8T21N1

LE120CAT21N1

96

LE108CAT21N1 108

120

LE132CCT21N1 132

6w/12 (no fillers)

7w/12 (1 filler)

8w/12 (no fillers)

9w/12 (1 filler) l0w/12 (no fillers)

11w/12 (1 filler)

LE144CCT21N1 144

LE216CIT21N1

216

12w/12 (no fillers)

18w/12 (no fillers)

LE288COT21N1

288 24w/12 (no fillers)

Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice

NOMINAL

DIAMETER

INCHES

0.51

0.51

0.60

0.67

0.67

0.74

0.74

0.82

0.87

0.51

0.51

0.53

0.60

0.51

0.51

0.51

0.51

12.9

12.9

15.2

17.0

17.0

18.9

18.9

20.8

22.0

12.9

12.9

13.9

15.2

12.9

12.9

12.9

12.9

NOMINAL WEIGHT

MM LBS/1,000FT KG/KM

80

80

118

149

149

179

84

84

95

118

179

217

241

84

84

84

84

 Fiber Types – Replace asterisk () in part number with number corresponding to desired fiber type below.

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600

7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000

6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300

8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000

9 = Single-mode

Q = Non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode

120

120

176

222

222

269

269

303

360

125

125

141

176

125

125

125

125

MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD MINIMUM BEND RADIUS

LBS (N)

SHORT

TERM

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

LONG TERM

200 (890)

200 (890)

INCHES (CM)

SHORT

TERM

10.2 (26.0)

10.2 (26.0)

LONG TERM

5.1 (12.9)

5.1 (12.9)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

600 (2670)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

200 (890)

10.2 (26.0)

10.2 (26.0)

10.2 (26.0)

10.2 (26.0)

10.2 (26.0)

10.2 (26.0)

10.6 (27.0)

12.0 (30.4)

12.0 (30.4)

13.4 (34.0)

13.4 (34.0)

14.9 (37.8)

14.9 (37.8)

16.4 (41.6)

17.3 (44.0)

5.1 (12.9)

5.1 (12.9)

5.1 (12.9)

5.1 (12.9)

5.1 (12.9)

5.1 (12.9)

5.3 (13.4)

6.0 (15.2)

6.0 (15.2)

6.7 (17.0)

6.7 (17.0)

7.5 (18.9)

7.5 (18.9)

8.2 (20.8)

8.7 (22.0)

Reel Information

ITEM

Reel Height

Reel Width Outside

Reel Width Inside

Drum Diameter

Arbor Hole Diameter

Reel Weight With Lagging

INCHES

42

36

32

23

3

180 lbs

REEL A

CM

106.7

91.4

81.6

58.7

7.9

82 kg

INCHES

58

38

32

28

3

420 lbs

REEL B

CM

147.3

96.5

81.3

71.1

7.9

191 kg

AFL provides ADSS cable on three standard sizes of non-returnable wooden reels. Non-standard reel sizes are available upon request.

INCHES

66

42

36

36

3

685 lbs

REEL C

CM

167.6

106.7

91.4

91.4

7.9

311 kg

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00080, Revision 1, 1.18.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Temperature Range

Operating . . . . . . . . . . . -40ºC to + 70ºC

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . -40ºC to + 75ºC

Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . .0ºC to + 70ºC

Uniflex

®

Security Cable

Product Applications

• Security Sensing

• Service (Drop) Cables

• Building Interconnections

(Campus LAN)

Cable Components

• Connectorized Trunking Cables

• Distance Learning

• Distribution outer jacket inner jacket strength member buffer tube optical fiber water blocking gel ripcord termite resistant jacket

Mechanical Data

MAXIMUM LENGTHS*

FIBER

COUNT

2 - 12

* Longer lengths may be available.

FEET

SINGLE-MODE

METERS

20,000 6,000

FEET

20,000

MULTIMODE

METERS

6,000

Ordering Information

ITEM

NUMBER

FIBER

COUNT

NOMINAL DIAMETER

INCHES (MM)

LE00221100N1

LE00441100N1

LE00661100N1

LE00881100N1

LE010A1100N1

LE012C1100N1

8

10

12

2

4

6

0.38 (9.7)

Note: Diameter and weight subject to change without notice

NOMINAL WEIGHT

MINIMUM BEND RADIUS

INCHES (CM)

LBS/1,000FT (KG/KM) SHORT TERM LONG TERM SHORT TERM LONG TERM

51 (76)

MAXIMUM TENSILE LOAD

LBS (N)

600 (2670)

 Fiber Types – Replace asterisk () in part number with number corresponding to desired fiber type below.

5 = 50/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600

7 = 50/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000

6 = 62.5/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300

8 = 62.5/125µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000

9 = Single-mode

Q = Non-zero dispersion-shifted single-mode

200 (890) 6.3 (16.0) 3.1 (8.0)

© 2005, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00086, Revision 1, 1.18.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

211

Fiber Optic Cable

Simplex Cable

Simplex fiber optic cables provide the strength and flexibility required for today’s fiber interconnect applications. AFL offers the broadest selection of simplex cordage including

Plenum, Riser and LSZH, available in all diameters. Our simplex cable is tested to meet

Telcordia GR-326 when used in connectorized assemblies. AFL provides customized performance with regard to jacket stiffness and flexibility, diameter, print legend, jacket color and tight buffer strippability. The easy strip option allows removal of up to one meter of 900 µm material without stripping the fiber’s 250 µm coating. Compliant with

Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS).

Features

• Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA

568-133 and Telcordia GR-409-CORE

• Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC

(RoHS)

• LSZH meets the requirements of

IEC 61034-1, 61034-2, 60332-1-1,

60332-1-2, 60754-1, 60754-2

Applications

• Building Interconnections (Campus LAN)

• Trunking Lines Direct to

Telecommunications Closet

• Fiber patch panels within communications closets

• Long Haul Networks

• Links between electronic equipment and fiber patch panels

• Connectorized patch cords for cross connect applications

Cable Components tight buffered fiber

(900 µm buffer) aramid yarn outer jacket

Mechanical Data

AFL NO.

FIBER

COUNT

NOMINAL

DIAMETER

PLENUM

RISER

LSZH

SP001

301001

SP001

241001

SP001

201001

SP001

161001

SA001

301001

SR001

241001

SR001

201001

SR001

161001

SE001

30100E

SE001

24100E

SE001

20100E

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0.11 (2.9)

0.09 (2.4)

0.08 (2.0)

0.06 (1.6)

0.11 (2.9)

0.09 (2.4)

0.08 (2.0)

0.06 (1.6)

0.11 (2.9)

0.09 (2.4)

0.08 (2.0)

Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)

1 = 100/140 µm multimode fiber

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600

7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000

6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300

8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000

9 = 9/125 µm single-mode

L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet

K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

RISER

WEIGHT

PLENUM

LBS/1000 FT

(KG/KM)

6 (9)

5 (7)

3 (5)

5 (7)

3 (5)

3 (4)

2 (3)

2 (2)

5 (7)

3 (5)

3 (4)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

TENSION

LBS (N)

INSTALLATION

LONG

TERM

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance needs.

BENDING RADIUS

INCHES (CM)

INSTALLATION

2.0 (5.0)

LONG

TERM

1.2 (3.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

TEMPERATURE RANGE

OPERATING/

INSTALLATION

0°C to +70°C

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

-20°C to +70°C

STORAGE

-40°C to

+75°C

-40°C to

+75°C

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

0°C to +70°C -40°C to

+75°C

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

212

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00063, Revision 3, 9.27.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Fiber Optic Cable

Simplex Cable

Specifications

CORE SIZE/ FIBER TYPE

(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300

(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000

(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600

(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000

(A) 50 Laser-Link 150

(L) 50 Laser-Link 300

(C) 50 Laser-Link 550

(K) SM Futureguide SR-15e

Bend Insensitive (ITU

G.657.A)

(9) SM

(1) 100/140 Multimode

ISO/

IEC

OM1

OM1

OM2

OM2

OM2

OM3

OM4

OS2

OS2

MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM)

850 NM

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.0

3.0

3.0

N/A

N/A

5.5

1300 NM

1.2

1.2

1.5

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

0.5

0.5

3.5

1550 NM

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.5

0.5

N/A

Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE

OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN.

BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM)

850 NM

200

350

500

500

700

1500

3500

N/A

1300 NM

600

600

500

800

500

500

550

N/A

N/A

100

N/A

100

EMB c

(MHZ•KM)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

950

2000

4700

N/A

GIGABIT ETHERNET

MIN. LINK DISTANCE

(METERS)

850 NM 1300 NM

300 550

500 1000

600

750

800

600

2000

550

1000

1040

N/A

550

550

5000

10 GIGABIT ETHERNET

MIN. LINK DISTANCE

(METERS)

850 NM 1300 NM

32 —

65 —

82

110

150

300

550

N/A

10,000

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

5,000

N/A

N/A

N/A

10,000

N/A

Maximum Cable Length - Reel Size

ITEM

Reel/Box Height (inches)

Reel/Box Outside Width

(inches)

Drum Diameter (inches)

Reel Weight (lbs)

CAPACITY: METERS (FEET)

Simplex 1.6

Simplex 2.0

Simplex 2.4

Simplex 3.0

FIBER BOX*

15.13

13.0

8.0

6.0

914 (3,000)

REEL Z

14.0

12.0

8.0

7.0

5,000 (16,404)

3,500 (11,483)

REEL A

16.0

15.0

8.0

10.0

5,000 (16,404)

5,000 (16,404)

4,000 (13,123)

2,500 ( 8,202)

REEL B

24.0

17.0

12.0

23.0

5,000 (16,404)

5,000 (16,404)

* Add suffix "– XMFBOX" to cable AFL number to specify "Fiber-In-A-Box" solution. "X" indicates length of cable in thousands of feet. Only available in standard lengths as indicated in chart above.

EXAMPLE: SP0019301001–3MFBOX

Would be the resulting AFL number for 3,000 feet of SP001

*

301001 cable with 9/125 µm single-mode fiber and the Fiber-In-A-Box solution. Refer to Fiber-In-A-Box data at front of catalog.

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

213

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00063, Revision 3, 9.27.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Fiber Optic Cable

Applications

• Communications closet to wall outlet

• Wall outlet to desk

• Connectorized patchcords for intercon- nect and cross-connect applications

• Easy interface to ESCON

®

, FDDI, and various other duplex connectors

Cable Components

Zipcord DUAL-Link

Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable

Zipcord, DUAL-link and Micro-Dual cables provide links to the future for such protocols as FDDI, 10 Gigabit Ethernet, ATM, and Fibre Channel. Connections are easy to terminate with this flexible, two-fiber design. AFL offers the broadest selection of duplex cordage including Plenum, Riser and LSZH in all diameters. LSZH jacketed cables are OFNR listed.

One design for global companies that don’t want to maintain multiple cable types for varying global standards. Compliant with Directive 2002/95/EC (RoHS).

Features

• Print legend customization

• Jacket color (12 standard colors available)

• Tight Buffer strippability (easy strip option allows removal of up to 1 meter of 900 µm material without stripping the fiber’s 250 µm coating)

• Ruggedized Duplex designs for transport from communications closet to wall outlet

• Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA

568-133 and Telcordia GR-409-CORE

• LSZH meets the requirements of

IEC 61034-1, 61034-2, 60332-1-1,

60332-1-2, 60754-1, 60754-2

• Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC

(RoHS)

Micro-Dual Ruggedized Duplex

Mechanical Data

CABLE

TYPE

Zipcord

RISER

AFL NO.

PLENUM LSZH

ZA002301001 ZP002301001 ZE00230100E

ZR002241001 ZP002241001 ZE00224100E

ZR002201001 ZP002201001 ZE00220100E

ZR002161001 ZP002161001 —

Micro-Dual DR00220100B DP00220100B DE00220100B

DUAL-Link DA002481001 DP002481001 DE00248100E

DR002281001 DP002281001 DE00228100E

DR002241001 DP002241001 DE00224100E

Ruggedized

Duplex

RR002301001 RP002241001 —

2

2

2

2

2

2

FIBER

COUNT

2

2

2

NOMINAL

DIAMETER

INCHES

(mm)

0.11 x 0.22

(2.9 x 6.0)

0.09 x 0.19

(2.4 x 4.8)

0.08 x 0.16

(2.0 x 4.0)

0.06 x 0.12

(1.6 x 3.2)

0.08 (2.0)

0.19 (4.8)

0.11 (2.8)

0.094 (2.4)

0.185 x 0.30

(4.7 x 7.6)

WEIGHT

RISER PLENUM

LBS/

1000 FT

(kg/km)

LBS/

1000 FT

(kg/km)

10 (15) 12 (18)

TENSION

LBS (N)

INSTALLATION

22 (100)

LONG

TERM

7 (30)

7 (10)

5 (8)

4 (6)

3 (5)

13 (20)

5 (7)

3 (5)

34 (50)

9 (14)

7 (10)

7 (6)

5 (7)

17 (20)

6 (9)

5 (7)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

 Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600

7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000

6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300

8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000

9 = 9/125 µm single-mode

L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet

Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance needs

BENDING RADIUS

INCHES (CM)

INSTALLATION

LONG

TERM

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

1.2 (3.0)

3.1 (7.2)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

2.8 (7.1)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

0.78 (2.0)

2.0 (7.2)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.9 (4.7)

TEMPERATURE RANGE

OPERATING/

INSTALLATION

STORAGE

PLENUM:

0°C to

+70°C

RISER:

-20°C to

+70°C

-40°C to

+75°C

K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00067, Revision 4.1, 11.26.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

214

Fiber Optic Cable

Zipcord, Dual-link and Micro-Dual Cable

Specifications

CORE SIZE/ FIBER

TYPE

(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300

(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000

(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600

(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000

(A) 50 Laser-Link 150

(L) 50 Laser-Link 300

(C) 50 Laser-Link 550

(K) SM Futureguide SR-15e

Bend Insensitive (ITU

G.657.A)

(9) SM

(1) 100/140 Multimode

ISO/

IEC

OM1

OM1

OM2

OM2

OM2

OM3

OM4

OS2

OS2

MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM)

850 NM

3.5

3.0

3.0

3.0

N/A

3.5

3.5

3.5

N/A

5.5

1300 NM

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

0.5

1.2

1.5

1.2

0.5

3.5

1550 NM

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.5

0.5

N/A

OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN.

BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM)

850 NM

200

350

500

500

700

1500

3500

N/A

Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE

N/A

100

1300 NM

600

600

500

800

500

500

550

N/A

N/A

100

EMB c

(MHZ•KM)

N/A

N/A

950

2000

4700

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN.

LINK DISTANCE (METERS)

850 NM

300

500

600

750

800

1000

1040

N/A

1300 NM

550

1000

600

2000

550

550

550

5000

N/A

N/A

5,000

N/A

10 GIGABIT ETHERNET

MIN. LINK DISTANCE

(METERS)

850 NM 1300 NM

32 —

65

82

110

150

300

550

N/A

10,000

N/A

N/A

10,000

N/A

Maximum Cable Length - Reel Size

ITEM

Reel/Box Height (inches)

Reel/Box Outside Width (inches)

Drum Diameter (inches)

Reel Weight (lbs)

CAPACITY: Meters (Feet)

Zipcord 1.6mm

Zipcord 2.0mm

Zipcord 2.4mm

Zipcord 3.0mm

DUAL-Link 2.4mm

DUAL-Link 2.8mm

DUAL-Link 4.8mm

Ruggedized Duplex

FIBER BOX*

15.13

13.0

8.0

6.0

914 (3,000)

305 (1,000)

REEL A

16

15

8

10

4,500 (14,764)

2,850 (9,350)

2,000 (6,562)

1,250 (4,100)

4,000 (13,123)

2,500 (8,200)

900 (2,953)

REEL B

24

17

12

23

5,000 (16,400)

5,000 (16,400)

4,000 (13,123)

5,000 (16,400)

5,000 (16,400)

3,200 (10,500)

1,500 (4,921)

REEL C

30

15.25

12

34

5,000 (16,400)

4,500 (14,764)

2,500 (8,200)

* Add suffix "– XMFBOX" to cable AFL number to specify "Fiber-In-A-Box" solution. "X" indicates length of cable in thousands of feet. Only available in standard lengths as indicated in chart above.

EXAMPLE: ZA0029301001–3MFBOX

Would be the resulting AFL number for 3,000 feet of ZA002 * 301001 cable with 9/125 µm single-mode fiber and the Fiber-In-A-Box solution. Refer to Fiber-In-A-Box data at front of catalog.

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

215

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00067, Revision 4.1, 11.26.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FIB

ER

OPTIC CABL

E

Fiber Optic Cable

RIBBON-Link

®

Cable

RIBBON-Link cables combine high fiber density in a small diameter, flexible package. These cables can be terminated with 12 or 24 fiber multi-fiber connectors or the fibers can be fanned out and terminated individually. Plenum, Riser and LSZH options are all UL listed.

Features

• Fiber counts up to 48 with unitized, zip configuration construction

• Maximum of two 12-fiber ribbons per unit

• Skew matched ribbons available (<10,

<6, <5, <4, <3, <2, <1.2 ps/meter)

• Easy interface to MT and MTP based connectors as well as today’s newest ribbon connectors (12- or 24-fiber ferrules)

• Ruggedized versions with additional jacketing are available

• Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA

568-A / GR-409-CORE

• Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC

(RoHS)

Applications

• Direct interface to computers with the use of “backplane” style fiber connectors

• High density interconnection to wall outlets or patch panels with ribbon connector interfaces

• “Micro-diameter” fanout cables utilizing standard industry fiber connectors

(ST, SC, FC, LC, MT-RJ.)

• VSR OC-192/OC-768 Interface based on parallel fiber optics

Cable Components

24-Fiber Single Pod outer jacket fiber subunit aramid yarn

Specifications

CORE SIZE/ FIBER TYPE

ISO/

IEC

(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300

OM1

(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000 OM1

(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600

(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000

OM2

OM2

(A) 50 Laser-Link 150

(L) 50 Laser-Link 300

OM2

OM3

(C) 50 Laser-Link 550

(K) SM Futureguide SR-15e

Bend Insensitive

(9) SM

(1) 100/140 Multimode

OM4

OS2

OS2

MAXIMUM ATTENUATION

(DB/KM)

OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN.

BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM)

850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM

3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600

3.5 1.2 N/A 350 600

3.5

3.5

3.0

3.0

3.0

N/A

1.5

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

0.5

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.5

500

500

700

1500

3500

N/A

500

800

500

500

550

N/A

N/A

5.5

0.5

3.5

0.5

N/A

N/A

100

Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE

N/A

100

EMB c

(MHZ•KM)

950

2000

4700

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

24-Fiber Dual Pod

N/A

N/A

GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN.

LINK DISTANCE (METERS)

850 NM 1300 NM

300 550

500 1000

600

750

800

1000

1040

N/A

600

2000

550

550

550

5000

10 GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN.

LINK DISTANCE (METERS)

850 NM 1300 NM

32 —

65 —

82

110

150

300

550

N/A

10,000

5,000

N/A

N/A

N/A

10,000

N/A

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00062, Revision 2, 9.27.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

216

FIB

ER

OPTIC CABL

E

Fiber Optic Cable

RIBBON-Link

®

Cable

Mechanical Data

CABLE

TYPE

PLENUM

(PVDF)

RIBBON-

LINK

(single pod)

WP004141012 WK004141012 WR004141012 WE004141012

WP006161012 WK006161012 WR006161012 WE006161012

WP008181012 WK008181012 WR008181012 WE008181012

WP0121C1012 WK0121C1012 WR0121C1012 WE0121C1012

WP0241D1012 WK0241D1012 WR0241D1012 WE0241D1012

RIBBON-

LINK

(dualpod)

WP008241012

WP012261012

WP016281012

WP0242C1012

ROUND

RIBBON

(simplex)

WP002301012

WP004301012

PLENUM

(PVC)

AFL NO.

RISER LSZH

WR008241012 WE008241012

WR012261012 WE012261012

WR016281012 WE016281012

WR0242C1012 WE0242C1012

WR002301012 WE002301012

WR004301012 WE004301012

FIBER

COUNT

4

6

8

12

24

8

12

16

24

2

NOMINAL

DIAMETER WEIGHT

INCHES

(MM)

LBS/

1000 FT

(KG/KM)

0.08 x 0.16

(2.1 x 4.0)

0.08 x 0.16

(2.1 x 4.0)

0.08 x 0.16

(2.1 x 4.0)

0.08 x 0.18

(2.1 x 4.6)

0.10 x 0.18

(2.5 x 4.6)

0.08 x 0.32

(2.1 x 8.2)

0.08 x 0.32

(2.1 x 8.2)

0.08 x 0.32

(2.1 x 8.2)

0.08 x 0.36

(2.1 x 9.2)

0.11 (2.9)

7.5 (11)

7.5 (11)

7.5 (11)

8 (12)

8.7 (13)

15 (22)

15 (22)

15 (22)

15 (24)

5 (7)

4 0.11 (2.9) 5 (7)

Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600

7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000

6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300

8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000

9 = 9/125 µm single-mode

L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet

K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

Contact Customer Service for optical performance specifications and for additional mechanical specifications.

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

22 (100)

TENSION

LBS (N)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

7 (30)

BENDING RADIUS

INCHES (CM)

TEMPERATURE RANGE

LONG

TERM

OPERATING/

INSTALLATION STORAGE

2.4 (6.0)

2.4 (6.0)

2.4 (6.0)

2.7 (6.9)

2.7 (6.9)

2.4 (6.0)

2.4 (6.0)

2.4 (6.0)

2.7 (6.9)

2.0 (5.0)

2.0 (5.0)

1.6 (4.0)

1.6 (4.0)

1.8 (4.6)

1.2 (3.0)

1.2 (3.0)

1.6 (4.0)

1.6 (4.0)

1.6 (4.0)

1.8 (4.6)

1.8 (4.6)

1.6 (4.0)

RISER:

-20°C to

+70°C

PLENUM:

0°C to

+70°C

-40°C to

+75°C

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

217

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00062, Revision 2, 9.27.11

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Cable Components

Fiber Optic Cable

Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable

Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cables are for use in applications requiring fiber counts between 18 and 144 fibers. Unitized construction allows for ease of fiber identification and rapid installation.

Applications

• Head-end termination to a fiber

"backbone"

• Termination of fiber rack systems

• Multi-floor deployment where select fibers are used at each floor

• Intrabuilding "backbones"

Features

• Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-A

/ GR-409-CORE

• Compliant to Directive 2002/95/EC

(RoHS)

• Hybrid constructions are available

Mechanical Data

CABLE

TYPE

RISER

AFL NO.

PLENUM

FIBER

COUNT

CPC with 6

Fiber

Subunits

CPC with 12

Fiber

Subunits

CR018441001 CP018441001

CR024441001 CP024441001

CR036441001 CP036441001

CR024551001 CP024551001

CR036551001 CP036551001

CR048551001 CP048551001

CR060551001 CP060551001

CR072551001 CP072551001

CR096551001 CP096551001

CR144551001 CP144551001

Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600

7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000

6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300

8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000

9 = 9/125 µm single-mode

L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet

K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance

18

36

48

60

72

96

144

24

36

24

NOMINAL

DIAMETER

INCHES (MM)

0.55 (13.3)

0.55 (13.3)

0.62 (15.6)

0.30 x 0.52 (7.6 x 13.2)

0.61 (15.4)

0.61 (15.4)

0.76 (19.3)

0.76 (19.3)

0.90 (22.8)

1.0 (25.4)

WEIGHT

RISER

LBS/1000FT

(KG/KM)

PLENUM

LBS/1000FT

(KG/KM)

121 (180) 134 (200)

121 (180)

147 (220)

57 (86)

120 (180)

120 (180)

184 (275)

184 (275)

281 (420)

288 (430)

134 (200)

171 (255)

62 (92)

134 (200)

134 (200)

211 (315)

211 (315)

295 (440)

302 (450)

TENSION

LBS (N)

INSTALLATION

300 (1320)

LONG

TERM

150 (660)

300 (1320)

300 (1320)

300 (1320)

300 (1320)

300 (1320)

300 (1320)

300 (1320)

300 (1320)

300 (1320)

150 (660)

150 (660)

150 (660)

150 (660)

150 (660)

150 (660)

150 (660)

150 (660)

150 (660)

Temperature Specifications

CABLE TYPE

PLENUM

RISER

TEMPERATURE RANGE

OPERATING/

INSTALLATION

0°C to +70°C

-20°C to +70°C

BENDING RADIUS

INCHES (CM)

INSTALLATION

LONG

TERM

8.3 (20.0) 5.5 (13.3)

8.3 (20.0)

9.2 (23.4)

5.0 (12.0)

9.1 (23.1)

9.1 (23.1)

10.4 (26.4)

11.4 (29.0)

13.5 (34.2)

15.0 (38.1)

5.5 (13.3)

6.2 (15.6)

4.0 (10.0)

6.1(15.4)

6.1 (15.4)

6.9 (17.6)

7.6 (19.3)

9.0 (22.8)

10.0 (25.4)

STORAGE

-40°C to +75°C

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00060, Revision 3, 6.18.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

218

Fiber Optic Cable

Multi-Unit Circular Premise Cable

Specifications

CORE SIZE/ FIBER

TYPE ISO/

IEC

(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300 OM1

(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™

1000

OM1

(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600

OM2

(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000 OM2

(A) 50 Laser-Link 150

OM2

(L) 50 Laser-Link 300

(C) 50 Laser-Link 550

OM3

OM4

(K) SM Futureguide

SR-15e Bend Insensitive

(ITU G.657.A)

(9) SM

(1) 100/140 Multimode

OS2

OS2

MAXIMUM ATTENUATION (DB/KM)

850 NM

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.0

3.0

3.0

N/A

N/A

5.5

1300 NM

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

0.5

1.5

1.2

1.2

0.5

3.5

1550 NM

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.5

0.5

N/A

OVERFILL LAUNCH MIN.

BANDWIDTH (MHZ•KM)

850 NM

200

350

500

500

700

1500

3500

N/A

Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE

N/A

100

1300 NM

600

600

500

800

500

500

550

N/A

N/A

100

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

950

2000

4700

N/A

EMB c

(MHZ•KM)

GIGABIT ETHERNET MIN.

LINK DISTANCE (METERS)

850 NM

300

500

1300 NM

550

1000

600

750

800

1000

1040

N/A

600

2000

550

550

550

5000

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

5,000

N/A

Cable Length - Reel Size

ITEM

Reel Height (inches)

Reel Outside Width (inches)

Drum Diameter (inches)

Reel Weight (lbs)

CAPACITY: METERS (FEET)

18 Fiber CPC

24 Fiber CPC

36 Fiber CPC (6F subunits)

36 Fiber CPC (12F subunits)

48 Fiber CPC

60 Fiber CPC

72 Fiber CPC

96 Fiber CPC

144 Fiber CPC

REEL F

42

36

23

148

2,300 (7,546)

2,300 (7,546)

1,600 (5,250)

1,500 (4,921)

1,500 (4,921)

1,250 (4,100)

1,000 (3,280)

REEL G

60

36

30

287

2,500 / (8,200)

2,500 / (8,200)

2,500 / (8,200)

1,500 / (4,921)

1,500 / (4,921)

1,500 / (4,921)

1,300 / (4,265)

10 GIGABIT ETHERNET

MIN. LINK DISTANCE

(METERS)

850 NM

32

1300 NM

65 —

82

110

150

300

550

N/A

10,000

N/A

N/A

10,000

N/A

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

219

© 2002, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00060, Revision 3, 6.18.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Fiber Optic Cable

Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable

AFL’s Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cables are perfectly suited for rugged applications and installations requiring increased performance. Available in 2 to 12 fiber counts, these cables feature a UV- and fungal-resistant semi-pressure extruded outer jacket.

The individual sub-units measure 2.5 mm, allowing for ease of field termination, and use water-blocking aramid which further protects the tight-buffered fiber.

Features

• Fungus, water and UV-resistant PVC jacket featuring SP extrusion technology

• Riser-rated with water-blocked sub-units

• Sub-units and tight buffer available in a variety of colors

• Tested to meet or exceed GR-409-CORE and ICEA-S-104-696

• Compliant to Directive

2002/95/EC (RoHS)

• MSHA approved for mining applications

Cable Components

2-Fiber

PVC outer jacket

2.4 mm water-blocked simplex sub-unit

- 900 µm buffered fiber

- water swellable aramid yarn strength members

- PVC jacket strength member (2) ripcord

12-Fiber

Applications

• Harsh Environment

• Mining

• Industrial

• Campus Environment

PVC outer jacket

2.5 mm simplex sub-unit

- 900 µm buffered fiber

- water swellable aramid yarn strength members

- PVC jacket upjacketed FRP center strength member ripcord

Mechanical Data

AFL NO.

BX002251801

BX004251801

BX006251801

FIBER

COUNT

2

4

NOMINAL

DIAMETER

INCHES (MM)

0.30 (7.5)

0.32 (8.2)

WEIGHT

LBS/1000FT (KG/KM) INSTALLATION

TENSION

LBS (N)

LONG TERM

32 (49)

37 (55)

6 0.38 (9.6) 54 (80)

BX008251801 8 0.44 (11.1)

2.4 mm water-blocked simplex sub-unit

75 (111)

BX012251801 12 0.57 (14.5) 165 (245)

- water swellable aramid yarn strength members

2.9 mm sub-units are also available.

 strength member (2)

Please specify fiber type when ordering (see below)

300 (1335)

450 (2000)

750 (3360)

1000 (4450)

1425 (6360)

150 (667)

185 (825)

375 (1680)

BENDING RADIUS

INCHES (CM)

INSTALLATION LONG TERM

3.8 (9.6)

3.9 (9.9)

4.8 (12.2)

2.5 (6.4)

3.2 (8.1)

3.8 (9.7)

425 (1750)

570 (2535)

6.6 (16.8)

8.5 (21.6)

- water swellable aramid yarn strength members

4.4 (11.2)

5.7 (14.5)

- PVC jacket

Temperature Specifications ripcord

PARAMETER VALUE

5 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 600

7 = 50/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 2000

6 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 300

8 = 62.5/125 µm multimode GIGA-Link™ 1000

9 = 9/125 µm single-mode

L = 50/125 µm multimode Laser-Link™ 300 for 10 Gigabit Ethernet

K = Single-mode Futureguide SR-15e Bend Insensitive

Storage

Operating

Installation

-40°C to +70°C

-40°C to +70°C

-20°C to +70°C

Contact Customer Service for special fiber types/performance needs.

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00051, Revision 3, 5.28.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

220

Fiber Optic Cable

Indoor/Outdoor Breakout Cable

Specifications

CORE SIZE/

FIBER TYPE

(6) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 300

(8) 62.5 Giga-Link™ 1000

(5) 50 Giga-Link™ 600

(7) 50 Giga-Link™ 2000

(A) 50 Laser-Link™ 150

(L) 50 Laser-Link™ 300

(C) 50 Laser-Link™ 550

(K) SM Futureguide SR-15e

Bend Insensitive (ITU G.657.A)

(9) SM

(1) 100/140 Multimode

ISO/

IEC

OM1

OM1

OM2

OM2

OM2

OM3

OM4

OS2

OS2

MAXIMUM ATTENUATION

(DB/KM)

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.0

3.0

3.0

N/A

N/A

5.5

1.2

1.5

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

0.5

0.5

3.5

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.5

0.5

N/A

Tested to meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568-B3 / Telcordia GR-409-CORE

OVERFILL LAUNCH

MIN. BANDWIDTH

(MHZ•KM)

850 NM 1300 NM 1550 NM 850 NM 1300 NM

3.5 1.2 N/A 200 600

350

500

500

700

1500

3500

N/A

N/A

100

600

500

800

500

500

550

N/A

N/A

100

EMBc

(MHZ•KM)

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

950

2000

4700

N/A

GIGABIT ETHERNET

MIN. LINK DISTANCE

(METERS)

10 GIGABIT

ETHERNET MIN. LINK

DISTANCE (METERS)

850 NM 1300 NM 850 NM 1300 NM

300 550 32 —

500 1000 65 —

600

750

800

1000

1040

N/A

600

2000

550

550

550

5000

82

110

150

300

550

N/A

10,000

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

5,000

N/A

N/A

N/A

10,000

N/A

Cable Length - Reel Size

ITEM

Reel Height (inches)

REEL F

42

Reel Outside Width (inches) 36

Drum Diameter (inches)

Reel Weight (lbs)

CAPACITY: METERS (FEET)

23

148

4 Fiber Breakout

6 Fiber Breakout

8 Fiber Breakout

12 Fiber Breakout

2,500 / (8,200)

2,500 / (8,200)

2,500 / (8,200)

1,600 / (5,250)

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

221

© 2008, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-1-00051, Revision 3, 5.28.15

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Cletop -S Series

Cletop Series

Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series

The Cletop connector cleaner is a rugged palm-sized cleaner that offers exceptional performance with a proven track record. The choice of many leading manufacturers and telecom carries worldwide for nearly 20 years – Cletop is a name you can rely on.

Why Clean Fiber Connectors?

• Pits and scratches are often caused by dirt

• Dust, dirt, oils, etc. are everywhere and will migrate to exposed connector end-faces

• Dirty connectors attenuate signal levels and can increase digital bit error rates

• Always clean both connectors when mating / unmating to avoid contamination transfer

Cletop Cassette Cleaner Options

• Cletop Series - Original version (proven reliability)

• Cletop –S Series - Second generation cleaner offering the same Cletop cleaning performance with “Drop-in” replacement tape cartridge and ergonomic design that works equally well for left or right handed operators

• Type A and -SA - Designed for single 2.5mm ferrules (SC, FC, ST, & D4)

• Type B and -SB - Cleans SC, SC2, FC, ST ® , DIN, D4, MU, LC, MT, MPO/MTP ® without pins, MT-RJ without pins

• Type MPO - Accepts MPO/MTP connectors with pins

• Type MT-RJ - Accepts MT-RJ connectors with pins

Features

• Compact and lightweight design is ideal for use in laboratories, assembly lines, or in the field

• Consistent cleaning results without IPA alcohol, which is toxic, flammable, and leaves a residue on fiber ends (white haze)

• Excellent anti-static properties for static sensitive applications and to minimize reattachment of dust to ferrule after cleaning

• Simple push button shutter operation exposes cleaning tape only when in use – minimizing unwanted dust

• Replaceable and cost effective cleaning tape

• Over 400 wipes per tape

222

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. 8500-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-29

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Cletop Cassette Cleaner Series

Specifications

Size

Weight

130 x 75 x 40 mm (5.1 x 3.0 x 1.6 in)

160 g/0.35 lb

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

CLETOP – S SERIES

Cletop -SA with Blue Tape

Cletop -SB with Blue Tape

Cletop -SB with White Tape

Replacement Tape Type S - Blue

Replacement Tape Type S - White

CLETOP ORIGINAL SERIES

Cletop Type A with Blue Tape

Cletop Type A with White Tape

Cletop Type B with Blue Tape

Cletop Type B with White tape

Cletop for MT-RJ with pins (White Tape)

Cletop for MPO/MTP with pins (White Tape)

Replacement Tape Blue

Replacement Tape White

AFL NO.

8500-10-0020MZ

8500-10-0029MZ

8500-10-0016MZ

8500-10-0021MZ

8500-10-0017MZ

8500-10-0027MZ

8500-10-0011MZ

8500-10-0028MZ

8500-10-0014MZ

8500-10-0032MZ

8500-10-0033MZ

8500-10-0012MZ

8500-10-0015MZ

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. 8500-00-2000 Revision 1E, 2014-10-29

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

223

MU/LC

Mini-100 MU/LC

Mini-500 MU/LC

SC/ST/FC

ODC

Mini-100 SC, ST, FC

Mini-500 SC, ST, FC

224

One-Click

®

Cleaner Series

Features

• Cleans connectors on jumpers and in adapters

• Low cost per clean

• Effective on a variety of contaminates including dust and oils

• Ergonomic, comfortable design with single action cleaning

• Automatic advance ensures each clean is performed with fresh cleaning tape

• Compliant with EU/95/2002/EC Directive (RoHS)

• Compact One-Click Cleaner Mini versions available

• Available with enlarged cleaning area up to 2 mm

• Duplex LC version available

• MPO/MTP version available

The Original One-Click Cleaner

The One-Click Cleaner is an easy-to-use option for cleaning connectors on jumpers and in adapters. Simply insert the One-

Click Cleaner into an adapter and push until an audible “click” is heard. The One-Click Cleaner uses the mechanical push action to advance an optical grade cleaning tape while the cleaning tip is rotated to ensure the fiber end-face is effectively, but gently cleaned. The One-Click Cleaner is a must-have for field technicians. Small enough to fit in a shirt pocket and a great addition to cleaning kits. Save your wrist – no more twist!

Rugged ODC

®

Version

With the increasing demand of Outdoor Connector (ODC) plug and socket styles, the ODC One-Click Cleaner, which cleans the ferrules in ODC plug, socket and 1.25 mm ferrules, is an essential cleaning tool for WiMax Base Station, Fiber-to-the-Antenna,

Broadcasting and Surveillance Video technicians.

Compact One-Click Cleaner Mini

Offering the same technology and performance as the original, the One-Click Cleaner is now available in a smaller, more compact size, which allows for cleaning of connectors in tighter places. Its smaller size also makes it a great addition to test kits and cleaning kits. The One-Click Mini that is offered by AFL as a low cost solution with 100+ cleans per unit is now also available with same 500+ cleans per unit as the standard One-Click. The

One-Click Mini is an effective, easy-to-use cleaning solution for

SC, ST, FC, LC, MU and TFOCA connectors.

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. 8500-05-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-30

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

One-Click

®

Cleaner Series

One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5

The One-Click Cleaner Ultra 2.5 has an enlarged cleaning area to clean more of the connector end-face. Cleaning up to a 2 mm diameter area of the connector end-face, the One-Click Cleaner

Ultra 2.5 is a superior cleaner for SC, ST, and FC connectors.

One-Click Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC)

Reduce cleaning time with the new One-Click Cleaner D-LC.

Offering the same performance and easy-to-use one-click technology as the original, the One-Click Cleaner D-LC cuts cleaning time in half by effectively cleaning both LC connectors of a duplex LC at one time. 500+ duplex LC cleans per cleaner

(1000+ LC connector cleans).

D-LC (Duplex LC) 2.5 Ultra

One-Click Cleaner MPO

One-Click Cleaner MPO

Designed to clean MPO and MTP ® multi-fiber connectors used in

Data Centers and other high density optical networks, the new

One-Click Cleaner MPO is a revolutionary push-type cleaner, which simplifies cleaning of the ferrule end-face of both MPO/

MTP exposed connectors and connectors in adapters. As with all One-Click Cleaners, the One-Click Cleaner MPO uses the innovative push-to-clean design. The mechanical push action advances the optical grade cleaning tape while effectively and gently cleaning the end-face of the connector.

Ordering Information

MODEL

One-Click SC, ST, FC

One-Click MU/LC

One-Click ODC

One-Click Mini-100 SC, ST, FC

One-Click Mini-100 MU/LC

One-Click Mini-500 SC, ST, FC

One-Click Mini-500 MU/LC

One-Click Ultra Cleaner 2.5

One-Click D-LC

One-Click MPO

DESCRIPTION

One-Click Cleaner SC, ST, FC (500 cleans)

LENGTH

172 mm (6.88 in)

One-Click Cleaner MU/LC (500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in)

One-Click Cleaner ODC (outdoor connector, 500 cleans) 172 mm (6.88 in)

One-Click Cleaner Mini-100 SC, ST, FC (100 cleans)

One-Click Cleaner Mini-100 MU/LC (100 cleans)

One-Click Cleaner Mini-500 SC, ST, FC (500 cleans)

BASE AFL NO.

17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) 8500-05-0001MZ

17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) 8500-05-0002MZ

17.5 x 17.5 mm (0.7 x 0.7 in) 8500-05-0004MZ

120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0005MZ

120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0006MZ

120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0009MZ

One-Click Cleaner Mini-500 MU/LC (500 cleans)

One-Click Ultra Cleaner 2.5 SC, ST, FC

(enlarged cleaning area, 500 cleans)

120.65 mm (4.75 in) 17.5 x 30.2 mm(0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0010MZ

203.2 mm (8 in)

One-Click Ultra Cleaner D-LC (Duplex LC, 500 cleans x 2) 195 mm (7.7 in)

22.2 x 33.3 mm (0.8 x 1.3 in) 8500-05-0007MZ

18 x 30 mm (0.7 x 1.2 in) 8500-05-0008MZ

One-Click Cleaner MPO (MPO/MTP ® , 500 cleans) 203.2 mm (8 in) 19 x 44.5 mm (0.8 x 1.8 in) 8500-05-0030MZ

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. 8500-05-2000 Revision 1H, 2014-10-30

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

225

Type 2.5 mm

Type 1.25 mm

Cletop Adapter Cleaning Sticks

Cletop (ACT) adapter cleaning sticks are an easy to use efficient means of cleaning fiber optic connectors in adapters and cleaning adapter alignment sleeves. Cletop sticks are available in sizes for most common commercial connectors (ST, SC , FC, LC, MU), military connectors, and LEMO connectors for video applications. When connectors need to be cleaned inside adapters, you can rely on the Cletop stick.

Features

• Easy to use and efficient. Delivers a consistently high level of cleaning performance

• Easy to clean ferrule end-faces inside the plug-in fiber optic connectors and various adapters

• Lightweight and safe to use. Compact and disposable

• Suitable for cleaning inside adapters for dust control

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

ACT-01 — 2.5 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 200)

ACT-02 — 1.25 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 200)

ACT-03 — 2.0 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 200)

Double-ended 2.0/2.5 mm Cletop Sticks (Box of 100)

CONNECTORS

FC, SC, ST, D4

LC, MU

Military termini, high definition television camera connectors such as LEMO

AFL NO.

8500-10-0024MZ

8500-10-0022MZ

8500-10-0023MZ

8500-10-0030MZ

Recommended Cleaning Procedure for ACT Cleaning Sticks

Procedure:

1. Insert: Ensure that stick is held straight when inserting into sleeve.

2. Load: Apply sufficient pressure

(approximately 600-700 g) to ensure ferrule is a little depressed in sleeve.

3. Rotate: Rotate stick clockwise 4-5 times while ensuring direct contact with ferrule end-face is maintained.

Notes:

1. Number of possible wipes:

- Maintenance (repair): approximately 1 use

- Equipment construction: 4 uses (max.)

2. FCC2 Fluid will improve cleaning performance.

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780

226

©2015, AFL, all rights reserved. ACT1-00-2000 Revision 1F, 2015-02-24

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Applications

• Dual-head design permits wet and dry cleaning in one swab

• Solvent and chemical resistant, not physically altered by solvent contact

• Designed to work with FCC2 Fiber

Connector Cleaner

• Most connectors cleaned the first time

CCT - Connector Cleaning Tips

AFL is pleased to offer a unique technology in fiber connector end-face cleaning. Rather than a fabric-covered or foam-covered stick, we are offering a molded cleaning tip that will trap contamination and wick cleaning solvents from bulkhead connectors. The cleaning tip is a molded, sintered polymer that is both porous and pliable conforming to virtually any fiber end-face polish geometry while trapping and absorbing contaminants.

Features

• Molded sintered polymer construction assures perfect bulkhead fit and consistent performance with each cleaning tip

• No fibers, binders, adhesives or outgassing that may contaminate the connector

• Traps and holds liquid and particle contaminants in an absorbent open cell matrix ranging from 10-25 microns

• The elastic cleaning head enhances entrapment of particles and oils, while allowing the tip to conform to virtually any fiber end-face geometry (8 degree, domed polish, etc.)

• Very absorbent

• US and Foreign patents pending

Tip Configurations

CCTS and CCTX series: cleaning tip is exposed for cleaning ferrule end-faces in alignment sleeves that are recessed within sockets or bulkhead adaptors.

CCTP series: cleaning tip is recessed in the “straw” for cleaning exposed ferrules and termini (jumpers). Fits 2.5 mm and smaller ferrules.

Ordering Information

Cleaning tips are available for most common commercial and Mil Spec ferrule sizes.

SIZE

(diameter of ferrule or termini)

2.5 mm

2.5 mm

2.0 mm

2.0 mm

1.6 mm

1.6 mm

1.25 mm

1.25 mm

MT ferrule

MT ferrule

TYPE

Pin

Socket

Pin

Socket

Pin

Socket

Pin

Socket

Pin

Socket

* Registered Trademark of TYCO Electronics Corp.

COMMENTS

Examples: SC, ST, FC, etc.

Examples: SC, ST, FC, etc.

Mil T 29504/14 For Mil C 28876

Mil T 29504/15 For Mil C 28876

Mil T 29504/04 For Mil C 38999

Mil T 29504/05 For Mil C 38999

Examples: LC, MU

Examples: LC, MU

Examples: MPO

,

MPX

®

*

Examples: MPO

,

MPX

®

*

AFL NO.

CCTP-25-0900

CCTS-25-0900

CCTP-25-0900

CCTS-16-0900

CCTP-25-0900

CCTS-16-0900

CCTP-25-0900

CCTS-12-0900

CCTX-MT-0900

CCTX-MT-0900

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. CCT0-00-2000 Revision 1F, 2014-10-29

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

227

FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid

FCC2 Enhanced Fiber Connector Cleaner is a nonflammable, environmentally safe, residue-free solvent engineered to clean fiber connector end-faces and bare fiber before field terminating or fusion splicing. The 3-way dispenser is intended for easy one-handed use with fiber wipes, convenient wetting of CCT connector cleaning tips, and spray nozzle functionality. Packaged in unique, spill-proof containers, it can be shipped with connector cleaning and termination kits so technicians avoid wasting time sourcing a cleaner locally. Offering high purity and fast consistent cleaning, FCC2 was developed with and is packaged by Micro Care Corporation, a world leader in cleaning solvents.

Features

• Not Hazardous/Not Regulated for all modes of transport, including air cargo

• Unique dispenser for use with AFL Connector Cleaning Tips and FiberWipes

• Up To 400+ cleanings per can

• Dries without a residue, unlike alcohol

• Dissipates static charge

• Safe on all surfaces including soft plastics

Applications

• Cleans all types of connector end-faces

• Cleans bare fiber before field terminating or fusion splicing

• Removes oils, salts, dust, dirt and uncured epoxies

• Safe on glass, ceramic, metal, plastic optical fiber

• Compact size fits easily into tool kits, instrument cases, termination kits, and inspection kits

• Perfectly cleans all optic components

EU RoHS and WEEE Compliant

FCC2 is certified as a lead-free product and meets RoHS and WEEE standards.

Health and Safety Data

Flashpoint (TCC)

Weight

Safety Rating

NFPA

HMIS:

Transportation

None

3 oz / 85 g

Nonflammable

Health: 3 | Fire: 1 | Instability: 0

Health: 1 | Flammability: 1 | Physical: 0

Not regulated

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid in 3 oz / 85 g can

Fiber Connector Cleaner and Preparation Fluid , Case of 12 cans

AFL NO.

FCC2-00-0902

FCC2-00-0903

© 2015, AFL, all rights reserved. FCC2-00-2000 Revision 1F, 2015-01-22

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

228

FCP2-00-0900 Basic Cleaning Kit

FCPR-00-0900 Refill for Basic Cleaning Kit

FCP2-01-0900 Basic Cleaning and Inspection Kit

FCP2-02-0900 Basic Cleaning, Inspection & Test Kit

1400-01-0095PZ Carry Case

Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Kits

The FCP2 kits offer a complete selection of fiber optic cleaning products for field cleaning of connector end-faces in a convenient duffle bag style carry case.

The Basic Cleaning Kit includes FCC2 cleaning fluid, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and

MU connectors, FiberWipes

and a Cletop SB. The carry case has room to add additional cleaning supplies, inspection scope, or test equipment. FCP2 kit options are available with inspection, loss testing and MPO/MPT cleaning capabilities.

FCC2 Fiber Connector Cleaner

FCC2 is a nonflammable, environmentally safe, residue-free solvent engineered to clean fiber connector end-faces. A new and improved design of the 3-way dispenser intended for easy one-handed use with fiber wipes, convenient wetting of CCT connector cleaning tips, and spray nozzle functionality. Packaged in unique, spill-proof containers, it can be shipped with tool kits so technicians avoid wasting time sourcing a cleaner locally.

New 3-way dispenser in one convenient package

• Electrically conductive, FCC2 neutralizes “particle cling” by releasing ionic bonds that bind contaminates to the fiber end-face

• Double-filtered to 0.2 microns, this optical grade solvent leaves no residue when drying

• Less drying time than IPA Alcohol

• Low odor, nonflammable

• Ozone safe, environmentally safe, US EPA SNAP approved

• Not Hazardous/Not Regulated for all modes of transport, including air cargo

• Excellent for cleaning light oils, salts, moisture, fingerprints, dust, lint, grime, flux residues and uncured epoxies

• With rapid drying time, the FCC2 is essential when cleaning connectors in adapters where airflow is minimal

One-Click Cleaner

The One-Click Cleaner is an easy-to-use option for cleaning connectors on jumpers and in adapters. Simply insert the One-Click Cleaner into an adapter and push until an audible “click” is heard. The One-Click Cleaner uses the mechanical push action to advance an optical grade cleaning tape while the cleaning tip is rotated to ensure the fiber end-face is effectively, but gently cleaned.

• Cleans connectors on jumpers and in adapters

• Ergonomic, comfortable design with single action cleaning

• Precise mechanical action delivers consistent cleaning results

• Low cost per clean

• Effective on a variety of contaminates including dust and oils

• Automatic advance ensures each clean is performed with fresh cleaning tape

• Compliant with EU/95/2002/EC Directive (RoHS)

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FCP2-10-2000 Revision 1C, 2014-10-29

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

229

Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Kits

FiberWipes

Specifically designed to remove and trap common contaminants found in fiber optic installations, FiberWipes provide superior cleaning results from material that is stronger and more absorbent, yet softer than traditional cellulose wipes. Packaged in a clean room, the fabric is considered “fiber optic grade”.

• Cleaning optical fibers prior to termination or splicing

• Cleaning fiber optic connector end-faces

• Cleaning lenses, mirrors, and other optical surfaces

• Small package footprint ideal for a laboratory or field use

• Rugged 90-wipe mini-tub keeps wipes clean and dry prior to use

• Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet/dry cleaning

• Instructions for use on the side of the tub

Cletop Cassette Cleaner

The Cletop connector cleaner is a rugged palm-sized cleaner that offers exceptional performance with a proven track record. The choice of leading manufacturers and telecom carries worldwide for nearly 20 years – Cletop is a name you can rely on.

• Compact design is ideal for use in labs, assembly lines, or in the field

• Consistent cleaning results without IPA alcohol, which is toxic, flammable, and leaves a residue on fiber ends (white haze)

• Excellent anti-static properties for static sensitive applications and to minimize reattachment of dust to ferrule after cleaning

• Simple push button shutter operation exposes cleaning tape only when in use – minimizing unwanted dust

• Replaceable and cost effective cleaning tape

• Over 400 wipes per tape

Ordering Information

Basic Cleaning and Inspection Kit

This kit adds inspection capabilities to the Basic Cleaning Kit with an OFS300-200 inspection scope. The kit includes OFS300-200 inspection scope, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB and convenient duffle bag carry case.

Basic Cleaning, Inspection and Test Kit

Adds inspection along with multimode and single-mode loss test capabilities. The kit includes OFS300-200 inspection scope, CSM1-2 contractor series power meter, CSS1-MM contractor series multimode light source, CSS1-SM contractor series single-mode light source,

One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB and convenient duffle bag carry case.

DESCRIPTION

Basic Cleaning Kit with Carry Case

Refill for Basic Cleaning Kit

(no Carry Case)

Basic Cleaning Kit with MPO Cleaners and Carry Case

Basic Cleaning and Inspection Kit

Basic Cleaning, Inspection and Loss

Test Kit

Carry Case

INCLUDES AFL NO.

One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB and Carry Case FCP2-00-0900

One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB FCPR-00-0900

One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC, and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB, MPO/MTP

Cleaner and Carry Case

OFS300-200 inspection scope, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC, and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid,

FiberWipes, Cletop SB

OFS300-200 inspection scope, CSM1-2 power meter, CSS1-MM multimode light source, CSS1-SM single-mode light source, One-Clicks for SC, ST, FC, LC, and MU connectors, FCC2 cleaning fluid, FiberWipes, Cletop SB

Field Portable Duffle Bag Cleaning Supplies Carry Case

FCP2-00-0901

FCP2-01-0900

FCP2-02-0900

1400-01-0095PZ

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FCP2-10-2000 Revision 1C, 2014-10-29

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

FiberWipes

FiberAide 1

Features

• Lint free

• Sized for fiber and connector cleaning

• Robust and tear-resistant

FiberWipes is a trademark of MicroCare Corporation.

FiberAide 1 is patent pending.

FiberWipes

New Material – New Packaging – Superior Wipes

Specifically designed to remove and trap common contaminants found in fiber optic installations, FiberWipes provide superior cleaning results from material that is stronger and more absorbent, yet softer than traditional cellulose wipes. Packaged in a clean room, the fabric is considered “fiber optic grade”. FiberWipes are available in rugged mini-tubs (90 wipes) or in hermetically sealed individual packages (FiberAide 1) and are the perfect size for tool kits and test kits.

Applications

• Cleaning optical fibers prior to termination or splicing

• Cleaning fiber optic connector end-faces

• Cleaning lenses, mirrors, and other optical surfaces

FiberWipes

• Small package footprint ideal for a laboratory or field use

• Rugged 90-wipe mini-tub keeps wipes clean and dry prior to use

• Octagonal cover minimizes rolling distance if dropped

• Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet / dry cleaning

• Instructions for use on the side of the tub

FiberAide 1

• Hermetically sealed wipes remain uncontaminated and ready for use

• Foil backed wipes protect skin from cleaning solvents and cable gel

• Packaging contains no glues to leach out

• Button hole for placement on panel board or keychain

• Ideal for shipping with OEM equipment to prevent contamination of fiber surfaces at installation

• Solvent safe; may be moistened to provide wet / dry cleaning

• Pictorial instructions on each package

Specifications

PRODUCT

FiberWipes

FiberAide 1

WIPE SIZE

4.25” W x 2” H

2.75” W x 1.5” H

PACKAGE SIZE

3” Dia x 3” H

4.25” W x 2.75” H

PACKAGE WEIGHT

2.6 oz

0.6 oz / 10 packets

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

FiberWipes – case of 24 mini-tubs (2160 total wipes, 90 wipes per mini-tub)

FiberAide 1 – case of 600 packets (60 bundles, 10 packets per bundle)

AFL NO.

9000-03-0026MZ

9000-03-0027MZ

International Sales and Service Contact Information

Available at www.AFLglobal.com/Test/Contacts

© 2014, AFL, all rights reserved. FOW1-00-2000 Revision 1D, 2014-10-29

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

231

Fiber Optic Tool Kits

As the leader in fiber optic training, The Light Brigade

®

, AFL's training division, understands the special tool needs of technicians and what it takes to do the job in a safe, efficient, and effective manner. Our tool kits were developed with the insight and feedback from experts in the industry. We include options for these tool kits that allow technicians to order variations based on personal preferences without driving up the cost of the kits with unnecessary or redundant tools.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Tool Kit including The Light

Brigade branded bag and listed tools

AFL NO.

T-KCP

Cable Preparation Tool Kit

A basic tool kit designed for fiber optic cable preparation and closure/enclosure preparation for splicing inside or outside. It is also for loose tube or premise cable applications where the right tool is needed to strip, clean, and prepare fiber optic cable for splicing and termination.

Included Items

PART NO. DESCRIPTION

T-2CCS Fiber cable sheath stripper

BRAND

Ideal

T-2CK

T-2CS

Cable knife

Cable slitter

Ripley

Ripley

Ripley T-2CW

T-2CXC

T-2KV

T-2RT

T-2SC

Multi-socket can wrench

Cable cutters

Kevlar

shears with pouch

Ripley

Ripley

Ideal buffer cutting tool Ideal

Splicer’s scissors Ripley

PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND

T-3MS

T-3NP

T-3SDP

T-3SDS

T-3SR

Miller strippers

6" needle nose pliers

Screwdriver—Phillips

Ripley

Husky

Stanley

Screwdriver—standard Stanley

Seam ripper Clauss

T-3TM

T-5ETB

12' tape measure Stanley

Electrical tape—black 3M

Sharpie T-5SPM Permanent marker — black

T-5STB Small tool bag

12" x 11" x 9"

LBI

www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-5-00001, Revision 0, 4.3.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Tool Kit including The Light

Brigade branded bag and listed tools

AFL NO.

T-KERM

Emergency Restoration Tool Kit

A specialized tool kit designed for loose tube outside plant applications where fiber optic cable damage has occurred and a quick repair kit is needed to support emergency restoration. Includes hand tools for fiber cable preparation and closure preparation, mechanical splices, and a basic cleaver.

Included Items

PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND

S-D2501

Universal Fibrlok assembly tool

3M

S-D2509 Fibrlok II cap lifter tool 3M

S-D2529-6

Universal Fibrlok—

Package of 6

3M

OFS

Ideal

T-1VL

T-2CCS

T-2CK

T-2CS

Staple cleaver

Fiber cable sheath stripper

Cable knife

Cable slitter

T-2CW

Multi-socket can wrench

T-2CXC Cable cutters

T-2KV

Kevlar pouch

™ shears with

Ripley

Ripley

Ripley

Ripley

Ripley

PART NO. DESCRIPTION

T-2SC Splicer’s scissors

T-3LP

T-3MS

T-3NP

T-3SDP

T-3SDS

T-3SR

T-3TM

T-5ETB

T-5SPM

T-5STB

8” lineman pliers

Miller strippers

6” needle nose pliers

Screwdriver – Phillips

Screwdriver – standard

Seam ripper

12’ tape measure

Electrical tape – black

BRAND

Ripley

Husky

Ripley

Husky

Stanley

Stanley

Clauss

Stanley

3M

Permanent marker – black Sharpie

Small tool bag

12” x 11” x 9”

LBI

Master Splicer Tool Kit

An all-inclusive master tool kit specifically designed for fiber optic cable preparation and closure/enclosure preparation. It is also for loose tube or premise cable applications where the right tool is needed to strip, clean and prepare fiber optic cable for splicing and termination. Includes specialized tools needed to do mid-cable access procedures and prepare special fiber optic cables such as OPGW, ADSS, MicroCable, and armored loose tube for splicing or termination.

Ordering Information

DESCRIPTION

Tool Kit including The Light

Brigade

®

branded bag and listed tools

AFL NO.

T-KMS

Included Items

PART NO. DESCRIPTION BRAND

T-2BC

T-2CCS

Small bolt cutters—

OPGW strands 14"

Workforce

Fiber cable sheath stripper Ideal

T-2CKSC Cable knife and scissors Ripley

T-2CW Multi-socket can wrench tool

Ripley

T-2CXC

T-2KV

Cable cutters

Kevlar pouch

shears with

T-2OPGW Mini SST pipe cutter—

1/8" to 5/8"

Ripley

Ripley

JHL

T-2RT

T-3JP

T-3MS

Ideal buffer cutting tool Ideal

8" joint pliers Husky

Miller strippers

T-3MSAT MSAT mid-span access tool

Ripley

Ripley

www.AFLglobal.com or (800) 321-5298, (603) 528-7780

PART NO. DESCRIPTION

T-3SDP Screwdriver—Phillips

T-3SDS

T-3SR

T-3TM

T-5ETB

T-5ETBL

T-5ETG

T-5ETR

T-5HSG

T-5SPM

T-HS-

Assort

T-5LTB

Screwdriver—standard

Seam ripper

12' tape measure

Electrical tape—black

Electrical tape—blue

BRAND

Stanley

Stanley

Clauss

Stanley

3M

3M

Electrical tape—green 3M

Electrical tape—red 3M

Heat shrink gun

Permanent marker— black

Wagner

Sharpie

Heat tubes

1/8", 1/4", 1/2", 1" (6" segments)

Large tool bag—

11" x 17" x 10"

LBI

© 2012, AFL, all rights reserved. PP-5-00001, Revision 0, 4.3.12

Specifications are subject to change without notice.

www.AFLglobal.com or (800)235-3423

OEM and Specialty Products

Training Available from

Light Brigade

®

Since 1987, The Light Brigade has trained more than 50,000 technicians, installers, engineers, and designers from a wide variety of industries: telephony, broadband cable, utilities, media broadcast, industrial, manufacturing, mining, government, and aerospace, along with the various branches of the military.

Whether your application is a small local telephone network, a complex fiber to the home network, a sophisticated military facility, or an undersea oil explorationsite, The Light Brigade can provide critical training for your personnel to lower operating cost and improve installation efficiency.

Instructors

Our professional instructors and technicians are technically skilled and have a variety of real world practical experience in all aspects of fiber optics. With experience in applications such as communications, signaling, security, and network control, our instructors provide valuable insight into the design, installation, and operation of state-of-the-art fiber optic systems.

Hands-on Training

By having extensive hands-on sessions in each training class, our attendees learn fiber optics by doing rather than by watching. Attendees spend class time building, testing, or troubleshooting an actual fiber optic system. In each of our courses, the ratio of students to instructors during the hands-on sessions ensures that there is direct personal interaction and attention to each student.

Technology-based

In our training classes, you receive an objective viewpoint, not a sales pitch. We teach fiber techniques that are applicable to any product, and select the best available equipment and supplies from many different manufacturers. You can choose to develop your skills using our state-of-the-art equipment and accessories, or bring your own to learn how to use it more effectively.

Relevant

Our course materials are constantly updated to stay in step with current and emerging technologies. All of our materials and techniques are written and taught based on the latest standards, recommendations, and codes from ANSI, ITU, TIA/EIA, IEEE,

IEC, Telcordia, MSHA, NEC, NESC, and others.

Continuing Support

To ensure continued long-term support, we offer technical assistance to our class attendees. If you have a question or need help after the class is over, our staff is there to help.

Certification Options

Light Brigade Certificate of Completion

Everyone who completes one of our courses will receive a Light Brigade

Certificate of Completion, signed by the course instructor. This certificate specifies the content and total number of instructional hours for both the classroom and hands-on portions and is traceable to the class attended.

Third-party Credits and Certification

Many of our classes are eligible for independent certifications through third-party industry organizations and groups. These certifications are typically progressive levels and show competency in hands-on skills and technical knowledge. See individual course details for more information.

In addition, many of our courses are eligible for BICSI Continuing

Education Credits (CECs), SCTE recertification units (RUs), and IMSA

Technical Advancement Recognition Points (TARPs).

C

TR

O

NIC

S TECH

N

IC

IA

A

S S O

C I A T I O

N

Electronics

Technicians

Association (ETA)

International

Municipal Signal

Association (IMSA)

Fiber Optic

Association

(FOA)

Utilities

Telecom

Council

Building Industry

Consulting Service

International, Inc. (BICSI)

Certified Fiber to the Home

Professional

Society of Cable

Telecommunications

Engineers

(206) 575-0404 • (800) 451-7128 • www.lightbrigade.com

www.AFLglobal.com

CAT-01201 6.10.2015

advertisement

Was this manual useful for you? Yes No
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Related manuals

Download PDF

advertisement

Table of contents